JP2020114402A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine where a customization function can be fully enjoyed.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 10 includes display control means that variably displays identification information in variable display means to be stopped and displayed according to a prescribed lottery result. The display control means can lead out a continuous display object capable of continuously being displayed in a plurality of variable displays in the variation display means. With respect to the continuous display object, customization items that can be customized are set in a plurality of numbers, and a plurality of patterns are provided for customization patterns for each customization item. In an uncompleted object, corresponding to the customization items that are not yet customized, a part of a completed object where all of the plurality of customization items are customized is configured to become a mode being masked in a mode different from a portion that is already being customized.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting entrance means provided on the game board, a lottery is carried out as to whether or not the hit state is to be generated, and the lottery is displayed on the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

In addition, the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute customization of a plurality of items regarding a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in a plurality of variable displays on the variable display means, and prepare a plurality of patterns for customizing each item. There is something. In this way, by utilizing the continuously displayed objects whose modes are changed in various ways for production and the like, it is possible to diversify the production and the like and suppress monotonous feeling during the game.

JP 2006-27480 A

However, there is a possibility that a situation may occur in which the game machine is not played before the player enjoys the desired function.

Incidentally, such a problem is not limited to a pachinko machine, but is a problem applicable to other gaming machines such as a slot machine.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can fully enjoy the installed functions.

The gaming machine of the present invention,
First control means for performing a lottery on whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined trigger and for generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A result display unit that variably displays the identification information based on the predetermined trigger, and stops and displays the identification information based on the result of the win/no win lottery,
An effect display means capable of deriving an effect display that starts with the start of the change of the identification information and ends with the stop display of the identification information,
A second control means for controlling the effect display means based on information from the first control means,
The effect display unit is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the plurality of variable displays in the result display unit.

The gaming machine may be a pachinko machine or a spinning drum type gaming machine.

According to the present invention, it is possible to fully enjoy the installed functions.

It is a front view showing a pachinko machine in the first embodiment. It is a perspective view showing a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where the inner frame and the front frame set were opened. It is a front view showing a configuration of an inner frame, a game board and the like. It is a rear view which shows the structure of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view showing the state where an inner frame, a back pack unit, etc. were opened. It is a block diagram which shows the main electric constitutions of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a main controller. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows NMI interruption processing. It is a flowchart showing a start winning process. It is a flow chart which shows hit/absence judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st classification judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd classification judging processing. It is a flow chart which shows reach judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows a through gate passage process. It is a flow chart which shows special display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a variable display setting process. It is a flow chart which shows discriminating information setting processing. It is a flowchart showing a first variable winning device control process. It is a flowchart which shows an end setting process. It is a flowchart which shows a normal display control process. It is a flowchart which shows a universal figure fluctuation|variation setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the universal figure discrimination information setting process. It is a flow chart which shows a starting winning device control processing. It is a flow chart which shows reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing of a payment control device. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows command judgment processing. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a sub-control apparatus. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for determination of a decorative design, etc. It is a flowchart which shows the update process of a counter. It is a flow chart which shows reservation information storage processing. It is a flow chart which shows reservation processing. It is a flow chart which shows hit display processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of a game system. It is a flowchart which shows a menu display process. (A) is an explanatory view showing a menu screen, (b) is an explanatory view showing a password input screen, and (c) is an explanatory view showing a code issuing screen. It is a flowchart which shows a password input process. It is a flow chart which shows code issue processing. It is a flowchart which shows an access corresponding process. It is a flowchart which shows a password issuing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode in a decorative symbol display device. It is an explanatory view showing an incomplete car displayed in a tuning area of a decorative design display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the hold icon (item hold icon) displayed in the hold display area of a decorative symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode (part selection screen) in a decorative symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode in a decorative symbol display device. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode (completed vehicle selection screen) in a decorative symbol display device. It is a flow chart which shows reservation icon setting processing. It is an explanatory view of a customized winning value storage table. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process of a customization pattern. It is explanatory drawing of a corresponding pattern storage table. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of customization change. It is a flow chart which shows parts selection processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reflection process. It is a flow chart which shows completion car selection processing. It is a flow chart which shows car production setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows normal car production processing. It is a flow chart which shows normal car production processing. It is an explanatory view of a car effect table. It is an explanatory view of a vehicle type correspondence table. It is a flow chart which shows car production execution processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decorative pattern display device in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decorative pattern display device in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decorative pattern display device in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decorative pattern display device in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decorative pattern display device in another embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the decorative pattern display device in another embodiment.

Hereinafter, one embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as "pachinko machine") will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. As shown in FIG. 3 and the like, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 as a fixed frame that constitutes an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and one side portion of the outer frame 11 includes an inner frame as a game board mounting frame. The frame 12 is supported so that it can be opened and closed. Note that in FIG. 3, for the sake of convenience, the game members (such as nails and accessories) arranged on the surface of the game board 30 and the glass unit 137 attached to the front frame set 14 as the front frame are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 6 and the like, the outer frame 11 includes an upper frame component 11a and a lower frame component 11b made of a wooden plate material, and a left frame component 11c and a right frame component 11d made of an aluminum alloy. Each of the frame components 11a to 11d is made of a material and is assembled in a rectangular frame shape as a whole by a detachable fastener such as a screw.

An upper hinge 81 and a lower hinge 82 are attached to the upper and lower ends of the left-side frame forming portion 11c, respectively (see FIG. 1). The upper hinge 81 and the lower hinge 82 rotatably support the upper and lower parts of the inner frame 12, whereby the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed. Then, the inner frame 12 and the like are housed in the space formed inside the outer frame 11.

Further, the right-side frame forming portion 11d is formed with an extending wall portion 83 protruding toward the inside of the outer frame 11 from the vicinity of the rear end portion in the width direction. The extension wall portion 83 covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 (see FIG. 6) provided on the right side rear surface side of the inner frame 12 from the rear surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 5 ). In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, a pair of upper and lower receiving portions 84 and 85 to which the locking member of the locking device 600 is locked are provided on the front surface side of the extension wall 83. Further, a pressing portion 86 that comes into contact with an inner frame opening detection switch 92 described later is provided on the lower receiving portion 85 so as to project toward the inner side of the outer frame 11.

Further, a resin curtain plate decoration 87 is attached to the lower frame portion 11b. A rib 88 protruding upward is integrally formed on the back of the upper surface of the curtain decoration 87. This makes it difficult to form a gap with the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the opening/closing axis of the inner frame 12 is set vertically along the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, so that the inner frame 12 can be opened forward with this opening/closing axis as an axis. It has become. The inner frame 12 is mainly configured by a resin base 38 having a rectangular outer shape, and a substantially oval window hole 39 is formed in the center of the resin base 38.

A front frame set 14 is attached to the front side of the inner frame 12 so as to be openable and closable. Similar to the inner frame 12, the front frame set 14 can be opened to the front side with an opening/closing axis line set vertically along the left side when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10 as an axis. The front frame set 14 may be supported so as to be directly openable to the outer frame 11 rather than via the inner frame 12.

The front frame set 14 has a rectangular outer shape like the inner frame 12, and covers substantially the entire front surface side of the inner frame 12 in the closed state. A substantially elliptical window portion 101 is formed in the center of the front frame set 14. As a result, the game board 30 (game area) mounted on the rear surface of the inner frame 12 can be visually recognized from the outside through the window portion 101 of the front frame set 14 and the window hole 39 of the inner frame 12. The detailed configuration of the game board 30 will be described later.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, on the front side of the front frame set 14, a lower tray 15 as a ball tray is provided in the center of the lower portion, and the game balls discharged from the outlet 16 are lower trays 15. It can be stored inside. Further, on the front side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a ball removing lever 25 for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 15.

On the right side of the lower plate 15, there is provided a game ball launching handle (hereinafter referred to as "handle 18") projecting to the front side. The handle 18 is provided with a touch sensor (not shown) and an operation amount detection means (variable resistor) (not shown) for detecting the operation amount of the operation portion of the handle 18. Then, when the handle 18 is rotated clockwise, a game ball is launched by a launching device 60, which will be described later, as launching means, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotary operation. Further, the handle 18 is provided with a firing prohibition button 18a which can be pressed by the thumb of the right hand holding the handle 18. In the state where the firing prohibition button 18a is pressed, the firing of the game ball by the firing device 60 is prohibited even if the handle 18 is held. Therefore, it is possible to perform the turning operation of the handle 18 while prohibiting the firing of the game ball, or to temporarily stop the firing of the game ball with the handle 18 held.

An upper plate 19 is provided above the lower plate 15. The upper plate 19 is a ball receiving plate that temporarily stores game balls and guides them toward a launching device 60 described later while aligning them in a line. When the upper plate 19 is full of game balls, the game balls to be paid out are guided to the lower plate 15 via a lower plate communication passage 71 and a discharge port 16 described later.

A ball lending button 121 and a return button 122 are provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. As a result, when the ball lending button 121 is operated in a game hall or the like with bills, cards, or the like inserted in a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, depending on the operation. The rental balls are supplied to the upper plate 19. On the other hand, the return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. However, the ball lending button 121 and the return button 122 are not necessary in a so-called cash machine, which is a pachinko machine in which game balls are lent directly to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit.

Further, a ball removing button 123 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 19. When the ball removal button 123 is pressed, a communication hole (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the ball guide path of the upper plate 19 and communicating with the lower plate 15 is opened and stored in the upper plate 19. The game ball is guided (falls) to the lower plate 15. That is, the player can move the game ball on the upper plate 19 to the lower plate 15 at any time by operating the ball removing button 123.

In addition, on the upper surface of the upper plate 19, an effect button 125 and a cross button 126 with built-in LEDs are provided. By pressing the effect button 125 and the cross button 126, a decorative pattern display device 42, etc., which will be described later, etc. In, the corresponding effect is performed or the effect content is changed.

Further, a light emitting means such as various lamps is provided around the front surface of the front frame set 14. These light emitting means play a role of enhancing the effect during the game by changing and controlling the light emitting mode according to the change of the game state. For example, on the periphery of the window portion 101, an annular illumination portion 102 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED is provided. In addition, error display lamps 104 that are turned on at the time of a predetermined error are provided on both sides of the annular illumination portion 102. It should be noted that a large number of fine through holes are formed above the error display lamps 104 in the annular illumination portion 102 so as to correspond to the speakers SP (see FIG. 3) provided on the back surface of the front frame set 14. ..

A glass unit 137 is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. The glass unit 137 is not a conventional pair of front and rear rectangular plate glasses that are attached separately in front and back, but has a round shape as a whole and is assembled and then attached.

Next, the inner frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12 at the rear side of the window hole 39 while being in contact with the back side of the resin base 38. Therefore, the substantially central portion of the front surface of the game board 30 is exposed to the front surface side of the inner frame 12 through the window hole 39.

Further, a lower portion of the front surface of the inner frame 12 (resin base 38), that is, a position below the window 39, is provided with a launching device 60 and a launching rail 61 for guiding the game ball immediately after being launched by the launching device 60. There is. In the present embodiment, a solenoid type launching device is adopted as the launching device 60. Further, above the launching device 60, a ball feeding device for guiding the game balls guided from the upper plate 19 to the launching position of the launching device 60 one by one by driving the built-in driving means (for example, a solenoid). 63 are provided.

Next, the structure of the game board 30 (game area) will be described with reference to FIG. On the game board 30, a general winning opening 31, a first variable winning device 32a, a second variable winning device 32b, a first starting winning device 33a, a second starting winning device 33b, a through gate 34, a variable display device unit 35, a variable. The 1st special display device 43L and the 2nd special display device 43R as a display means, the fluctuation|variation specific lamp 40, etc. are arrange|positioned. As is well known, when a game ball enters (wins) the various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, it is detected by various detection switches, and the upper plate 19 or the lower plate. A predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the plate 15.

In the present embodiment, when there is a ball to the general winning opening 31, there are 10 balls, when there is a ball to the first variable winning device 32a, there are 14 balls, and there is a second variable winning device 32b. 13 balls if there is a ball, 2 balls if there is a ball to the first start winning device 33a, 1 game ball if there is a ball to the second starting prize device 33b Are configured to be dispensed. Further, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 34 that does not enter the ball but does not enter the ball (not discharged to the back surface side of the game board 30), the game ball is not paid out.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with an outlet 36 corresponding to the lowermost part of the game area, and game balls that have not won various winning outlets such as the general winning outlet 31 have the outlet 36 opened. It is discharged through the game area. Further, on the game board 30, a large number of nails are planted in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game balls, and various members (features) such as a wind turbine are arranged.

The variable display device unit 35 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area. In the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47 is arranged so as to surround a decorative pattern display device 42 described later.

A ball entry port 151 is provided on the left side of the center frame 47, and the game ball that entered the ball entry port 151 is a decorative pattern through the warp flow path 152 formed inside the center frame 47. It is guided on a stage 153 formed below the display device 42. The game ball guided on the stage 153 rolls on the stage 153, and falls from the stage 153 to the front game area, or extends in the front and back formed in the center of the stage 153 to form the game ball. It may fall into the guide groove 154 that guides it forward.

A first starting winning device 33a is arranged below the variable display device unit 35. The first starting winning device 33a projects forward from the front surface of the game board 30, and a winning opening through which game balls can always win is opened on the upper side thereof. In particular, the game ball guided in the guide groove 154 of the stage 153 is configured so as to enter the first starting winning device 33a with a relatively high probability. It should be noted that the first starting prize device 33a of the present embodiment is not provided with an opening/closing member that changes the ease with which the game balls enter the first starting prize device 33a.

A first variable winning device 32a is arranged below the first starting winning device 33a. The first variable winning device 32a is normally in a closed state in which game balls cannot be won, and in a jackpot state of a corresponding type, the game balls are placed in an open state in which prizes can be won. Although illustration is omitted, the first variable winning device 32a has a special winning opening that leads to the rear of the game board 30, a big winning shutter that opens and closes the big winning opening, and a big winning for operating the big winning shutter. A first variable winning device is provided with a mouth solenoid and a first count switch 223a for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening. The special winning opening solenoid is driven and controlled to open and close the big winning shutter. 32a (special winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

Hereinafter, for convenience, of the game area, an area located on the left side of the variable display device unit 35 is referred to as a “left side area”, and an area located on the right side of the variable display device unit 35 is referred to as a “right side area”.

In the lower part of the left side area, a general winning opening 31 is arranged along the peripheral edge (inner rail forming part 51) of the game area. The general winning opening 31 projects forward from the front surface portion of the game board 30, and a winning opening through which game balls can always win is opened on the upper side thereof.

The through gate 34 is arranged in the right side region. The through gate 34 is configured so that the game balls flowing down the game area can pass one by one. As will be described later in detail, the through gate 34 includes a through gate switch 225 capable of detecting a game ball passing through the through gate 34.

Further, a second start winning device 33b is arranged on the downstream side of the through gate 34 in the right side region. The second starting winning device 33b is provided with a pair of rotatably displaceable blade members 37 adjacent to the left and right sides of the winning opening (starting winning opening) of the second starting winning device 33b into which a game ball can enter. There is.

In addition, when a game ball is detected by the through gate switch 225, a ball entry support lottery for whether or not to open the second start winning device 33b is performed, and the normal symbol display device 41 is used to enter the game. A variable display is provided to teach the result of the ball support lottery. When the winning support lottery is won, the second start winning device 33b is opened for a specified time after the end of the variation display.

In the present embodiment, the game nail is arranged immediately above the starting winning opening of the second starting winning device 33b, and when the blade member 37 is in the closed posture extending vertically, the game is performed. There is no room for the game ball to pass between the nail and the blade member 37, and the second starting prize device 33b is in a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the starting winning opening. On the other hand, when the blade member 37 changes to the open attitude that opens outward, the second start winning device 33b is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the starting winning opening.

Further, a second variable winning device 32b is arranged on the downstream side of the second starting winning device 33b. The second variable winning device 32b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won, and in a jackpot state of a corresponding type, the game ball is in an open state in which a game ball can be won. Although not shown, the second variable winning device 32b has a special winning opening leading to the rear of the game board 30, a big winning shutter for opening and closing the big winning opening, and a big winning for operating the big winning shutter. The second variable winning device is equipped with a mouth solenoid and a second count switch 223b for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening, and drivingly controlling the special winning solenoid to open and close the big winning shutter. 32b (special winning opening) is switched between a closed state and an open state.

In the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b of the present embodiment, the special winning shutters are pivotally supported at their lower edges along the lower edge of the special winning opening. In the closed state of the first and second variable winning devices 32a, 32b, the special winning shutter extends vertically to close the special winning opening, and the game ball can pass in front of the big winning shutter. On the other hand, in the open state of the first and second variable winning devices 32a, 32b, the special winning shutter rotates forward and extends forward and backward (the upper surface is slightly inclined rearward), and The game ball that has flowed forward is received by the back surface (top surface) of the special winning shutter and guided to the special winning opening.

In addition, an assist winning opening 48 is provided directly above the second starting winning device 33b of the present embodiment, into which a game ball moving in the game area can enter. When the game balls are detected by the assist winning detection switch 227 which counts the game balls that have entered the assist winning opening 48, three game balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 or the lower plate 15.

As will be described later in detail, the first start winning prize device 33a and the second starting prize winning device 33b respectively have a first starting prize switch 224a and a second starting prize switch as condition establishment detecting means for detecting a winning game ball. 224b is provided, when a game ball is detected by the starting winning switch 224a, 224b, a win/win lottery for whether or not to generate a jackpot state or the like is performed, and a special display device 43L, which will be described later, 43R (and the decorative pattern display device 42) is configured to perform variable display. Then, in the case of winning in the win/loss lottery, a jackpot state or the like in which the first variable winning device 32a or the second variable winning device 32b is opened is given.

In the present embodiment, there are a "low probability state" in which the jackpot is won with a predetermined probability in the win/loss lottery, and a "high probability state" in which the jackpot is won with a higher probability than the low probability state in the win/loss lottery. Further, the blade member 37 of the second start winning device 33b is opened relatively frequently, so that the game ball can be easily inserted into the second starting prize device 33b in a "high-ball entering state", and the blade member 37 is almost at the open position. There is a "low ball entry state" in which it is difficult to enter the game ball into the second start winning device 33b. Hereinafter, the state of low probability state and low ball entry state is referred to as "normal mode", the state of low probability state and high ball entry state is referred to as "time reduction mode", in high probability state and high ball entry state. A certain state is referred to as a “probability variation mode”, and a state with a high probability state and a low ball entry state is referred to as a “latent probability mode”.

Further, in the present embodiment, the normal mode, the probability variation mode, and the latent probability mode are continued until the big hit state occurs, whereas the time shortening mode is the special display device 43L even if the big hit state does not occur. When the variable display on the 43R and the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed a predetermined number of times set in advance, the process ends, and the mode shifts to the normal mode.

In the probability variation mode and the time shortening mode, the blade members 37 of the second starting winning device 33b are relatively frequently opened to facilitate the ball entry, while the first starting winning device 33a is the ball entry. Since it does not become easy, in the probability variation mode or the time shortening mode, the player shoots a game ball toward the right side area (so-called "right hitting"). In addition, at the timing of such right-handed striking, an announcement prompting right-handed striking is performed on the decorative pattern display device 42 and the like.

In the present embodiment, the case where the winning ball is selected in the winning lottery performed when the game ball enters the first starting prize device 33a (so-called "navel") and the second starting prize device 33b (so-called "electronic tulip"). , Den Chu”) and the winning lottery that is performed when a game ball enters the game), the type of winning that is awarded changes (type determination that is referenced when determining the type of winning state) The tables are different).

More specifically, as a jackpot type when a jackpot state is won based on a ball hitting the first starting winning device 33a, there are 16 round certainty variation jackpots (hereinafter referred to as "16RS") and eight round certainty variation jackpots ( Hereinafter, there are an "8RS"), an 8-round regular jackpot (hereinafter "8RN"), and a 2-round probability variation jackpot (hereinafter "2RS"). Regarding “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN”, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 30 seconds, or eight are placed in the first variable winning device 32a after the first variable winning device 32a is opened. The game ball is entered as one round, which is repeated 16 times for "16RS" and repeated 8 times for "8RS" and "8RN" before the jackpot state ends. .. On the other hand, regarding "2RS", the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 0.4 seconds as one round, which is repeated twice, and then the jackpot state ends. In other words, with regard to "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN", although it is a jackpot (so-called "big hit with a coin") in which a large increase in gaming balls can be expected during the jackpot state, "2RS" is a gaming ball. It is a big hit (so-called "big hit without hitting a ball") that can not be expected to increase significantly.

In addition, after the jackpot state of "16RS" and "8RS", the "probability variation mode" is given, after the jackpot state of "2RS" is given the "latent probability mode", and after the jackpot state of "8RN" is finished. A “time reduction mode” (in this example, 90 variable displays) is given. In other words, after the jackpot state of "16RS", "8RS", and "8RN" ends, the second starting winning device 33b is in a high-ball entering state that is easily opened, so that the player plays the game toward the right side area. It will fire a ball. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning/winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting winning device 33a, the proportion of 5% is “16RS”, the proportion of 55% is “8RS”, and the proportion of 30%. Becomes "8RN", and becomes 10% at "2RS".

Further, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where the "small hit" is won in the winning/winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting winning device 33a. When a small hit is made in the winning/winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting winning device 33a, the first variable winning device 32a is opened for 0.4 seconds, which is repeated twice. From, the small hitting state ends. That is, regarding the first variable winning device 32a, the appearance is the same as "2RS". However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. That is, when "2RS" is won in the normal mode, the mode shifts to the latent probability mode, but the normal mode is continued even if the small hit is won. As a result, in the win/loss lottery based on the entry into the first starting winning device 33a, the first variable winning is achieved even if the distribution is not made to win the two-round jackpot (two-round regular jackpot) to which the high-probability state is not given. It is possible to avoid a situation in which it becomes clear that the device 32a has been switched to the high-probability state without fail by being opened twice twice.

On the other hand, when the jackpot is won on the basis of the entry into the second starting winning device 33b, the jackpot types include a 16-round probability variation jackpot, an 8-round confirmation variation jackpot, and a 2-round regular jackpot (hereinafter referred to as “2RN”). There is). In addition, when the winning/winning lottery based on the entry into the second start winning device 33b is won, the second variable winning device 32b is opened instead of the first variable winning device 32a (in this example, the round ends. Although the conditions are the same, although the payout numbers (14 and 13) when game balls enter the variable winning devices 32a and 32b are different from each other, the second starting winning device 33b is provided for convenience of explanation. For the sake of convenience, the same names (“16RS” and “8RS”) will also be used for the types of jackpots that are won in the win/loss lottery based on the entry into the. In addition, in this embodiment, the round end condition of the jackpot state in which the first variable winning device 32a is in the open state and the round end condition of the jackpot state in which the second variable winning device 32b is in the open state are the same. There may be some (eight prizes, or one round after 30 seconds have passed), but they may be different (for example, the prize winning upper limit of the game balls during the round is eight and nine).

Regarding "2RS", opening the second variable winning device 32b for 0.4 seconds is set as one round, which is repeated twice, and then the jackpot state ends. That is, regarding “16RS” and “8RS”, a large increase in game balls can be expected during the jackpot state, but “2RN” is a jackpot in which a large increase in game balls cannot be expected.

Also, after the jackpot state of "2RN" is finished, the "time reduction mode" is given. In this example, “2RN” is also divided into three, and “2RN30” that is given the time reduction mode for 30 variable displays and “2RN60” that is given the time reduction mode for 60 variable displays. There is “2RN90” to which the time reduction mode for 90 times of display is added. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the winning/winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting winning device 33b, the ratio of 35% becomes “16RS”, the ratio of 35% becomes “8RS”, and the ratio of 20%. "2RN30" becomes 5%, "2RN60" becomes 5%, and "2RN90" becomes 5%.

Further, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where a small hit is won in the win/no win lottery based on the entry into the second starting prize device 33b. In the winning/winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting prize device 33b, if a small hit occurs, the second variable prize device 32b is opened for 0.4 seconds, which is repeated twice. From, the small hit state ends. That is, the appearance of the second variable winning device 32b is the same as "2RN". However, the game mode does not change before and after the small hit state occurs. That is, a high probability state such as a probability variation mode basically shifts to a low probability state (time reduction mode, etc.) by winning "2RN", but even if a small hit is won in the probability variation mode, Mode continues. As a result, the second variable winning a prize device 32b is shortly opened twice without performing the sort of winning the two-round certainty variation jackpot "2RS" in the winning/winning lottery based on the entry into the second starting winning device 33b. By doing so, it is possible to avoid a situation in which it becomes clear that the low probability state has been entered.

In addition, the first special display device 43L for teaching the result of the winning/winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting prize device 33a, and the result of the winning/winning lottery based on the entry for the second starting prize device 33b. The two special display devices 43R are each composed of two segment display devices, and are configured to be able to display symbols, characters, numbers, etc. as special symbols. The special display devices 43L and 43R are installed at a position visible to the player (a position where the game ball at the lower left of the game area cannot pass in this example).

Then, switching display (variable display) of the special symbol is performed on the first special display device 43L triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first start winning device 33a, and the game ball to the second starting prize device 33b. It is configured such that switching display (variable display) of the special symbol is performed on the second special display device 43R triggered by the entry of the ball. The display contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R are directly controlled by a main control device 261 as a main control means described later.

In addition, after the variable display of the special symbol is performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, the special symbol when the variable symbol is stopped causes the result of the winning/losing lottery, that is, "big hit", " "Small hit" or "miss" is definitely displayed. For example, when a game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a, the special symbol (combination of illuminated segments) is switched at high speed (for example, every 4 msec) on the corresponding first special display device 43L (variable display). ) Is performed, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, one of the special symbols is stopped and displayed (for example, stopped for several seconds). Then, for example, when the "big hit" is won in the winning/winning lottery, the corresponding special symbol is displayed when the fluctuation stops, and the big hit state occurs.

Further, in the special display devices 43L, 43R, depending on the special symbol to be stopped, the jackpot type, that is, "16RS", "8RS", "8RN", "2RS", "2RN" is also taught. It Further, there is not one stop mode of the special display devices 43L and 43R for teaching one jackpot type, but there are a plurality of stop modes, and any one of them is selected and stopped and displayed. In addition, in either one of the first special display device 43L and the second special display device 43R, when the variable display or the determination display is being performed, the other is in the off state ("-" is displayed. However, if neither the variable display nor the determination display is performed, “−” is displayed in both of them.

Further, the variable display device unit 35 includes a normal symbol display device 41 (position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47) which is variably displayed upon the passage of the through gate 34, and first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. A decorative pattern display device 42 is provided for performing variable display in accordance with the variable display.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is configured by a liquid crystal display device, and is configured to be able to variably display a decorative pattern as identification information. Further, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled by the sub-control device 262 and the display control device 45 described later. That is, in the decorative pattern display device 42, the sub-control device 262 performs an auxiliary operation based on the command from the main control device 261 so as to correspond to the results displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. The display content is determined, and based on the determination, the display is performed by the display control device 45.

The decorative symbol display device 42 is provided with, for example, three symbol display areas of left, middle, and right (left symbol display area 401, middle symbol display area 402, right symbol display area 403; see FIG. 45), and each symbol. In the display areas 401, 402, 403, a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, numerical symbols with numbers 1 to 9) are sequentially displayed (variably displayed), and then sequentially in each symbol display area (for example, left The decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped state (in the order of the symbol display area 401→the right symbol display area 403→the middle symbol display area 402). For example, when the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed in the main control device 261, a display corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, and the decorative symbol is a jackpot on the decorative symbol display device 42. Is stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to (for example, the same decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 401, the middle symbol display area 402, and the right symbol display area 403), and the jackpot state is started. It In the left symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol display area, basically, the left symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed first is the "first symbol display area". Also referred to as "", the right symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is secondly stopped and displayed is also referred to as "second symbol display area", and finally the middle symbol display area in which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. This is also referred to as "third symbol display area".

Further, when the decorative design is stopped and displayed in a combination corresponding to the jackpot, as the previous stage, for example, the same decorative design is stopped and displayed in the left design display region 401 and the right design display region 403. Become. In this way, while the same symbol is stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the left symbol display area 401 and the right symbol display area 403, the reach state is a state in which the variable display is still being performed in the middle symbol display area 402. is there. Of course, just because a reach state has occurred does not necessarily mean that it is a big hit.

In the present embodiment, after the reach state occurs, in the middle symbol display area 402, the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (reach symbol) stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 401 and the right symbol display area 403 is on the same activated line. When it is stopped and displayed (when the doublet is stopped and displayed), the jackpot state is given. Further, in the case of an odd-numbered doublet, "16RS" or "8RS" is generated, and in the case of an even-numbered doublet, either "16RS", "8RS", or "8RN" is generated.

The combination of the decorative patterns other than the doublet basically teaches “out”, but in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern is “double” for “2RS” and “2RN” even if it is a big hit. Instead of being stopped and displayed in combination, it is stopped and displayed in a combination that is out of the reach pattern. In addition, the "small hit" is also stopped and displayed in a combination that is out of reach pattern.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of effect stages are prepared in the decorative symbol display device 42 as an effect for teaching or suggesting the staying game mode. More specifically, there is a “probability variation stage” that confirms that you are staying in the probability variation mode, a “normal stage” that determines that you are staying in the normal mode, and a probability variation mode or a time reduction mode. There is a "pullback stage" that is staying, and a "prediction stage" that is staying in either the normal mode or the latent probability mode.

For example, when "2RN" is won in the probability variation stage and the probability variation mode ends, or when "small hit" is won, the probability variation stage ends and the pullback stage is displayed. Then, when "2RN" is won and the period of the given time reduction mode is also ended, the pullback stage is ended and the normal stage is displayed. Further, when the "small hit" is won, there is no change in the game mode before and after the "small hit", and therefore, the probability variation mode remains. Therefore, although it shifts to the pullback stage, it is easy to hit big, and further, when the period corresponding to the maximum of the time shortening mode (variable display of special symbols 30 times, 60 times, or 90 times) is exceeded, It is possible to know that it is the probability variation mode.

In addition, in the case where the jackpot is won in the win/loss lottery performed based on the entry into the second start winning device 33b, only “16RS” and “8RS” are available as the jackpot types for displaying the doublet in the decorative symbol display device 42. Absent. Therefore, basically (except when the variation display corresponding to the entry into the first starting winning device 33a that has been held is exhausted), in the probability variation stage or the pullback stage, that is, in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode. In the decorative pattern display device 42, when a jackpot is taught with a doublet, the probability variation mode is confirmed to be assigned, and after the jackpot state, the probability variation stage is entered.

In addition, for example, when “2RS” is won in the normal stage and the latent probability mode is entered, or when “small hit” is won, the normal stage ends and the precursory stage is displayed. In the present embodiment, this precursory stage is a period of about 10 to 50 times in the variable display of the special symbol when the "small hit" is the transition opportunity, that is, when the player stays in the normal mode. After being deducted in, it usually returns to the stage. On the other hand, when "2RS" is the trigger for the transition, that is, when the player is staying in the latent probability mode, basically it is a precursory stage until a big hit. It should be noted that it is possible to perform a lottery as to whether or not to return to the normal stage from the precursory stage, or to perform a lottery as to whether or not to move to the precursory stage again after returning from the precursory stage to the normal stage (in the case of latent mode It is preferable to increase the probability of returning to the precursory stage, or to win only in the latent probability mode). In addition, if the player wins "8RN" in the winning/winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting prize device 33a, and if the player wins "8RS", the probability variation mode is given until the end of the jackpot state. If it is not instructed to do so, after the jackpot state ends, the process moves to the pullback stage.

In addition, as described above, when the special symbol stop mode in the special display devices 43L and 43R and the correspondence relationship with the jackpot type are grasped, if the special symbol variable display stop mode is confirmed, It is possible to determine which type of jackpot was won.

Further, when a game ball newly enters the first or second starting prize winning device 33a, 33b during the variable display of the first or second special display device 43L, 43R, the variable display corresponding to that is displayed. It is configured to be performed after the end of the variable display that is currently performed. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of variable displays to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but in the present embodiment, the game balls that have won the first start winning device 33a and the second starting prize device 33b have won. Corresponding to the game ball, the variable display up to four times (total eight times of variable display) is suspended.

Further, the number of pending variable displays (hereinafter, referred to as “first variable display”) based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting prize winning device 33a is arranged immediately above the first special display device 43L, The first hold lamp 46a capable of emitting blue light is lit and displayed, and the number of held variable displays (hereinafter, referred to as "second variable display") based on the entry of the game balls into the second starting prize-winning device 33b is, It is arranged immediately above the second special display device 43R and is lit and displayed by a second holding lamp 46b capable of emitting red light. The holding lamps 46a and 46b are provided with four as many as the maximum number of holdings of the first variation display and the second variation display, and are the same as the number of the held first variation display or second variation display. Light. The display contents of the holding lamps 46a and 46b are controlled by a sub-control device 262 as a sub-control unit described later. In addition, when the game ball newly wins the starting winning device 33a, 33b during the big hit state, the variable display for that amount is also suspended.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable display performed based on the entry of the game balls into the starting winning devices 33a, 33b is suspended (having the right to execute the variable display) is a decorative design. The display device 42 is also taught. As will be described in detail later, as shown in FIG. 45, in the lower left portion (holding display area 405) of the decorative symbol display device 42, a holding icon 411 indicating that the variable display is held and stored is displayed. Up to four hold icons 411 are displayed, and the icons on the left side are sequentially consumed. That is, regarding the function of "holding the variable display", as described above, four variable displays can be held, four corresponding to each of the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b. However, in the decorative symbol display device 42, up to four hold icons 411 will be displayed corresponding to the one that is first to be consumed. It should be noted that the hold icon 411 does not have information as to whether the hold icon 411 corresponds to the first variable display or the second variable display. I am doing it.

It should be noted that the suspended variable display is basically designed to be consumed in the suspended order, but when both the first variable display and the second variable display are suspended (suspended lamp 46a, The second variable display is preferentially consumed when one or more of 46b are lit). That is, if the second variation display triggered by the winning of the second starting prize device 33b has not been exhausted, the first variation display triggered by the ball of the first starting winning device 33a is displayed. There is no configuration. For example, when one of the first holding lamps 46a is lit, a game ball enters the second starting winning device 33b and one of the second holding lamps 46b is lit, the first fluctuation display is postponed. Then, the second variable display is performed first.

In the variable display device unit 35 (in this example, the position above the stage 153 of the center frame 47) of the variable display device 35, the variable display performed by the decorative pattern display device 42 is the first start prize winning device 33a, and A variation specifying lamp 40 is provided which indicates which of the second starting winning devices 33b corresponds to which ball (the first variation display or the second variation display). The variation specific lamp 40 includes an LED whose emission color is blue and an LED whose emission color is red, and emits blue light when the decorative pattern display device 42 is performing the first variation display, and the second variation. It emits red light when the display is being performed.

The normal symbol display device 41 is configured to be able to light up and display "○" or "x" as a normal symbol, and when the game ball passes through the through gate 34, for example, the normal symbol is changed from "○" to "x". → "○" → ... and switch display (variation display) at high speed. Then, when the variable display is stopped for a few seconds with a “◯” symbol (winning symbol), the second starting winning device 33b (blade member 37) is opened for a predetermined time. The display content of the normal symbol display device 41 is directly controlled by the main control device 261 described later.

In addition, during the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 41, if the game ball newly passes through the through gate 34, the variable display for that amount is after the end of the variable display performed at that time. It is configured to be performed. That is, the variable display is on standby (held). The maximum number of fluctuation display of ordinary symbols to be held is determined for each model of the pachinko machine, but is held up to four times in the present embodiment. In addition, the number of times the variable display of the normal symbol is held is lit and displayed by the holding lamp 44 which is disposed in the variable display device unit 35 and can emit white light. The number of holding lamps 44 is four, which is the same as each maximum holding number of the variable display of the normal symbol, and is turned on by the same number as the number of the holding variable display.

In addition, as the high ball entering state, for example, (1) a state in which the variable display time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the low ball entering state, (2) one opening time of the second starting prize device 33b ( (Regulated time) is longer than in the low ball entry state, (3) a state in which the specified number of game balls that can be entered per one opening of the second starting winning device 33b is larger than in the low ball entry state, (4) A state in which the number of times of opening the second starting prize device 33b per winning of the ball entry support lottery is higher than that in the low ball entry state, (5) Winning probability of the ball entry support lottery is lower than in the low ball entry state There is also a high state. The high entry state in this embodiment employs the configurations of (1), (2), and (5) above. Of course, the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of the configurations (1) to (5) or any combination of these configurations (1) to (5) may be adopted as the “high support mode”. As a result, it becomes easier for the game balls to frequently win the second start winning device 33b, the number of times the winning/winning lottery is executed increases, and a decrease in the number of balls held by the player is suppressed, resulting in a good ball holding state. ..

Further, the game board 30 is provided with a rail 50 which is composed of an inner rail constituent part 51 and an outer rail constituent part 52 and which guides a game ball shot from the launching device 60 to the upper part of the game board 30. As a result, the game ball that has been launched along with the turning operation of the handle 18 is guided through the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 into the game area formed between the game board 30 and the glass unit 137.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip portion (upper left portion in FIG. 4) of the inner rail forming portion 51. This prevents the situation where the game ball once guided from the rail 50 to the game area returns to the inside of the rail 50. Further, a return rubber 54 is attached to a substantially front end portion (upper right portion in FIG. 4) of the outer rail forming portion 52. The game ball that has been launched with a force greater than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is returned to, for example, the substantially central portion side of the game board 30.

Further, in the present embodiment, the outer rail forming portion 52 is cut off at the upper right portion of the game board 30, and the inner rail forming portion 51 is cut off at the lower right portion of the game board 30. Therefore, the game area is defined by the rail 50 and the inner peripheral surface of the window hole 39 of the resin base 38. However, until the game ball hit by the launching device 60 passes through the return ball prevention member 53, the rail 50 may flow backward, so the parallel portion of the inner and outer rail components 51 and 52 is removed from the game area. Get burned.

As shown in FIG. 3, a ball passage unit 70 is provided below the window 101 on the back side of the front frame set 14. The ball passage unit 70 is provided with a lower plate communication passage 71 connected to a discharge mechanism portion 352 described later to the discharge port 16 of the lower plate 15, and an upper plate communication passage 73 connected to the discharge plate portion 352 to the upper plate 19. In addition, there is a predetermined gap between the launch rail 61 and the rail 50 (outer rail forming portion 52) provided on the front surface side of the inner frame 12, and the ball passage unit 70 of the front frame set 14 has the above-mentioned structure. A foul ball passage 72 is formed to guide the game ball dropped from the gap to the lower plate 15. As a result, if the game ball fired from the launching device 60 does not reach the return ball prevention member 53 and returns backward on the rail 50 as a foul ball, the foul ball goes to the lower plate 15 via the foul ball passage 72. Is discharged.

Further, reference numeral 67 in FIGS. 3 and 4 is a payout passage for guiding the game balls paid out by the payout mechanism portion 352 described later to the front of the inner frame 12, and the upper plate communication passage 73 (upper plate 19). And a passage leading to the lower tray communication passage 71 (lower tray 15). A shutter 68 is provided below the dispensing passage 67, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the shutter 68 projects forward due to the urging force of a spring or the like to substantially close the outlet of the dispensing passage 67. ing. Further, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the shutter 68 can be pushed open by the rear end portion of the lower plate communication passage 71 on the inlet side. In addition, the inlets (ball inflow portions) of the lower plate communication passage 71 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are adjacent to each other, and in the closed state of the front frame set 14, the respective inlets and the payout passage 67 are separated by a predetermined distance, A game ball can pass through the gap between the two. Therefore, when the upper plate 19 and the upper plate communication passage 73 are filled with game balls, the game balls to be paid out flow to the lower plate communication passage 71 side (overflow to the inlet side of the lower plate communication passage 71), and the lower plate connection. It will be discharged to the lower plate 15 through the passage 71.

In addition, the ball passage unit 70 is provided with a full detection switch (not shown) for detecting the game balls located in the lower plate communication passage 71. By the existence of the full detection switch, it is understood that the lower plate 15 is full of game balls (the lower plate 15 is full of game balls and the game balls are staying in the lower plate communication passage 71). be able to. In the present embodiment, based on the fact that the game ball is continuously detected for a predetermined time by the fullness detection switch, an error notification that teaches that the lower plate 15 is full by using the display on the decorative pattern display device 42, voice, etc. Is controlled. It should be noted that the state of the error notification is released when the retention of the game balls in the lower plate communication passage 71 is eliminated and the game balls are no longer detected by the full detection switch (when they are no longer detected for a predetermined time).

Next, the rear structure of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. On the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally so that they are partially overlapped with each other in the front and back. Further, a game ball supply device (payout mechanism) for supplying game balls. A protective cover made of resin or the like is attached. Since the payout mechanism and the protective cover are integrated as one unit, and the resin portion may be generally referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as a "back pack unit 203" here.

First, the rear structure of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 6, on the rear side of the variable display device unit 35 (see FIG. 4) arranged corresponding to the through hole in the center of the game board 30, a resin frame cover for covering the center frame 47 from behind is provided. 213 is provided so as to project rearward. Further, on the back side of the frame cover 213, the decorative pattern display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device facing the front from the opening of the frame cover 213, the display control device 45, and the sub control device 262 can be attached and detached in a state of being stacked in front and back. Is attached to.

The decorative pattern display device 42 is housed in a housing box 42a in which an opening for exposing the display part (liquid crystal screen) of the decorative pattern display device 42 to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 is housed, and the rear surface of the frame cover 213. It is fixed to the side. The display control device 45 is housed in the board box 45a and is fixed to the back surface side of the decorative pattern display device 42 (housing box 42a). The sub control device 262 is housed in the substrate box 262a and fixed to the back side of the display control device 45 (substrate box 45a). In the frame cover 213, an LED control board for driving the LEDs and the like built in the center frame 47 is arranged. Further, the housing box 42a and the substrate boxes 45a and 262a are made of a transparent resin material or the like so that the inside can be visually confirmed.

Below the frame cover 213, a back frame set 215 is attached to the game board 30 so as to cover the general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning device 33 and the like from behind. The back frame set 215 includes a ball collecting mechanism (not shown) for collecting the game balls that have won the various winning openings. The game balls collected by the ball collecting mechanism are guided to a discharge passage portion 217 described later, and discharged from the discharge chute of the discharge passage portion 217 to the outside of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the present embodiment, the back frame set 215 functions as a mounting base for the main control device 261. More specifically, the board box 263 having the main controller 261 mounted thereon is pivotally supported on the back frame set 215 so as to be opened rearward.

Main controller 261 is housed in substrate box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. The board box 263 includes a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing member. The substrate box 263 connected by the sealing member is configured so that it cannot be opened without leaving a predetermined trace. As a result, it can be easily found that the board box 263 has been illegally opened.

In addition, the game board 30 is provided with a ball detection switch that detects the game balls that have entered the various winning openings, corresponding to the various winning openings such as the general winning opening 31. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4, a winning opening switch 221 is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31, and the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b have a first count switch. 223a and a second count switch 223b are provided, and an assist prize detection switch 227 is provided at the assist prize opening 48. In addition, the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b are provided with a first start prize winning switch 224a and a second start prize winning switch 224b. Further, a through gate switch 225 is provided at a position corresponding to the through gate 34.

Although not shown, the back frame set 215 is electrically connected to the winning combination switch 221, the first count switch 223a, the second count switch 223b, the assist winning detection switch 227, and the through gate switch 225 via a cable connector. A first board surface relay substrate that is electrically connected. The first board surface relay board relays the winning opening switch 221 and the like and the main controller 261 and is electrically connected to the main controller 261 via a cable connector. On the other hand, the first start prize winning switch 224a and the second start prize winning switch 224b are directly connected to the main controller 261 via a connector cable without passing through a relay board.

The detection results detected by the various ball detection switches are taken into the main controller 261. Then, the main controller 261 sends a payout command (the number of game balls to be paid) according to the winning situation at each time to the payout controller 311, and a predetermined number of game balls based on an output signal from the payout controller 311. Is paid out (except when detected by the through gate switch 225).

In addition, on the back surface of the game board 30, although not shown, a big winning opening solenoid for opening the big winning opening with the first variable winning device 32a and the second variable winning device 32b is provided. A winning opening solenoid for opening and closing the blade member 37 is provided in the starting winning device 33b. The back frame set 215 is also provided with a second board surface relay board (not shown) that relays these solenoids to the main controller 261.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 5, the back pack unit 203 is one in which a resin-molded back pack 351 and a game ball payout mechanism 352 are integrated. The back pack unit 203 is openably and closably supported with respect to the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12, and can be opened rearward with an opening/closing axis extending along the up-down direction as an axis. ing. In addition, an external terminal board 240 is provided on the upper left portion (upper right portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203.

The external terminal board 240 is for relaying various information transmissions to a hall computer or the like in a game hall, and is provided with a plurality of external connection terminals. For the sake of convenience, no reference numeral is attached, but for example, a terminal for outputting information about the current game state (big hit state, probability variation mode, etc.), front frame set 14 or inner frame detected by opening detection switches 91, 92 described later. 12 terminals for outputting information regarding opening, terminals for outputting information regarding various error states such as ball entry error, lower plate full tank error, tank ball no error, dispensing error, award paid out from the payout control device 311 A terminal or the like for outputting information regarding the number of balls is provided.

The back pack 351 is integrally formed of, for example, ABS resin, and is provided with a protective cover portion 354 that projects rearward of the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. The protective cover portion 354 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is open, and has a size sufficient to cover at least the frame cover 213. However, in this embodiment, the protective cover portion 354 also covers the upper portion and the right portion (the left portion in FIG. 5) of the substrate box 263. As a result, in the closed state of the back pack unit 203, the sealing member provided on the right portion of the board box 263 and the terminal portion (board-side connector) provided along the upper edge of the main controller 261 are covered. It will be.

The payout mechanism 352 is arranged so as to bypass the protective cover 354. That is, a tank 355 having an opening on the upper side is provided above the protective cover portion 354, and the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially supplied to the tank 355. Below the tank 355, a tank rail 356 having, for example, two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently sloping toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 is vertically provided on the downstream side of the tank rail 356. It is connected. The payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out by a predetermined electric configuration of the payout motor 358a and the like. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 and the like.

Further, in the payout mechanism unit 352, a payout relay board 381 that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed, and a power switch board 382 that takes in a main power from the outside is installed. There is. Main power of 24 V AC, for example, is supplied to the power switch substrate 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

Below the back pack unit 203 (substrate box 263), a lower frame set 251 which is axially supported by the left side portion (right side in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12 and which can be opened rearward is provided. As shown in FIG. 6, the lower frame set 251 is formed with a discharge passage portion 217 into which the game balls collected by the above-mentioned ball collecting mechanism flow, and the game balls are provided at the most downstream portion of the discharge passage portion 217. A discharge chute (not shown) for discharging the pachinko machine 10 to the outside is formed. That is, the game balls that have won the respective winning openings such as the general winning opening 31 are collected through the ball collecting mechanism of the back frame set 215 and further discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 through the discharging chute of the discharging passage portion 217. The outlet 36 is also connected to the discharge passage 217 in the same manner, and game balls that have not won any of the winning openings are discharged to the outside of the pachinko machine 10 via the discharge chute. In addition, in the present embodiment, the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are configured as separate bodies and can be opened and closed independently, but the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 are integrally formed. It may be done.

Further, as shown in FIG. 5, the payout control device 311, the firing control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 can be attached to and detached from the back side of the lower frame set 251 in a state of being stacked in front and back. Is attached to.

The firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are housed in the board box 313a and fixed to the back surface side of the lower frame set 251. Although the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313 are described as independent control devices for the sake of convenience, they are actually configured by one board (printed board).

The payout control device 311 is housed in the board box 311a and is fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). The board box 311a in which the payout control device 311 is housed is provided with a sealing member in the same manner as the board box 263 in which the main controller 261 is housed, so that the trace of the unsealed board box 311a remains. Has become.

In addition, the card unit connection board 314 is housed in the board box 314a and fixed to the back side of the board box 313a (the firing control device 312 and the power supply device 313). Each of the substrate boxes 311a, 313a, 314a is made of a transparent resin material or the like, and the inside thereof is visible.

Further, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 321 projecting outward from the board box 311a. For example, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging of the dispensing motor 358a occurs, the dispensing motor 358a is rotated in the forward and reverse directions to eliminate the ball clogging (return to a normal state).

Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a RAM erasing switch 323 protruding outward from the substrate box 313a. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function and can retain the state at the time of power failure even if a power failure occurs, and can restore the state at the time of power failure at the time of recovery from the power failure (power recovery). it can. Therefore, when the power is shut off in the normal procedure (for example, when the game hall is closed), the state before the power shutdown is stored and retained. Therefore, when the user wants to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, the power is removed while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Throw in.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, a locking device 600 is provided on the right side rear surface side of the inner frame 12. The locking device 600 is provided with a cylinder lock 700 (see FIG. 1 etc.) exposed on the front side of the front frame set 14, and a key is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 700 and is rotated by one side to move the inside. The frame 12 can be unlocked, and the front frame set 14 can be unlocked by rotating the frame 12 to the other side. In this embodiment, the inner frame 12 is locked to the outer frame 11, and the front frame set 14 is locked to the inner frame 12.

As described above, the right side frame forming portion 11d of the outer frame 11 is formed with the extending wall portion 83 that covers the entire upper and lower sections corresponding to the locking device 600 from the back side of the inner frame 12 (FIG. 5). reference). As a result, it becomes difficult to allow the wire rod or the like to enter from the back side of the outer frame 11 and operate the locking device 600 with the wire rod or the like. As a result, it is possible to improve the defense performance. Furthermore, the extending wall portion 83 is configured to cover the right end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 5) of the back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 from the back side, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, The back pack unit 203 and the lower frame set 251 cannot be opened.

Further, as shown in FIG. 4, a front frame opening detection switch 91 for detecting the opening of the front frame set 14 is provided at the lower right portion on the front surface side of the inner frame 12 (on the right side of the launching device 60). As shown in, an inner frame opening detection switch 92 for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 is provided at the lower right portion on the rear surface side (lower left in FIG. 5) of the inner frame 12. Each of the front frame opening detection switch 91 and the inner frame opening detection switch 92 includes a detection unit that can be retracted in and out of the switch body. The front frame opening detection switch 91 is provided so that the detection unit faces forward. The inner frame opening detection switch 92 is provided so that the detection portion faces rearward. Then, when the detection unit is in a state of protruding from the switch body, it outputs an ON signal to the main control device 261, and when the detection unit is pressed toward the switch body and is immersed in the switch body, an OFF signal is output. It is configured to output to the main controller 261. That is, when the front frame set 14 is closed, the front frame opening detection switch 91 is pressed by the rear surface of the front frame set 14 into the OFF state, and when the front frame set 14 is opened, the detection unit returns to the protruding state. It turns on. Similarly, the inner frame opening detection switch 92 is turned off when the inner frame 12 is closed by the pressing portion 86 formed integrally with the receiving portion 85 of the outer frame 11 to detect the detection portion when the inner frame 12 is opened. The part returns to the protruding state and is turned on.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. A main control unit 261 (main board) as a main control unit is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 has a ROM 502 that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 501 and fixed value data, and a RAM 503 that is a memory that temporarily stores various data when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. And various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit. However, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM may not be integrated into one chip, but may be configured into a chip for each function.

The RAM 503 includes a stack area in which the contents of internal registers of the CPU 501 and the return address of a control program executed by the CPU 501 are stored, and a work area (work area in which various flags, counters, I/O values, etc. are stored. ) And a backup area 503a.

Further, the RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. The RAM 503 is stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 503a. All data is backed up.

In the case where the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the backup area 503a is in a power-off state (including a power outage in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. This is an area for storing stack pointers (similarly), values of registers, I/O, etc. The writing to the backup area 503a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and conversely, the restoration of each value written to the backup area 503a is the main processing when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination. The same applies hereinafter). Executed in. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to receive a power failure signal SK1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, a power failure process (NMI interrupt process) is immediately executed.

Note that if at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 503a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

An input/output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 having the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 built therein through a bus line 504 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a sub control device 262, first and second special display devices 43L and 43R, a normal symbol display device 41, and the like are connected to the input/output port 505. With this configuration, the special display devices 43L and 43R and the normal symbol display device 41 described above are directly controlled by the main control device 261. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 42 is controlled via the sub control device 262.

In addition, although illustration of various relay boards and the like is omitted for convenience, the I/O port 505 has various switches such as a winning opening switch 221, count switches 223a and 223b, starting winning switches 224a and 224b, a through gate switch 225, and a handle 18. Various detection switches, etc., various substrates, and various electric parts such as solenoids for opening and closing the variable winning device 32 are connected. That is, the main controller 261 is provided with a plurality of terminal portions (board-side connectors) for connecting the connectors of various cable connectors, and these terminal portions and the like constitute the input/output port 505.

A sub-control device 262 (sub-control board) as a sub-control means includes a CPU 551 which is an arithmetic device, various control programs executed by the CPU 551, a ROM 552 storing fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 552. In addition to the RAM 553, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the above, an input/output port 554, a bus line 555, various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit not shown Equipped with. The RAM 553 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 551 executes various programs.

To the input/output port 554, the CPU 551, the ROM 552, the RAM 553, and the display control device 45 are connected via the bus line 555. Further, the input/output port 554 is connected to the speaker SP, the holding lamps 46a and 46b, the effect button 125, the cross button 126, various illumination parts and the lamps 102 and 104.

The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 causes the display control device 45 to perform display control based on, for example, a command signal (for example, a variation pattern command) transmitted from the main control device 261, and causes the decorative symbol display device 42 to display. As described above, in the present embodiment, the fact that the jackpot is won is displayed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R controlled by the main control device 261, and the sub control device 262 is displayed. In the decorative pattern display device 42 controlled by, the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed as the effect display in accordance with the variable display of the special symbol in the special display devices 43L and 43R.

Further, the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls by the payout device 358. The CPU 511, which is an arithmetic unit, includes a ROM 512 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 511, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 513 that is used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 is, like the RAM 503 of the main control device 261, a stack area for storing the contents of the internal register of the CPU 511, the return address of the control program executed by the CPU 511, various flags and counters, It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored and a backup area 513a.

The RAM 513 is configured such that a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and all the data stored in the stack area, the work area, and the backup area 513a is stored. Is backed up. Note that if at least the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a is backed up, it is not necessary to back up the data stored in all areas. For example, the data stored in the stack area and the backup area 513a may be backed up, and the data stored in the work area may not be backed up.

The backup area 513a has a stack pointer at the time of power-off, each register, in order to restore the state of the pachinko machine 10 to the state before the power-off when the power is turned off and the power is turned off again. This is an area for storing values such as I/O. The writing to the backup area 513a is executed when the power is turned off by the main processing, and the restoration of each value written in the backup area 513a is executed in the main processing when the power is turned on. Note that, similarly to the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 is also configured such that the power failure signal SK1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 when the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the CPU 511, NMI interrupt processing as power failure processing is immediately executed.

In the work area, a payout permission flag in which payout permission of the prize control device 311 is set, a command reception flag set when a command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received, and a main control device 261. And a command buffer in which the commands transmitted from are stored.

The payout permission flag is a flag for setting permission for payout of prize balls, and is turned on when a specific command for permitting payout of prize balls is transmitted from the main control device 261, and is turned on when the specific command is received, and is initialized. It is turned off when the process is performed or the power is restored before the power is cut off. In the present embodiment, as the specific commands, the payout initialization command for instructing the initial processing of the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311, the prize ball command for instructing the payout of prize balls, and the main control device 261 are restored. There are three payout return commands transmitted in this case.

The command reception flag is a flag for confirming whether or not the payout control device 311 has received a command. The command reception flag is turned on when any command is received, and similarly to the payout permission flag, the initial setting process or the power shutdown. It is turned off when it is returned to the previous state, and is turned off when the command received by the command judgment processing is judged.

The command buffer is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores commands transmitted from main controller 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and if the commands are stored in all storage areas, they are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

An input/output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 incorporating the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 including an address bus and a data bus. A RAM erasing switch circuit 543, a main control device 261, a firing control device 312, a payout device 358, etc. are connected to the input/output port 515.

The card unit connection board 314 is a ball rental operation unit (ball lending button 121 and return button 122) on the front of the pachinko machine 10 and a card unit (ball lending unit) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10 in a game hall or the like. Are electrically connected to and, respectively, and take in a command of a ball lending operation by the player and output it to the card unit. Note that the card unit connection board 314 can be omitted in a cash machine in which game balls are lent out directly from the ball lending device or the like to the upper plate 19 without going through the card unit.

The launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 60, and the launch device 60 is allowed to be driven when a predetermined condition is satisfied. Specifically, a discharge permission signal is output from the payout control device 311, a sensor signal indicates that the player is touching the steering wheel 18, and a discharge prohibition button 18a ( On the condition that (see FIG. 1) is not operated, the launching device 60 is driven, and the game ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the handle 18.

The display control device 45 executes variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42 according to the instruction from the sub controller 262. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a program ROM 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, a video display processor (VDP) 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and bus lines 530, 531. It has and. The input/output port 554 of the sub control device 262 is connected to the input port 527. Further, the CPU 521, the program ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the VDP 526 are connected to the input port 527 via the bus line 530. An output port 529 is connected to the VDP 526 via a bus line 531 and a decorative symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the display command transmitted from the sub-control device 262 via the input port 527, analyzes the received command, or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received command to control the VDP 526. (Specifically, generation of an internal command for the VDP 526) is performed. Thereby, the display control in the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed.

The program ROM 522 is a memory that stores various control programs executed by the CPU 521 and fixed value data, and the work RAM 523 is a memory that temporarily stores work data and flags used when the CPU 521 executes various programs. Is.

The video RAM 524 is a memory that stores display data displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display content of the decorative symbol display device 42 is changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory that stores character data such as a pattern displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The VDP 526 is a kind of drawing circuit that directly operates an LCD driver (liquid crystal drive circuit) incorporated in the decorative pattern display device 42. Since the VDP 526 is formed as an IC chip, it is also called a "drawing chip", and the substance thereof should be called a microcomputer chip having a firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 526 adjusts the respective timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, etc. to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and at the same time, reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 to display it on the decorative symbol display device 42.

The power supply device 313 also includes a power supply unit 541 that supplies electric power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors power interruption due to a power failure, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 connected to the RAM erase switch 323. It has and.

The power supply unit 541 supplies necessary operation power to each of the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 through a power supply path (not shown). As its outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24V power supply supplied from the outside and generates +12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, +5V power supply for logic, backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. The +12V power supply, the +5V power supply, and the backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. It should be noted that the firing control device 312 is supplied with operating power (+12V power supply, +5V power supply, etc.) via the payout control device 311. Similarly, operating power is supplied to various switches, motors, and the like via a control device to which they are connected.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit that outputs a power failure signal SK1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of DC stable 24 V which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 541, and when this voltage is less than 22 V, determines that a power failure (power interruption) has occurred, The power failure signal SK1 is output to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. By the output of the power failure signal SK1, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure time processing (NMI interrupt processing).

Note that the power supply unit 541 normally outputs the output voltage of 5 V, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time to execute the power failure process even after the DC stable voltage of 24 V becomes less than 22 V. It is configured to maintain a value. Therefore, the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure process.

The RAM erasing switch circuit 543 is a circuit that takes in the switch signal of the RAM erasing switch 323 and clears the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main controller 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout controller 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal SK2 to the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the RAM erasing switch 323 being pressed down (including powering on due to elimination of power failure), the data in the respective RAMs 503 and 513 are cleared in the main controller 261 and the payout controller 311. It

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 provided in the main control device 261 as the main control means performs the lottery using various counter information during the game. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, a win/loss random number counter C1 as win/loss random number generation means used in win/win lottery for whether or not to generate a jackpot state, and a type used for determination of a jackpot type (type lottery). A decision counter C2, a variation selection counter C3 used to decide whether or not a reach state is generated in the decorative symbol display device 42, an initial value random number counter CINI used to set an initial value of the winning and rejecting random number counter C1, and a first And, the first variation type counter CS1 and the second variation type counter CS2 used for determining the variation display time of the second special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), and the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device 41 (on. The normal symbol random number counter C4 used for the ball support lottery) is used. The variation selection counter C3 is also used for the reach type lottery when the decorative symbol display device 42 is displaced and varied. Further, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are also used for the fluctuation pattern selection (effect pattern selection) of the decorative pattern display device 42. Specifically, the variation time of the special display devices 43L and 43R is determined by the determined variation pattern, and the variation mode and variation time of the decorative pattern display device 42, that is, the effect pattern is determined.

Each of the counters C1, C2, C3, CINI, CS1, CS2, C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the upper limit value, it returns to 0 which is the lower limit value. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 (excluding the random number initial value counter CINI).

In the RAM 503, the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the special fluctuation holding area as a holding storage area in which the respective values of the fluctuation selection counter C3 are stored, and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is normally stored. A variable holding area is provided. The normal variable holding area includes one execution area and four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas). In each holding area of the normal fluctuation holding area, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series according to the passage history of the game ball to the through gate 34. By adopting this configuration, the variable display on the normal symbol display device 41 can be held up to four times.

The special variation reservation area includes a first special variation reservation area and a second special variation storage area, each of which includes four reservation areas (reservation first to reservation fourth areas), and one execution area. In each of the holding areas of the first special variation holding area, the respective values of the winning/discarding random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are set in accordance with the winning history of the game ball to the first starting winning device 33a. Stored in series. In each of the holding areas of the second special variation holding area, the respective values of the winning/discarding random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game balls to the second starting winning device 33b. Stored in series. By adopting this configuration, the variable displays on the special display devices 43L and 43R can be held up to four times each.

Explaining each counter in detail, the success/failure random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a range of 0 to 599, for example, and after reaching an upper limit value (that is, 599) as a final value, a lower limit value 0 as a starting value. It is configured to return to. Normally, when the success/failure random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI at that time is read as the next initial value of the success/failure random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the random number counter C1 (value=0 to 599), and is updated once for each timer interrupt and repeatedly within the remaining time of the normal process. On the other hand, the success/failure random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once in each timer interrupt in the present embodiment), and the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 is stored in the success/failure random number counter buffer. Then, at the timing when the game ball wins the first start prize winning device 33a or the second start prize winning device 33b, the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 stored in the win/no random number counter buffer is stored in the special variation holding area.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of values of the success/failure random number counter C1 which is a big hit in the low-probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode) is 2, and the value is “7,307”. In the state (probability variation mode, latent probability mode), the number of win/fail random number counters C1 is 20, and the values are "7 to 16 and 307 to 316". In the present embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two win/loss determination tables as win value storage means that are referred to when determining whether or not the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot. There are a first hit/miss determination table that stores "7, 307" as a big hit value and a second hit/miss determination table that stores "8 to 16, 308 to 316" as a big hit value.

Further, in the present embodiment, by using the winning/discarding random number counter C1, when the big hit is not won, a lottery is carried out as to whether or not the small win is won. In the low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), the number of values of the success/failure random number counter C1 which is a small hit is 1, and the value is “404”, and the high probability state (probability variation mode, latent probability mode). ), the number of values of the success/failure random number counter C1 which is a small hit is 10, and the value is “404 to 413”. To determine whether or not to win the small hit, the first small hit determination table that stores “404” as the winning value and the second small hit determination table that stores “405 to 413” as the winning value are referred to.

In the normal mode, the probability of winning the jackpot in the win/loss lottery (big hit probability) is 1/300, and the probability of winning the small hit (small hit probability) is 1/600. The variation time in the normal symbol display device 41 for teaching the result is 8 seconds, and when the winning support lottery is won, the second starting winning device 33b is opened for 0.4 seconds.

In the probability variation mode, the big hit probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/60, which is easier than in the normal mode. Also, in the probability variation mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the entry support lottery is 0.4 seconds, which is shorter than that in the normal mode, and when the entry support lottery is won, the second The starting winning device 33b is opened three times, and each opening time is 4 seconds (the opening for 4 seconds is repeated 3 times with the closing period of 0.4 seconds interposed). That is, in the probability variation mode, the variation time in the normal symbol display device 41 is shorter than that in the normal mode, and the opening time of the second starting prize device 33b per winning of the ball entry support lottery is long and the number of times of opening is large. Will increase. As a result, since the time period in which the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state becomes long, the game balls frequently enter the second starting winning device 33b (becomes a high winning state). The winning/winning lottery will be carried out continuously, and the ball will be in good condition. In the high-ball entry state, the probability that the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 (probability of winning the ball entry support lottery) may be set higher than that in the normal mode.

In the time shortening mode, the jackpot probability is 1/300 and the jackpot probability is 1/600. Further, in the time shortening mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 based on the ball entry support lottery is 0.4 seconds, and when the player wins the ball entry support lottery, the second starting prize device 33b is opened three times. At the same time, each opening time becomes 4 seconds. That is, in the time reduction mode, the jackpot probability has the same low probability as in the normal mode, but when only the operation of the second starting winning device 33b is viewed, it is the same as the probability variation mode. In the present embodiment, after the jackpot state of "8RN" or "2RN" ends, the variable display of the specified number of times in total on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R (90 times after "8RN" is performed uniformly. Therefore, the time reduction mode is set for 30 times (“2RN30”), 60 times (“2RN60”), and 90 times (“2RN90”). In addition, the time reduction mode ends when the specified number of times of variable display is performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R even if the big hit state does not occur, and then shifts to the normal mode.

In the latent probability mode, the big hit probability is 1/30 and the small hit probability is 1/60. Further, in the latent probability mode, the variation time of the normal symbol display device 41 is 8 seconds, and when the winning support lottery is won, the second starting winning device 33b is opened only once for 0.4 seconds. That is, in the latent probability mode, the jackpot probability has the same high probability as in the probability variation mode, but when only the operation of the second starting winning device 33b is viewed, it is the same as the normal mode. In the present embodiment, the latent probability mode is set after the “2RS” big hit state ends, and continues until at least the big hit state occurs. In addition, in the present embodiment, when the winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting prize device 33a is won, there is no allocation to win "2RN", so the latent mode ends quietly. Such a situation is avoided (it continues until you win the big hit with a ball).

The type determination counter C2 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 19, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 19), returns to the lower limit value of 0. Further, in the ROM 502, the first type determination table (corresponding to the first starting winning device 33a), which is referred to when determining which jackpot type the value of the type determination counter C2 corresponds to, the second type determination A table (corresponding to the second starting winning device 33b) is provided. When the jackpot is won in the win/no win lottery, the type of the jackpot state to be given is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 (the type lottery is performed), and the jackpot state of the determined type is determined. Will be granted.

The type determination counter C2 is updated periodically (in this embodiment, once for each timer interrupt), and the value of the type determination counter C2 is stored in the type determination counter buffer. Then, the value of the type determination counter C2 stored in the type determination counter buffer is stored in the special fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b. ..

The variation selection counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 238), returns to the lower limit value of 0. In the present embodiment, the variation selection counter C3 causes a reach state with respect to the decorative symbol, and then the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol and stops, so that the reach state similarly occurs. After that, the final stop design is determined to be stopped except before and after the reach design, "reach other than out of front and back" and "complete removal" in which the reach state does not occur. In the present embodiment, a reach determination table that stores the correspondence between the value of the variation selection counter C3 and the reach type is provided in the ROM 502. A value of “0 to 238” is stored in the reach determination table, C3=0, 1 corresponds to the out-of-front/reach reach, C3=2 to 21 corresponds to the reach other than the out-of-front/rear, and C3=22 to 238 is complete. It has a structure that corresponds to the disconnection.

The fluctuation selection counter C3 is updated regularly (once in each timer interrupt in this embodiment), and the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 is stored in the fluctuation selection counter buffer. Then, the value of the variation selection counter C3 stored in the variation selection counter buffer is stored in the special variation reservation area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the game ball wins the first start winning configuration device 33a or the second startup winning configuration device 33b. ..

Further, of the two fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, one fluctuation type counter CS1 is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 59, for example, and reaches the upper limit value (that is, 59), and then the lower limit value. The variation type counter CS2 is configured to return to 0, and the other variation type counter CS2 is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 37, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 37), returns to the lower limit value of 0. Has become. For example, the first variation type counter CS1 determines the so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. reach patterns of decorative symbols and other rough symbol variation modes, and the second variation type counter CS2 determines the final stop symbol after the reach occurs. A finer pattern variation mode such as the elapsed time until (in this example, the middle symbol) is stopped is determined. Therefore, by combining these fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2, it is possible to easily realize a variety of fluctuation patterns. Further, it is also possible to determine the symbol variation mode only by the first variation type counter CS1, or it is also possible to determine the symbol variation aspect by combining the first variation type counter CS1 and the stop symbol.

The fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated once each time a normal process described later is executed, and are repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal process. Then, the buffer values of CS1 and CS2 are acquired when the variation pattern is determined by the decoration symbol display device 42 when the variation of the decoration symbol is started.

The size and range of each counter are merely examples and can be changed arbitrarily. However, it is desirable that the random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 have different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

Moreover, the normal symbol random number counter C4 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of 0 to 99, for example, and is configured as a loop counter that returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 99). The random number counter C4 is updated regularly (once in each of the timer interrupts in the present embodiment), and the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right through gate 34. The number of random numbers that can be won in the ball state is one, and the range is 1. On the other hand, the number of random numbers that is won in the high ball state is 99, The range is “1 to 99.” And, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 to be won is acquired, after the variable display is performed for a predetermined time on the normal symbol display device 41, the symbol corresponding to the winning ("○" in this example) is stopped and displayed, and the second start winning device 33b is opened in a pattern according to the game mode at that time.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main controller 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart. The processing of the CPU 501 is broadly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec), and a stop signal to an NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process which is activated by the input of the above. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process will be described first, and then the main process will be described.

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 every 2 msec, for example. First, in step S301, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, the states of various switches (excluding the RAM erasing switch 323) connected to the main controller 261 are read, the state of the switches is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. On the other hand, if there is no detection information, the process directly proceeds to the next process.

In addition, when there is the detection information of the various winning switches, the value of the corresponding prize ball counter is added. In an external output process of a normal process described later, a prize ball command based on the value of each prize ball counter is output to the payout control device 311, and a prize ball is awarded based on the prize ball command (a game ball is paid out. ). Further, when the prize ball command is output, the value of each prize ball counter is reset.

In step S302, random number initial value updating processing is executed. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

In step S303, random number update processing is executed. Specifically, the win/fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, the variation selection counter C3, and the normal symbol random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in this embodiment, 599 and 19 respectively). , 238, 99), each clears to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1, C2, C3, C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 503.

After that, in step S304, the start winning process associated with winning the start winning device 33 is executed, and in step S305, the through gate passing process associated with passing the game ball to the through gate 34 is executed. After that, the timer interrupt processing is once ended.

Here, the starting winning process of step S304 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In the RAM 503, a first hold counter Na that counts the number of held variable displays triggered by winning the first start winning device 33a, and a pending display of variable displays triggered by winning the second starting winning device 33b. A second hold counter Nb for counting the number is provided.

In addition, in the execution area and each of the holding areas of the special variation holding area, a winning/discarding random number storage area that stores the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1, a winning type random number storing area that stores the value of the type determining counter C2, and a fluctuation selecting counter C3 A reach random number storage area for storing values is provided. In the present embodiment, the hit/random number storage area uses 2 bytes to store the value of the hit/random number counter C1. The winning type random number storage area and the reach random number storage area each use 1 byte to store the value of the type determination counter C2 and the value of the variation selection counter C3.

Further, in the execution area of the special variation holding area, is there a variation display (first variation display) based on a ball entered into the first start winning a prize device 33a, or based on a ball entered into the second start award winning device 33b. A fluctuation storage area is provided in which information indicating whether the display is a fluctuation display (second fluctuation display) is stored. Hereinafter, "the information indicating that the first variation display is stored in the variation storage area" is also referred to as "the first variation flag is set on", and "the second variation display is displayed in the variation storage area". "The information indicating "is stored" is also referred to as "the second variation flag is set to ON".

First, in step S501, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second start prize-winning device 33b based on the detection information of the second start prize-winning switch 224b. When a positive determination is made in step S501, it is determined in step S502 whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the present embodiment). When a negative determination is made in step S501 or S502, the process proceeds to step S509. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S502, the operation proceeds to step S503, and the second holding counter Nb is incremented by one.

In the following step S504, the respective values of the win/fail random number counter C1, the type determination counter C2, and the variation selection counter C3 updated in the random number updating process of step S303 (the random number counter buffer, the type determination counter buffer, and the variation selection counter buffer are stored). Each stored value) is stored in the first area (winning random number storage area, winning type random number storage area, reach random number storage area) of the free holding areas of the special variation holding area. After step S504, the process moves to step S505.

In step S505, a win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to a big hit or a small hit. The details of the hit/miss determination processing will be described later.

In the following step S506, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot, the jackpot is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area. A type determination process for determining the type of is performed. The details of the type determination process will be described later.

In the following step S507, when it is determined in step S505 that the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the jackpot, the value is deviated based on the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area. Reach determination processing for determining the type of reach at the time of fluctuation is performed. The details of the reach determination process will be described later.

Here, details of the hit/miss determination processing in step S505 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5101, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any one of the values “7” and “307” stored in the first winning/discarding determination table. Determine whether. By the way, "7" and "307" are values that are a big hit in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

It should be noted that in FIG. 14, the process of step S 5101 is simplified for convenience of description, but actually, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is “7”, and the determination is negative. If it is determined, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 is "307", and if either of these determinations is affirmative, affirmative determination is made in step S5101, which determination is which? Also in the case where the negative determination is made, the negative determination is made in step S 5101.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S5101, the first winning/prohibiting flag is turned on in step S5102, and then this processing ends. In the present embodiment, a win/loss flag is not separately provided in addition to the win/loss random number storage area that stores the value of the win/loss random number counter C1, and information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs in the win/loss random number storage area. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the win/fail random number storage area uses 2 bytes, and in this step S5102, for example, “1010101010101010” is set in the win/fail random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for the sake of convenience, the setting of the random number storage area will be described by turning on the first win/loss flag.

When a negative determination is made in step S5101, in step S5103, the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is the value stored in the second success/failure determination table “8 to 16, 308”. .About.316". By the way, “8 to 16, 308 to 316” are values that are a big hit only in the probability variation mode. Even in the determination process, in reality, as described above, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number counter C1 and each value corresponding to the jackpot match.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S5103, the second hit/miss flag is turned on in step S5104, and then this processing ends. In addition, turning on the second hit/miss flag means that, for example, “1100110011001100” is set in the hit/miss random number storage area.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5103, that is, when the high probability state is also “out”, in step S5105, the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is the first value. It is determined whether or not it matches the value “404” stored in the small hit determination table. By the way, "404" is a value that is a small hit in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S5105, the first small hit flag is turned on in step S5106, and then this processing ends. In the present embodiment, the information on whether or not the small hit state is generated is also stored (overwritten) in the win/fail random number storage area.

When a negative determination is made in step S5105, in step S5107, the value of the success/failure random number counter C1 newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area is the value stored in the second small hit determination table, "405-413". It is determined whether or not By the way, “405 to 413” is a value that is a big hit only in a high probability state. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5107, the second small hit flag is turned on in step S5108, and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S5107, the present process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the information relating to the win/loss is stored using 2 bytes, for example, the win/fail flag (contents of the win/loss random number storage area) is rewritten when noise occurs. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a jackpot state occurs even though the player is not a winner, or a jackpot state does not occur in a player who is a winner. Further, the pattern (combination of “1” and “0”) set in the win/loss random number storage area in the win/loss determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 is stored in the win/loss random number storage area. is there.

The value of the random number counter C1 is stored in addition to the random number storage area for storing the value of the random number counter C1 at this time, and the value of the random number counter C1 is stored at this point. In the variable display setting process performed at the start, the corresponding table may be referred to on the basis of the value of the random number counter C1 to determine whether or not the result is valid. Moreover, a random number counter for small hits may be provided in addition to the hit/miss random number counter C1 used for the big hit determination.

Next, the second type determination process of step S506 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5401, it is determined whether or not the first or second win/loss flag is set to ON in the win/loss determination process performed immediately before. When a negative determination is made in step S5401 (there is no possibility that a big hit state will occur), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S5401 (there is a possibility that a big hit state will occur), then in step S5402, the type decision counter newly stored in the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration by taking into account the second type decision table. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “0” corresponding to “16RS”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5402, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5403, and then this processing ends.

Note that in the present embodiment, a 16RS flag or the like is not separately provided in addition to the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determining counter C2, and the winning type random number storage area is "16RS" or the like. The information is stored (overwritten). As described above, the winning type random number storage area uses 1 byte, and in step S5403, for example, “10101010” is set in the winning type random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, setting a pattern indicating a jackpot type such as “16RS” in the winning type random number storage area is referred to as turning on a flag indicating the jackpot type (16RS flag or the like). explain. The pattern (combination of "1" and "0") set in the winning type random number storage area in the type determining process is not used when the value of the type determining counter C2 is stored in the winning type random number storage area. It is a pattern.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5402, in step S5404, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to “8RS” by referring to the second type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of "7 to 13". If an affirmative decision is made in step S5404, then in step S5405 the 8RS flag is turned on (for example, "00011111" is set in the winning type random number storage area), and then this processing is ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S5404, the second type determination table is taken into consideration in step S5406, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is a value corresponding to “2RN30”. It is determined whether or not it matches any of "14 to 17". If an affirmative decision is made in step S5406, then in step S5407 the 2RN30 flag is turned on and then this processing is ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S5406, the second type determination table is taken into consideration in step S5408, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is a value corresponding to “2RN60”. It is determined whether or not it matches “18”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5408, the 2RN60 flag is turned on in step S5409, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5408, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is the value “19” corresponding to “2RN90”. After the flag is turned on, this process ends. In the type determination process, it is only necessary to be able to determine the type of jackpot. For example, instead of determining whether the value corresponding to “16RS”, which has a large number of random number values corresponding to winning, and the acquired random number value match, It may be configured to determine whether the value corresponding to “2RN90” and the acquired random number value match.

Next, the reach determination process of step S507 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S5301, it is determined whether or not the first win/loss flag has been set in the win/loss determination process performed immediately before. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5301, that is, if the jackpot is a big hit in both the low-probability state and the high-probability state (the big hit state is always generated), the present process is ended.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5301, that is, when the jackpot state does not occur (there is a possibility of being out of place) at least in the low-probability state, in step S5302, the reach determination table is taken into consideration and newly added. It is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3 stored in the special fluctuation holding area matches any one of the values “0, 1” corresponding to the “front/rear deviation”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5302, in step S5303, the front/rear flag indicating the occurrence of front/rear out-of-reach is turned on, and then this processing is ended.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the front and rear flags are not separately provided in addition to the reach random number storage area for storing the value of the fluctuation selection counter C3, and the information indicating that the reach random number storage area is “out-of-front and rear reach” is provided. Is stored (overwritten). As described above, the reach random number storage area uses 1 byte, and in the step S5303, for example, “10101010” is set in the reach random number storage area. In the present embodiment, for convenience, the setting of the reach random number storage area will be described as turning on the front/rear flag.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5302, in step S5304, the reach determination table is taken into consideration, and the value of the variation selection counter C3 newly stored in the special variation holding area corresponds to “reach other than front/back deviation”. It is determined whether or not any of the values "2 to 21" to be performed matches. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5304, the flags other than before and after are turned on in step S5305, and then this processing ends. The fact that the flag other than before and after is turned on here means that, for example, “11001100” is set in the reach random number storage area.

If a negative decision is made in step S5304, that is, if the variable display ends without reaching the reach state, that is, "complete disengagement", the present process ends. The pattern (combination of "1" and "0") set in the reach random number storage area in the reach determination process is a pattern that is not used when the value of the variation selection counter C3 is stored in the reach random number storage area. is there.

Returning to the description of FIG. 13, in step S508 subsequent to step S507, the advance command setting process is performed. In addition, in the advance command, the variable information (predetermined information used for determining the content of the variable display) that has been held and stored is triggered by which of the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b. Information indicating the result of the hit/miss determination processing, the type determination processing, and the reach determination processing is included together with the information indicating that the output is to be output to the sub control device 262 in the next external output processing (see step S201). ..

After the processing of step S508, or if the determination in step S501 or step S502 is negative, it is determined in step S509 whether or not the game ball has won the first start winning a prize device 33, the first starting prize switch 224a. It is determined by the detection information of. When a negative determination is made in step S509, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if the determination is affirmative, in step S510, the value of the first suspension counter Na that counts the number of suspensions of the variable display triggered by the winning of the first starting winning device 33a is the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, in the present embodiment). It is determined whether it is less than “4”). When a negative determination is made in step S510, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S510, the operation proceeds to step S511, and the first holding counter Na is incremented by one.

In a succeeding step S512, the respective values of the winning/discarding random number counter C1, the type determining counter C2, and the variation selecting counter C3 are set to the reserved areas (the winning/discarding random number storage area, the winning type random number storing area, and the reach random number storing area) which are free of the special variation holding area. ). After step S512, the process proceeds to step S513.

In step S513, a win/loss determination process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the win/loss random number counter C1 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to the jackpot. Details of the hit/miss determination processing have already been described above.

In the following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 corresponds to the jackpot, the jackpot is determined based on the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area. A first type determination process for determining the type is performed. In the present embodiment, there are a big win in the winning/winning lottery based on the entry into the first starting winning device 33a and a big win in the winning/winning lottery based on the entering into the second starting winning device 33b. Therefore, the distribution of jackpot types to be given is different.

Here, the first type determination processing in step S514 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S5201, it is determined whether or not the first or second win/loss flag is set to ON in the win/loss determination process performed immediately before. When a negative determination is made in step S5201 (there is no possibility that a big hit state will occur), this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative determination is made in step S5201 (a big hit state may occur), in step S5202, the first type determination table is taken into consideration, and the type determination counter newly stored in the special fluctuation suspension area is taken into consideration. It is determined whether or not the value of C2 matches the value “0” corresponding to “16RS”. If an affirmative decision is made in step S5202, the 16RS flag is turned on in step S5203, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S5202, in step S5204, the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation holding area is a value corresponding to “8RN” by referring to the first type determination table. It is determined whether or not it matches any of "12 to 17". If an affirmative decision is made in step S5204, then in step S5205 the 8RN flag is turned on, and then this processing is ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S5204, the first type determination table is taken into consideration in step S5206, and the value of the type determination counter C2 newly stored in the special variation suspension area is a value corresponding to “2RS”. It is determined whether or not it matches with either "18, 19". If an affirmative decision is made in step S5206, then in step S5207 the 2RS flag is turned on and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S5206, the 8RS flag is turned on in step S5208, and then the present process is ended.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 13, in step S515 following step S514, when it is determined in step S513 that the value of the random number counter C1 is not the value corresponding to the jackpot, the fluctuation newly stored in the special fluctuation holding area is changed. Based on the value of the selection counter C3, reach determination processing for determining the type of reach is performed. The details of the reach determination process have already been described above.

After step S515, the advance command setting process is performed in step S516, and this process ends. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting winning device 33a or the second starting winning device 33b, the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 and the like are directly stored in the special variation holding area, and then the winning/judging determination process. The configuration determination process and the reach determination process are performed, but the configuration is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, a provisional storage area (working area) for temporarily storing these counter values when the values of the acceptance/rejection random number counter C1 and the like are provided is provided, and the determination result, classification A configuration may be adopted in which after the determination process and the reach determination process are executed, they are stored in the holding area of the corresponding special variation holding area.

The process of extracting the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 constitutes a discriminant value extracting process, and the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 extracted in steps S504 and S512 is stored in the special fluctuation holding area. The process constitutes the discriminant value storage process. In addition, the process of determining whether or not the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 in steps S505 and S513 (steps S5101, S5103, S5105, and S5107) is a value corresponding to winning constitutes the first winning/discarding process. Then, the processing of step S5102, step S5104, step S5106, and step S5108 of storing the determination result (setting the corresponding flag) constitutes the result storage processing.

Next, the through gate passage processing of step S305 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In step S601, whether or not the game ball has passed through the through gate 34 is determined by the detection information of the through gate switch 225. When a negative determination is made in step S601, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S601, that is, if it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, in step S602, the number of pending variable displays performed on the normal symbol display device 41 is counted. It is determined whether or not the value of the normal hold counter Nc is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). If a negative determination is made here, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S602, that is, it is confirmed that the game ball has passed through the through gate 34, and the value of the normal hold counter Nc is <4, the process proceeds to step S603, and the normal hold counter is set. Increment Nc by 1.

Further, in the subsequent step S604, a random number related to the success or failure is acquired. Specifically, the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 updated by the random number updating process of step S303 is stored in the first free storage area of the normal fluctuation holding area of the RAM 503. After that, the through gate passage processing is ended.

FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of main controller 261 at the time of power-off is stored in backup area 503a of RAM 503.

That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control being executed and starts the NMI interrupt processing. In step S401, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 as the setting of the power failure occurrence information, and the NMI interrupt processing is performed. finish.

Note that the NMI interrupt processing described above is similarly executed in the payout control device 311, and the information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 by the NMI interrupt. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure, the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control being executed. Then, the NMI interrupt processing shown in FIG. 12 is started. The contents are as described above.

Next, the flow of main processing executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. This main process is activated upon a reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, an initialization process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, for example, in order to set a predetermined value to the stack pointer and wait for the sub-side control devices (sub-control device 262, payout control device 311 and the like) to become operable, for example, 1 Wait processing is executed for about a second. In a succeeding step S102, RAM access is permitted.

After that, the data backup processing is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S103, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided in the power supply device 313 is pressed (ON), and if it is pressed, the process proceeds to step S112 in order to clear (delete) the backup data. To do. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, it is determined in the following step S104 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. Here, if it is not set, the backup data is not stored, and in this case also, the process proceeds to step S112. If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S105, and in the following step S106, it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off. That is, the effectiveness of backup is determined. If the RAM determination value calculated here does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and in this case as well, the process proceeds to step S112.

In the process of step S112, an initialization command is transmitted to initialize the sub control device 262, the payout control device 311 and the like. After that, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 and the like). The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Instead of this RAM judgment value, it is also possible to judge the validity of the backup by whether or not the keyword written in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 is correctly stored.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when opening a hall, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the RAM initialization process (step S113 and the like). Also, when the power-off occurrence information is not set or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like), the process similarly proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like). That is, the used area of the RAM 503 is cleared to 0 in step S113, and the initial value of the RAM 503 is set in subsequent step S114. After that, the interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process shifts to a normal process described later.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed (step S103: NO), it is necessary that the information on occurrence of power failure is set and that the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) is normal. Then, the process at power recovery (process at power recovery) is executed. That is, in step S107, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, and in step S108, power-off occurrence information is cleared.

In step S109, a command for returning the control device on the sub side to the game state when the power is turned off is transmitted. In step S110, the used register is restored from the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. After that, the interrupt permission is set in step S111, and the process shifts to a normal process described later.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed. As an outline thereof, the processing of steps S201 to S211 is executed as a regular processing of 4 msec cycle, and the counter updating processing of steps S212 and S213 is executed in the remaining time.

First, in step S201, a control signal based on the setting contents of the special display devices 43L and 43R and the starting winning device 33 updated in the previous normal processing is transmitted to each device, and output data such as a command is output to the sub side. It executes external output processing such as transmission to each control device.

For example, when the decorative design display device 42 displays the decorative design in a variable manner, it sends a variation pattern command, a design command, etc. to the sub-control device 262. That is, the variation pattern command and the symbol command are output to the sub-control device 262 in order to cause the decorative symbol display device 42 to perform the display effect according to the display performed on the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R. Command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262, which has input the variation pattern command, the design command, etc., determines the variation mode (variation time, effect mode, etc.) of the decorative symbol display device 42 based on these various commands, and the variation mode. The display control device 45 is instructed to display (variable display) on the decorative pattern display device 42.

For convenience, the fluctuation pattern command and the like will be described here. The variation pattern command includes information for identifying the variation type of the decorative design such as normal reach, super reach, and premium reach. The variation pattern command and the like are also 2-byte binary numbers (an output method similar to that of the hold information command), but are shown by hexadecimal numbers every 4 bits for convenience. In the present embodiment, for example, in the normal mode and the latent probability mode, any one of “FF10”, “FF11”, “FF12”, “FF13”, “FF14”, “FF15”, and “FF16” is set as the variation pattern command. Is set. Further, in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, "FD10", "FD11", "FD12", "FD13", "FD14", "FD15", and "FD16" are set. On the other hand, the sub-control unit 262 stores the relationship between these fluctuation pattern commands and the fluctuation types of the decorative symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 determines the effect pattern and the like of the variable display based on the variation pattern command, and controls the display control device 45, voice, and the like.

Hereinafter, the variation type of the decorative pattern and the correspondence between the variation type and the variation pattern command will be described.

The normal reach is a reach pattern in which no special effect display other than the change of the decorative pattern is displayed. Then, "FF11" or "FD11" is set in the variation pattern command corresponding to the normal reach according to the mode. In the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode, the variation display time is shorter than in the normal mode and the latent probability mode even in the case of various types of reach. For example, the fluctuation display time for deriving the normal reach is "15 seconds" in the normal mode and the latent probability mode, and "10 seconds" in the probability variation mode and the time reduction mode.

Super reach is a reach pattern in which a character or the like is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 in addition to the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern (after the reach state is established), which makes the player have an expectation. is there. In this embodiment, three types of super reach SR1, SR2, and SR3 are prepared, and the variable display time is different for each type of super reach. If the super reach SR1 is set to "FF12" or "FD12", the variable pattern command is set, if the super reach SR2 is set to "FF13" or "FD13", the super reach SR3 is set to "FF14" or "FD14". Is set.

Premium reach is an effect mode that can be derived only when a big hit state occurs, and during the variable display of the decorative pattern (after the reach state is established), in addition to the decorative pattern, a character with a different pattern from the super reach is displayed. The reach pattern is performed in the manner described above, which makes the player have a sense of expectation. Two types of premium reach PR1 and PR2 are prepared for the premium reach of the present embodiment, and the variable display time is different for each type of premium reach. Then, in the case of premium reach PR1, "FF15" or "FD15" is set as the variation pattern command. For premium reach PR2, "FF16" or "FD16" is set.

In addition, "FF10" or "FD10" is set to the fluctuation pattern command corresponding to "complete disconnection" that does not reach any reach state, depending on the mode. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation display time that is a complete deviation is set to "10 seconds" in the normal mode and latent probability mode, and "6 seconds" in the probability variation mode and time reduction mode.

In addition, the sub-control device 262 determines a stop symbol (combination of stop symbols) based on the symbol command, and displays it after the lapse of the variable time. The symbol command is a command that causes the sub-control device 262 to determine a stop symbol, and is a combination of probability variation jackpot symbols, a combination of normal jackpot symbols, a combination of front and rear deviation symbols, a combination of symbols other than front and rear deviation, and a complete deviation symbol. It is intended to specify five categories of combinations. These divisions are indicated by, for example, "AA11", "AA12", "AA13", "AA14", "AA15", and any of these is set as a symbol command. On the other hand, the sub-control device 262 stores the relationship between these commands and the stop symbols in a table. Then, the sub control device 262 stops displaying the combination of symbols corresponding to the symbol command.

Hereinafter, the classification of the stop symbol, and the correspondence between the stop symbol and the symbol command will be described. If you win the probability variation jackpot (“16RS” and “8RS”; hereinafter also referred to as “probability variation jackpot with coins”) you can expect to increase the number of game balls, or if you win the regular jackpot (“8RN”) In the following, when the winning is also referred to as "normal jackpot with payout"), the decorative design with the number design is stopped and displayed in the decorative design display device 42 in a combination that becomes a doublet. Becomes In the present embodiment, in the case of “probability variation jackpot with payout”, a probability variation jackpot pattern which is a combination of decorative symbols composed of odd-numbered ditches of 1, 3, 5, 7, or 2, or 2 , 4, 6, or 8, the variable display is stopped and displayed in either combination of the regular jackpot pattern, which is a combination of the decorative patterns consisting of even-numbered double stitches. , Usually, the variable display is stopped and displayed by a combination of the jackpot patterns.

Then, in the case of the probability variation big jackpot with a payout, "AA11" is set in the symbol command, and in the case of the normal jackpot with a ball payout, "AA12" is set in the symbol command. Then, when "AA11" is set in the symbol command, the sub-control device 262 determines one of the combinations of symbols composed of any one of 1 to 9 as a stop symbol and "AA12". Is set, one of the combinations of the symbols composed of any of the squares 2, 4, 6, and 8 is determined as the stop symbol.

The combination of the front and rear detachment patterns corresponds to the "rear detachment reach" in which the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach is generated, and corresponds to the combination of the front and rear detachment symbols. "AA13" is set to the symbol command. In the present embodiment, the stop mode corresponding to "2RS", "2RN", and "small hit" is also a combination of front and rear deviation symbols. The combination of symbols other than front and back is the one that corresponds to "reach other than front and back" where the final stop symbol stops other than before and after the reach symbol after the reach is generated, and the pattern corresponding to the combination of symbols other than front and rear “AA14” is set in the command. The combination of complete removal symbols corresponds to "complete removal" in which even reach does not occur, and "AA15" is set to the symbol command corresponding to the combination of complete removal symbols. In the present embodiment, when the decorative symbol display device 42 displays the combination of the front and rear deviation symbols, the combination of the symbols other than the front and rear deviations, and the combination of the complete deviation symbols, it is "disengaged".

As will be described later in detail, when “AA13” to “AA15” are set in the symbol command, the sub control device 262 stops the symbol combination stored in the corresponding buffer of the RAM 553 for the symbol. To decide. In the present embodiment, three commands "AA13" to "AA15" are prepared for the removal symbol command, but the invention is not limited to this. For example, there is only one symbol command for removal, The sub-control device 262 may be configured to determine the combination of decorative symbols.

Returning to the description of FIG. 10, in step S202, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated. More specifically, like the other counters, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when their counter values reach the upper limit values (59 and 37 in this embodiment), they are cleared to 0 respectively. To do. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

In a succeeding step S203, the prize ball counting signal received from the payout control device 311 is read. Next, in step S204, the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 311 is read.

Then, in step S205, a special display control process is executed. In this process, control regarding the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and determination of a big hit and setting of variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R and the decorative pattern display device 42 are performed. Details of this special display control process will be described later.

In step S206, a first variable winning device control process is executed. In this process, control relating to the first variable winning device 32a is performed. In the present embodiment, when the winning lottery based on a ball entering the first starting winning device 33a is won, a big hit state or a small hit state in which the first variable winning device 32a is opened is derived. There is. Details of this first variable winning device control processing will be described later.

In step S207, a second variable winning device control process is executed. In this processing, control regarding the second variable winning device 32b is performed. In the present embodiment, when the winning/winning lottery based on a ball entering the second starting winning device 33b is won, a big hit state or a small hit state in which the second variable winning device 32b is opened is derived. There is. Details of this second variable winning device control processing will be described later.

In step S208, normal display control processing is executed. In this process, control relating to the normal symbol display device 41 is performed. Details of this normal display control processing will be described later.

In step S209, a starting winning device control process is executed. In this process, the control relating to the starting winning device 33 is performed. The details of this starting winning device control processing will be described later.

After that, in step S210, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503. If the power failure occurrence information is not set in the backup area 503a, it is determined in step S211 whether the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, a predetermined time (4 msec in this example) from the start of the previous normal processing. ) Has elapsed. Then, if the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S201, and the processes in and after step S201 are repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing, the random number initial value counter CINI and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal processing. Repeatedly executed (step S212, step S213).

That is, in step S212, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (599 in this example).

In step S213, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum values (59 and 37 in this example), they are cleared to 0 respectively. Then, the changed values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S210 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process changes rather than being constant. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI using the remaining time, the random number initial value counter CINI (that is, the initial value of the success/failure random number counter C1) can be updated at random, and similarly changes. The type counters CS1 and CS2 can also be updated at random.

Further, if the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 (step S210: YES), it means that the power is cut off. Therefore, the processing after step S214 is performed as the power failure processing at the time of power-off. Be seen. In the power failure process, first, the generation of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S214, the contents of each register used by the CPU 501 are saved in the stack area in step S215, and the stack pointer value is saved in the backup area 503a in step S216. Remember.

Then, in step S217, a power-off notification command indicating that the power has been cut off is transmitted to another control device (payout control device 311 or the like). Then, in step S218, the RAM determination value is calculated and stored in the backup area 503a. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. After that, the RAM access is prohibited in step S219, and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed.

The processing of step S210 is the end of a series of processing corresponding to the game state change performed in steps S201 to S209, or the end of one cycle of the processing of steps S212 and S213 performed within the remaining time. It is executed at the timing. Therefore, in the normal processing of the main controller 261, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed at the end of each processing, the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a of the RAM 503 is smaller than in the case where each processing is in the middle. And can be stored easily. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 503a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the main control device 261 can be reduced. .. Furthermore, since the occurrence of interrupt processing is prohibited before the data is stored (step S214), it is possible to prevent the data from being changed when the power is cut off, and it is possible to reliably store the state before the power is cut off. ..

Next, the special display control process of step S205 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. First, in step S801, a hit state storage area, which will be described in detail later, is referred to, and it is determined whether or not it is currently a state other than the big hit state or the small hit state. During the jackpot state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the jackpot is stopped and displayed on the specific display devices 43L and 43R until the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, A round display period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, an interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is closed, and a special display device after the final round. There is an ending period until the variable display of 43L and 43R can be started. During the small hit state, an opening period from when the display mode corresponding to the small hit is stopped and displayed on the special display devices 43L and 43R until the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, A round display period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is opened, an interval period in which the first or second variable winning device 32a, 32b is closed, and a special display device after the final round. There is an ending period until the variable display of 43L and 43R can be started.

In the hit state storage area of the present embodiment, "0" is stored in the states other than the big hit state and the small hit state, and in the big hit state and the small hit state, "1" is stored in the opening period and the interval period. , "2" is stored during the round period, and "3" is stored during the ending period. That is, in step S801, it is determined whether or not "0" is stored in the hit state storage area, and it is determined whether or not the jackpot state is in the big hit state or the small hit state. It should be noted that the fact that numerical values such as “0” to “3” are stored in the winning situation storage area is for convenience sake, and actually the winning situation storage area uses 2 bytes.

If a negative determination is made in step S801, that is, if the big hit state or the small hit state is in progress, the present process is terminated, while if an affirmative decision is made in step S801, details will be described later in step S802. By checking the setting status of the special figure displaying flag, it is determined whether or not the first or second special display device 43L, 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) is being variably displayed. Specifically, when the special figure display flag is on, it is considered to be in variable display, and when the special figure display flag is off, it is considered to be in stop display, which is a state in which variable display is stopped. .. As will be described in detail later, the special figure display flag is turned on when the variable display of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R is started, and the special figure display flags of the first and second special display devices 43L and 43R are turned on. It is turned off when the variable display is stopped and displayed.

Then, if the negative determination is made in step S802, that is, if it is not in the big hit state or the small hit state and the variable display is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S803, and the second start winning device 33b is used as a trigger. It is determined whether or not the value of the second hold counter Nb that counts the number of held variable display (second variable display) is greater than zero.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S803, that is, when any one of the second variable displays is stored in a suspended state, 1 is subtracted from the second suspension counter Nb in a step S804. In the present embodiment, when the second variable display is stored in the hold by the determination processing of step S803, the second variable display is executed without executing the first variable display. In other words, even if the first variable display is held and stored earlier than the second variable display, the second variable display is preferentially consumed (the first variable display is postponed). ing.

In a succeeding step S805, a process of shifting the data stored in the second special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second special variation holding area to the execution area side, and the holding first area→the execution area, the holding second The data in each area is shifted in the order of area→holding first area, holding third area→holding second area, holding fourth area→holding third area. After step S805, in step S806, a process of causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit red light is performed. After that, in step S807, a variable display setting process, which will be described later in detail, is performed, and then this process ends.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S803, that is, when no second variable display is stored in suspension, in step S808, a variable display triggered by a ball entering the first starting winning device 33a ( It is determined whether or not the first hold counter Na that counts the number of holdings (first fluctuation display) is greater than zero. When a negative determination is made in step S808, this processing ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S808, then 1 is subtracted from the first holding counter Na in step S809. In the following step S810, a process of shifting the data stored in the first special variation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first special variation holding area to the execution area side, and the holding first area→the execution area, the holding second The data in each area is shifted in the order of area→holding first area, holding third area→holding second area, holding fourth area→holding third area. After step S810, in step S811, a process of causing the variation specifying lamp 40 to emit blue light is performed. After that, the variable display setting process is performed in step S807, and then this process is ended. It should be noted that in the present embodiment, there is only one execution area of the special variation suspension area, and the data stored in the first special variation suspension area and the second special variation suspension area are displayed when performing the variation display based on the data. Then, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

Details of the variable display setting process in step S807 will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S901, a mode storage area described later in detail is referred to, and it is determined whether or not the high probability state (probability variation mode or latent probability mode). In the mode storage area, discrimination information for discriminating the game mode is stored. In the present embodiment, the mode storage area stores any value of “11”, “12”, “21”, and “22”, and “11” corresponds to the normal mode and “12”. Corresponds to the time reduction mode, “21” corresponds to the probability variation mode, and “22” corresponds to the latent probability mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the state is the high probability state by determining whether or not “21” or “22” is stored in the mode storage area.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S901, that is, if it is a high-probability state (probability variation mode, latent probability mode), then in step S902, the win/fail random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation suspension area is taken into consideration, and It is determined whether or not either the 1st or the 2nd hit/miss flag (refer to the hit/miss judgment processing in FIG. 14) is set to ON. When an affirmative determination is made in step S902, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is won in the win/loss lottery in the high probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

If a negative determination is made in step S901, that is, if it is a low probability state (normal mode, time reduction mode), in step S903, the win/fail random number storage area is taken into consideration, and whether the first win/fail flag is on. Determine whether or not. If the affirmative determination is made in step S903, that is, if it is determined that the jackpot is won in the win/loss lottery in the low probability state, the process proceeds to step S904.

In step S904, the jackpot confirmation flag indicating that the occurrence of the jackpot state has been confirmed is turned on. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the fact that the occurrence of the jackpot state is confirmed in the winning/discarding random number storage area is referred to as turning on the jackpot determination flag.

In a succeeding step S905, the variation storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration, and whether or not the second variation flag is set to ON, that is, the variation display performed this time is displayed to the second start prize winning apparatus 33b. It is determined whether or not it is the second variation display for teaching the result of the winning/winning lottery triggered by the entry of the ball. If a positive determination is made in step S905, in step S906, the 16RS flag (see the type determination process in FIGS. 15 and 16) is set to ON by taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. Is determined.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S906, that is, if it is "16RS", then 16RS pattern setting processing (processing of setting a variation pattern command and a symbol command) is carried out in step S907. The 16RS pattern setting process is a process for executing a variable display for teaching the occurrence of "16RS", and based on the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503, The variation pattern (variation display time, effect pattern, etc.) of the display devices 43L, 43R and the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined, and the variation pattern command and the symbol command are set based on the determination and various flags. The relationship between the numerical value of the first fluctuation type counter CS1 and the reach pattern and the relationship between the numerical value of the second fluctuation type counter CS2 and the fluctuation time are defined in advance by a table or the like. After step S907, the process moves to step S931 described later.

Further, when the determination in step S906 is negative, in step S908, it is determined whether or not the 8RS flag is set to ON by taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative decision is made in step S908, that is, if it is "8RS", then an 8RS pattern setting process is carried out in step S909. After step S909, the process moves to step S931.

On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S908, then it is decided in step S910 whether or not the 2RN30 flag is set ON. If an affirmative decision is made in step S910, a 2RN30 pattern setting process is carried out in step S911. After step S911, the process moves to step S931.

Furthermore, when a negative determination is made in step S910, it is determined in step S912 whether or not the 2RN60 flag is set to ON. If an affirmative decision is made in step S912, a 2RN60 pattern setting process is carried out in step S913. After step S913, the process moves to step S931.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S912, that is, when the 2RN90 flag is set to ON, the 2RN90 pattern setting process is performed in step S914. After step S914, the process proceeds to step S931.

In addition, when the negative determination is made in step S905, that is, when the variation display performed this time is the first variation display for teaching the result of the winning/winning lottery triggered by the entry into the first starting prize device 33a. In step S915, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration to determine whether the 16RS flag is set to ON.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S915, 16RS pattern setting processing is performed in step S916. After step S916, the process moves to step S931 described later.

In addition, in the case of negative determination in step S915, it is determined in step S917 whether or not the 8RS flag is set to ON by taking into consideration the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area. If an affirmative decision is made in step S917, that is, if it is "8RS", then an 8RS pattern setting process is carried out in step S918. After step S918, the process moves to step S931.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S917, it is determined in step S919 whether or not the 8RN flag is set on. When a positive determination is made in step S919, 8RN pattern setting processing is performed in step S920. After step S920, the process proceeds to step S931.

Furthermore, when a negative determination is made in step S919, that is, when the 2RS flag is set on, the 2RS pattern setting process is performed in step S921. After step S921, the process proceeds to step S931.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S902, that is, when the jackpot is not won in the high probability state, in step S922, the winning/failing random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation holding area is referred to, and the first or It is determined whether or not the second small hit flag is turned on. If the affirmative determination is made in step S922, that is, if it is determined that the small hit has been won in the win/loss lottery in the high-probability state, then in step S923 it is determined that the small hit state has been confirmed. Turn on the hit confirmation flag. In the present embodiment, storing a value corresponding to the fact that the occurrence of the small hit state is confirmed in the random number storage area is referred to as turning on the small hit confirmation flag. After that, in step S924, the small hit pattern setting process is performed, and then the process proceeds to step S931.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S903, that is, when the jackpot is not won in the low probability state, in step S925, the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation suspension area is taken into consideration, and the first small It is determined whether or not the hit flag is on. When the affirmative determination is made in step S925, that is, when it is determined that the small hit has been won in the win/loss lottery in the low probability state, the small hit confirmation flag is set to ON in step S923, and in step S924. After performing the small hit pattern setting process, the process proceeds to step S931.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S922 or step S925, that is, when it is neither a big hit nor a small hit, in step S926, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and the front and rear flags (Fig. It is determined whether or not the reach determination process of 17) is turned on. If an affirmative decision is made in step S926, that is, if the "front/rear outreach" has occurred, the front/rear reach pattern setting processing is carried out in step S927, and then the flow shifts to step S931.

Further, when the determination in step S926 is negative, in step S928, the reach random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the flag other than before and after is on. If an affirmative decision is made in step S928, that is, if the "reach other than out-of-front/back-off" has been performed, a reach pattern setting process other than before/after front is performed in step S929, and then the flow shifts to step S931.

Further, when the negative determination is made in step S928, that is, when it is "completely disengaged", after performing the dislocation variation pattern setting process in step S930, the process proceeds to step S931.

In step S931, the special figure display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is being performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R is set to ON. This indicates that the condition for performing the switching display (variable display) on the special display devices 43L and 43R is satisfied. In a succeeding step S932, a special figure display timer for measuring the fluctuation time (remaining time of fluctuation display) in the special display devices 43L and 43R is set. The special figure display timer is taken into consideration when determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variable display.

The fluctuation display time of the special display devices 43L and 43R in this embodiment is set to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2. Based on the setting of such a special figure display timer, in the next external output process of the normal process, when a control signal to start the switching display (variable display) is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R, The switching display (variable display) is started on the special display devices 43L and 43R. Further, the sub-control device 262 which has received the variation pattern command and the symbol command starts the variation display on the decorative pattern display device 42 based on the variation pattern command at the same time as the variation start of the special display devices 43L and 43R, and the special display device. Simultaneously with the stop display of 43L and 43R, the variable display in the decorative symbol display device 42 is stopped and displayed by the combination of the symbols based on the symbol command. After the end of step S932, the variable display setting process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the start winning process, the process of acquiring the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 in steps S504 and S512 and storing the value in the special fluctuation holding area, the winning/judging determination process in steps S505 and 513, and the fluctuation display setting. In the processing, the winning/non-winning lottery is configured by the winning/non-winning flag and the small hit flag, and the processing of steps S901 to S903, step S922, step S925, etc., which determine the winning/non-winning based on the situation at that time. Further, the second winning/disabling determination process is configured by the processes of steps S901 to S903, S922, S925, etc., and steps S907, S909, S911, S913, S914, S916, S918, S920, S921, The variable display setting process is configured by the processes of step S927, step S929, and step S930.

Returning to the description of FIG. 19, if the affirmative determination is made in step S802, that is, if the variable display is being performed, the process proceeds to step S812, and the subtraction processing of the special figure display timer is performed. Each time this process is performed once, the value of the special figure display timer is decremented by 4 msec. For example, when the variation time is 10 seconds (10000 msec), "2500" is set to the special figure display timer, and 1 is subtracted every 4 msec.

Subsequently, the flow proceeds to step S813, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined variation time has elapsed, taking into consideration the value of the special figure display timer after the subtraction. At this time, when the predetermined variation time has elapsed, that is, when the value of the special figure display timer becomes "0", the affirmative determination is made in step S813.

When a negative determination is made in step S813, in step S817, switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is performed, and this processing ends. In addition, based on the setting content of the switching display setting, a control signal for switching display is output to the special display devices 43L and 43R in the external output processing in the next normal processing. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the special display devices 43L and 43R is realized at the timing of the special display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S813, the special figure display flag is turned off in step S814, and stop display settings for performing stop display on the special display devices 43L and 43R are set in step S815. Based on the setting contents of the stop display setting, a control signal for performing stop display is output to the special display devices 43L and 42R in the external output process in the next normal process. That is, it is stopped and displayed in a stop mode corresponding to each jackpot type, disconnection, and the like. Further, a control signal to the effect that stop display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is also output to the sub control device 262. This ensures that the stop timings of the special display devices 43L and 42R and the decorative symbol display device 42 are synchronized. However, as for the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42, since it is already determined by the sub-control device 262 by the symbol command and the variable pattern command output at the start of the variable display, the information on the stop mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 again. Need not be added. Further, again, the stop display by the special display devices 43L and 43R is the main display, and the display of the decorative pattern by the decorative pattern display device 42 is only an auxiliary (for production). There is.

Subsequently, in step S816, after performing discrimination information setting processing for initializing the hit state and measuring the period of the time shortening mode, this processing ends. Here, the discrimination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S1001, it is determined whether or not the jackpot determination flag is set to ON by referring to the random number random storage area of the execution area of the special variation holding area. When a positive determination is made in step S1001, the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation holding area is taken into consideration in step S1002, and it is determined whether the 16RS flag is set to ON.

When a positive determination is made in step S1002, in step S1003, "16" is set in the round number counter for determining the number of rounds executed during the jackpot state (the number of times the variable winning device 32 is opened). On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1002, it is determined in step S1004 whether the 2RS flag or the 2RN flag (2RN30, 2RN60, 2RN90) is set to ON.

When a negative determination is made in step S1004, that is, when the 8RS flag or the 8RN flag is set to ON, "8" is set in the round number counter in step S1005. After step S1003 or step S1005, the process moves to step S1006.

In step S1006, "1" is set in the hit situation storage area. In a succeeding step S1007, a value "2000" corresponding to the opening period of, for example, 8 seconds is set to the special variable timer used for the control in the winning state (opening/closing control of the first and second variable winning devices 32a, 32b). Set. Succeedingly, in a step S1008, the maximum number of winning balls per round is set to 8 with respect to the winning counter for counting the number of game balls entered in the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b. "8" shown is set. It should be noted that the value of the winning counter is determined based on whether the first and second variable winning devices 32a and 32b are hit during the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) of the timer interrupt process. , 223b, and 1 is subtracted when it is determined that the first and second variable winning devices 32a, 32b are hit.

Then, in step S1009, an opening command for transmitting the start of the hit state to the sub control device 262 is set. The opening command includes information on the hit type and the like, and the sub control device 262 can also grasp the number of all rounds of the hit state. After step S1009, this process ends.

It should be noted that, in the jackpot state, the appearance of promotion of the jackpot type in appearance, etc. (for example, when an even-numbered doublet is stopped and displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, "8RS" or "16RS" is won in the jackpot state immediately after. It is also possible to teach what has been done, or to teach that "16RS" has been won in the immediate jackpot state when an odd-numbered doublet is stopped and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42). ..

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step S1001, that is, when it is determined that the jackpot is not a big hit, the process proceeds to step S1010. In step S1010, the winning/discarding random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation holding area is taken into consideration, and it is determined whether or not the small hit confirmation flag is set to ON.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1010 (small hit), or if an affirmative decision is made in step S1004 (“2RS” or “2RN”), then in step S1011 the round number counter is set to “2”. To set. After step S1011, in step S1012, “1” is set in the hit situation storage area. In a succeeding step S1013, a value "500" corresponding to the opening period of, for example, 2 seconds is set in the special variable timer, in the step S1014, a winning counter is set to "8", and in a step S1015, the opening is performed. Set the command. After that, this processing ends.

If it is neither a big hit nor a small hit and a negative determination is made in step S1010, whether or not “12” is stored in the mode storage area in step S1016, that is, the time reduction mode. It is determined whether or not. When a negative determination is made in step S1016, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1016, then in step S1017, the value of the variation counter is decremented by 1 in order to measure the duration of the time reduction mode. As will be described later in detail, in the present embodiment, at the end of the jackpot state of “8RN”, “2RN30”, “2RN60”, and “2RN90”, a variation display corresponding to the period of the time reduction mode is displayed on each variation counter. Is set, and the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) is performed once, and 1 is subtracted in the step S1010.

In a succeeding step S1018, it is determined whether or not the value of the variation counter is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S1018, that is, in the end degree of the winning state, the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) for the specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode is not yet displayed. If not, the process ends as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1018, then in step S1019, "11" indicating the normal mode is set in the mode storage area. That is, when the variable display is performed the specified number of times on the special display devices 43L and 43R, the time reduction mode ends and the mode shifts to the normal mode. After step S1019, in step S1020, a time saving end command for informing the sub control device 262 of the end of the time reduction mode is set, and then this processing is ended. In the present embodiment, the process of initializing the small hit state and the process of initializing the large hit state of 2RS and 2RN are common, but may be performed separately.

Next, the first variable winning device control process for opening and closing the first variable winning device 32a in step S206 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S1201, it is determined whether or not the value set in the hit situation storage area is "0", thereby determining whether or not there is a state other than the big hit state and the small hit state. If the affirmative determination is made in step S1201, that is, if the large hit state or the small hit state is not achieved, the present process is ended. By the way, at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state, "1" is set in the hit state storage area in the discrimination information setting process.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1201, that is, when the big hit state or the small hit state is in progress (when any of "1" to "3" is set in the hit situation storage area), step S1202 At, it is determined whether or not the first variation flag is turned on in the execution area of the special variation reservation area. When a negative determination is made in step S1202, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1202, the operation proceeds to step S1203, and the value of the special variable timer is decremented by 1. By the way, at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state, "2000" or "500" is set in the special variable timer in the discrimination information setting process.

In a succeeding step S1204, it is determined whether or not the value of the special variable timer is "0". If a positive determination is made in step S1204, it is determined in step S1205 whether or not "1" is set in the hit situation storage area.

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1205, "2" is set in the hit situation storage area in step S1206. In a succeeding step S1207, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a payout. Here, in one of the winning jackpots “16RS”, “8RS”, and “8RN” that can be awarded when the player wins in the winning/winning lottery performed when the player enters the first starting winning device 33a. It is determined whether there is any (whether it is other than “2RS”).

When an affirmative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1208, a value "7500" corresponding to the time (30 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning a prize device 32a is set in the special variable timer. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1207, in step S1209, the value "100" corresponding to the time (0.4 seconds) for maintaining the open state of the first variable winning a prize device 32a with respect to the special variable timer. To set.

After step S1208 or step S1209, in step S1210, a process of opening the first variable winning a prize device 32a is performed, and in step S1211, a notification of the start of the round to the sub-control device 262 is transmitted. Set the command. After that, this processing ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S1205, it is determined in step S1212 whether or not "3" is set in the hit situation storage area. As will be described later in detail, when all the rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state are finished and the ending period is started, “3” is set in the hit situation storage area. When a negative determination is made in step S1212, that is, when it is not yet time to end the big hit state or the small hit state, the value of the round number counter is decremented by 1 in step S1213.

In a succeeding step S1214, it is determined whether or not the value of the round number counter is "0". If a negative determination is made in step S1214, that is, if there are still rounds to be executed, the process proceeds to step S1215, and "1" is set in the hit situation storage area. After that, in step S1216, it is determined whether or not there is a big hit with a payout.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1216, then in step S1217 the value "1000" corresponding to the interval time (4 seconds) is set for the special variable timer. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1216, the value "250" corresponding to the interval time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer in step S1218.

After step S1217 or step S1218, in step S1219, the winning counter is set to "8". Further, in step S1220, a process of closing the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in step S1221, an interval command for transmitting information to the effect that the interval is started is set to the sub control device 262. After that, this processing ends.

In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S1204, that is, when the time (opening time or closing time) for maintaining the open state or the closed state of the first variable winning a prize device 32a remains, the process proceeds to step S1222. , It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter for measuring the number of balls entered into the first variable winning device 32a is "0". It should be noted that the winning counter is set to "8" which is the upper limit (specified number) of the number of prizes per round at the start of the big hit state or the small hit state and at the start of the interval. Then, 1 is subtracted each time one game ball enters the first variable winning device 32a.

When a negative determination is made in step S1222, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S1222, that is, if the opportunity to end the round has arrived without waiting for the set period of the round to pass, the process moves to step S1213. As a result, when eight game balls enter the variable winning device 32 during one round, the round ends promptly at that point even if the open period of 30 seconds has not elapsed. Become.

If the affirmative determination is made in step S1214, that is, if all rounds in the big hit state or the small hit state have been exhausted, the process proceeds to step S1223, and “3” is set in the hit situation storage area. After step S1223, in step S1224, it is determined whether or not there is a payout and a big hit. When a positive determination is made in step S1224, a value “2500” corresponding to the ending time (10 seconds) is set in the special variable timer in step S1225. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1224, a value “250” corresponding to the ending time (1 second) is set in the special variable timer in step S1226.

After step S1225 or step S1226, in step S1227, the winning counter is set to "7". When the process of setting the ending of step S1223 or later is performed in the flow after the affirmative determination is made in step S1222, the value of the winning counter is “0”. Then, if the value of the winning counter is left at “0” as it is at the start of the ending period, in the first variable winning device control process after 4 msec, an affirmative determination is made in step S1222, and the ending period can be completed. Can not. Therefore, in step S1227, a temporary numerical value (“7” in this example) other than “0” is entered in the winning counter to complete the ending period. Of course, another method may be used to complete the ending period.

After step S1227, in step S1228, a process of closing the first variable winning device 32a is performed, and in the following step S1229, an ending command for transmitting information to start the ending to the sub control device 262 is set. .. After that, this processing ends.

If the determination in step S1212 is affirmative, that is, if the ending period has ended and the time to end the jackpot state has arrived, the process moves to step S1230 and end setting processing is performed. In the end setting process, the mode storage area and the variation counter are set.

Here, the end setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S1401, the random number storage area of the execution area of the special variation holding area is taken into consideration and it is determined whether or not the small hit confirmation flag is set to ON. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1401, then this processing ends. On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S1401, it is determined in step S1402 whether or not the 8RN flag is set ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area of the special fluctuation holding area.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S1402, the value "12" corresponding to the time reduction mode is set in the mode storage area in step S1403. As a result, the time reduction mode is given after the jackpot state is completed.

In the following step S1404, "90" is set to the variation counter. It should be noted that the fluctuation counter is used to display fluctuations for a specified number of times set as the period of the time reduction mode when "12" is set in the mode storage area, that is, when the time reduction mode is started. It is for understanding that. After step S1404, in step S1415, a time saving start command for informing the sub control device 262 of the start of the time saving mode is set. After that, this processing ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S1402, in step S1405, it is determined whether or not the 2RN90 flag is set to ON by referring to the winning type random number storage area of the execution area. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1405, then the flow shifts to step S1403, as in the case where the 8RN flag is set ON.

On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S1405, it is decided in step S1406 whether or not the 2RN60 flag is set ON. If a positive determination is made in step S1406, the mode storage area is set to "12" in step S1407, the variation counter is set to "60" in step S1408, and the time saving start command is set in step S1415. After setting, this process ends.

Furthermore, when a negative determination is made in step S1406, it is determined in step S1409 whether or not the 2RN30 flag is set ON. If an affirmative decision is made in step S1409, then in step S1410 the mode storage area is set to "12", in step S1411 the fluctuation counter is set to "30", and in step S1415 the time saving start command is set. After setting, this process ends.

If a negative decision is made in step S1409, then it is decided in step S1412 whether or not the 2RS flag is set ON. If a positive determination is made in step S1412, "22" is set in the mode storage area in step S1413. As a result, the latent probability mode is added after the jackpot state ends. After step S1413, in step S1416, a latent probability start command for informing the sub controller 262 of the start of the latent probability mode is set. After that, this processing ends.

On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S1412, then "21" is set in the mode storage area in step S1414. As a result, the probability variation mode is added after the jackpot state ends. After step S1414, in step S1417, a probability variation start command for informing the sub-control device 262 of the start of the probability variation mode is set. After that, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 22, in step S1231 after step S1230, “0” indicating that the jackpot status storage area is not in the big hit state or the small hit state is set. After that, in step S1232, a hit end command is transmitted to the sub-control device 262 to notify the sub-control device 262 of information indicating that the big hit state or the small hit state is to be ended, and then this processing is ended. The hit end command includes the number-of-times information of the variation counter set in the end setting process.

In addition, in the second variable winning device control process of step S207 of the normal process (see FIG. 10), basically, the opening/closing control is performed on the second variable winning device 32b, in contrast to the first variable winning device control process. It is executed when the second variation flag is set to ON, and when determining whether or not it is a jackpot with a payout, it is different only in determining whether it is 16RS or 8RS, so the description thereof will be omitted. To do.

Next, the normal display control process of step S208 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2101, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol display flag indicating whether or not the variable display is normally displayed on the normal symbol display device 41 is on. In addition, when the general figure display flag is on, it is considered that the normal symbol display device 41 is displaying the variation.

When a negative determination is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the normal suspension counter Nc is larger than zero. At this time, if the value of the normal holding counter Nc is 0, this processing is ended as it is.

If a negative determination is made in step S2102, that is, if no variable display of normal symbols is held, this process ends. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2102, then 1 is subtracted from the normal suspension counter Nc in step S2103.

In a succeeding step S2104, a process of shifting the data stored in the normal fluctuation holding area is executed. This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the normal variable holding area to the execution area side, and the holding first area→the execution area, the holding second area→ The data in each area is shifted such as the first reserved area, the third reserved area→the second reserved area, the fourth reserved area→the third reserved area.

After that, in step S2105, the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 41 is set, and the universal symbol fluctuation setting process for starting is executed.

Here, the universal figure variation setting process will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S2301, the normal symbol display flag indicating that the normal symbol is being displayed in the normal symbol display device 41 is set to ON. In a succeeding step S2302, the hit situation storage area is referred to, and it is determined whether or not "0" is stored, that is, whether or not the present state is other than the big hit state or the small hit state. If an affirmative decision is made in step S3202, that is, if it is neither a big hit state nor a small hit state, in step S2303 it is determined whether or not a value of "12" or "21" is stored in the mode storage area. That is, it is determined whether or not the high-ball entering state (time reduction mode or probability variation mode).

When the affirmative determination is made in step S2303, in step S2304, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol is set to the ordinary symbol display timer that measures the variation time (remaining time) of the variable display performed by the ordinary symbol display device 41. Set "100" to 0.4 seconds.

Thereafter, in step S2305, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is "0". In the high-income ball state, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 that takes a value in the range of "0 to 99" is "1 to 99", the winning is won.

When a negative determination is made in step S2305, that is, when the winning support lottery for opening the second starting winning device 33b is won, it is determined in step S2306 that the winning support lottery has been won. Turn on the entry support flag shown. After step S2306, or if an affirmative decision is made in step S2305, this processing ends.

Moreover, when a negative determination is made in step S2302 or step S2303, that is, in the case of a big hit state, a small hit state, or a low ball entry state, in step S2307, the ordinary symbol display timer, the normal symbol Set "2000" to set the variable display time of 8 seconds. Further, in step S2308, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol random number counter C4 of the execution area of the normal fluctuation holding area is "1". In the low-ball entry state, when the value of the normal symbol random number counter C4 that takes a value in the range of "0 to 99" is "1", it is won.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S2308, that is, if the winning support lottery has been won, then in step S2309 the on-ball support flag indicating that the winning support lottery has been won is set to ON. After step S2309, or when a negative determination is made in step S2308, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, after step S2105, this processing ends. Incidentally, based on the setting in the universal symbol variation setting process, in the external output process of the next normal process, when the control signal to start the variable display to the ordinary symbol display device 41 is output, the ordinary symbol display device At 41, variable display is started. As described above, the normal symbol display device 41 is configured to display "○" or "x" as a normal symbol, and if the displayed "○" is "x", "x". If so, the display is changed (changed) to "○".

Further, when the affirmative determination is made in step S2101, that is, when the normal symbol display device 41 is performing variable display, the process proceeds to step S2106, and the process of subtracting the universal figure display timer is performed. Every time this processing is performed once, the count value of the universal figure display timer is decremented by 1.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2107, and it is determined whether or not the count value of the universal figure display timer is "0", that is, whether or not the variation time has elapsed. When the affirmative determination is made in step S2107, the general figure displaying flag is turned off in step S2108, and the general figure stop display setting for performing stop display on the normal symbol display device 41 is performed in step S2109. Then, based on the setting content of the normal figure stop display setting, in the external output process in the next normal process, a control signal for performing a stop display is output to the normal symbol display device 41. That is, in the case of winning (when the entry support flag is set to ON), the "○" symbol (winning symbol) is stopped and displayed (for example, lit only for a few seconds), and in the case of being out, "X" The symbols are stopped and displayed.

Subsequently, the process proceeds to step S2110, the universal figure discrimination information setting process is performed, and the present process is ended. Here, the universal figure determination information setting process will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S2401, it is determined whether or not the entry support flag is set to ON. When a negative determination is made in step S2401, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, if the affirmative determination is made in step S2401, the normal variable flag for determining whether or not the second starting winning device 33b is in the open state is set to ON in step S2402.

In a succeeding step S2403, it is determined whether or not either "12, 21" is stored in the mode storage area, that is, whether or not the state is the high-ball entering state. If an affirmative decision is made in step S2403, in step S2404, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is set to 4 with respect to the ordinary variable timer for measuring the opening time (remaining time) of the second starting winning device 33b. Set "1000" to set to seconds.

Furthermore, in step S2405, "3" is set to the opening number counter that counts the number of times (remaining number) of opening the second starting winning device 33b so that the second starting winning device 33b is opened three times. After step S2405, the entry support flag is turned off in step S2408, and the flag during the support period is turned on in step S2409. Further, in step S2410, the setting for opening the second starting winning device 33b is performed, and then the present process is ended.

If a negative determination is made in step S2403, that is, if the ball is in the low ball entry state, in step S2406, the opening time of the second starting winning device 33b is set to 0.4 seconds with respect to the normal variable timer. Set "100". In a succeeding step S2407, "1" is set to the opening number counter so as to open the second starting winning device 33b once. After step S2407, in step S2408 the turning-on ball support flag is turned off, in step S2409 the flag is turned on during the support period, and in step S2410, after setting the second starting winning device 33b to the open state, This process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 24, when a negative determination is made in step S2107, in step S2111, switching display setting for continuously performing switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is performed, and this processing is performed. finish. Then, based on the setting contents of the switching display setting, in the external output processing in the next normal processing, a control signal for switching display is output to the normal symbol display device 41. Specifically, if the current lighting is “◯”, the display is switched to “×”, and if “x”, the display is switched to “◯”. Thereby, the switching display (variable display) of the normal symbol display device 41 is realized at the timing of the normal display control process, that is, every 4 ms.

Next, the starting prize winning apparatus control processing in step S209 will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the flag during the support period is on. When a negative determination is made in step S2201, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2201, the value of the ordinary variable timer is decremented by 1 in step S2202. In a succeeding step S2203, it is determined whether or not the normal variable flag is on. When an affirmative determination is made in step S2203, that is, when the second start winning device 33b is in the open state, it is determined in step S2204 whether or not the value of the normal variable timer is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S2204, that is, when the predetermined opening time of the second starting winning device 33b has not yet elapsed, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2204, then the flow shifts to step S2205, and the ordinary variable flag is turned off. In a succeeding step S2206, the value of the opening number counter is decremented by 1, and in a step S2207, the second starting prize winning device 33b is set to the closed state.

After that, in step S2208, it is determined whether or not the value of the opening number counter is "0". If an affirmative decision is made in step S2208, the flag during the support period is turned off in step S2209, and then this processing ends.

On the other hand, when a negative determination is made in step S2208, that is, the winning entry support lottery has been performed in the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, and the second starting winning device 33b is opened three times based on that. If there is the remaining number, the value corresponding to the interval time (for example, "100") is set in the ordinary variable timer in step S2210. After step S2210, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S2203, that is, if it is an interval period during which the second starting winning device 33b is opened three times (the second starting winning device 33b is in the closed state), the process proceeds to step S2211. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normally variable timer is "0". When a negative determination is made in step S2211, that is, when the interval period has not yet elapsed, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S2211, the ordinary variable flag is turned on in step S2212, and a value (“1000” in this example) corresponding to the open time is set in the ordinary variable timer in step S2213. In step S2214, the second starting prize winning device 33b is set to the open state, and then the present process is ended.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. For convenience of explanation, first, the reception interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. 28, and then the main process will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the reception interrupt process executed by the payout control device 311. The reception interrupt process is a process executed by interrupting when the payout control device 311 receives a command transmitted from the main control device 261. When the payout control device 311 confirms that the command transmitted from the main control device 261 has been received, another process executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 is once put on standby and the reception interrupt process is executed. When the reception interrupt processing is executed, first, in order to store the command transmitted from the main control device 261 in the command buffer of the RAM 513 in step S3001 and to store that the command is transmitted from the main control device 261 in step S3002. The command reception flag is turned on, and this reception interrupt processing ends. As described above, when the command is stored in the command buffer, the storage pointer is referred to and stored in the predetermined storage area, and the storage pointer is stored in order to store the next received command in the next storage area. Will be updated.

In the present embodiment, the reception process of the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is assumed to be the interrupt process executed when the command is received. For example, as shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, it is confirmed whether or not a command is received before the command determination process (step S3201) is performed, and if the command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 513. The command reception flag may be turned on and the command determination process may be performed if no command is received. In such a case, by checking the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port at every predetermined interval, it is confirmed whether or not the command is received.

Next, the main processing of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing the main processing of the payout control device 311. This main processing is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

First, in step S3101, an initialization process associated with power-on is executed. Specifically, the stack pointer is set to a predetermined value and the interrupt mode is set. Then, RAM access is permitted in step S3103, and an external interrupt vector is set in step S3104.

Then, in step S3106, it is determined whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. If the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a, the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3107, and in the subsequent step S3108, the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off. Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM judgment value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. Note that it is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup depending on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 is correctly stored.

If the power-off occurrence information is not set in step S3106, or if the backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value or the like) in step S3108, the process proceeds to the initialization processing of the RAM 513 after step S3115. Transition.

In step S3115, the entire area of RAM 513 is cleared to 0, and in step S3116, the initial value of RAM 513 is set. After that, in step S3117, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and the process proceeds to step S3114 to permit the interrupt.

On the other hand, on the condition that the power failure information is set in step S3106 and that the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal in step S3108, the process at power recovery (when power failure is restored) Process). That is, in step S3109, the stack pointer before power-off is restored, in step S3110 the power-off occurrence information is cleared, and in step S3111, the payout permission flag that permits payout of prize balls is cleared. In step S3112, the CPU peripheral device is initialized, and in step S3113, the used register is restored from the backup area 513a of the RAM 513. Further, in step S3114, interruption is permitted.

After the interrupt is permitted in step S3114, it is determined in step S3122 whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area 513a. Here, if the power-off occurrence information is set, it means that the power supply is cut off, and therefore, the processing after step S3123 is performed as the power failure processing at the time of power-off. In the power outage process, first, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited in step S3123, and the command determination process described later is executed in step S3124. After that, the contents of each register used by the CPU 511 are saved in the stack area in step S3125, the stack pointer value is stored in the backup area 513a in step S3126, and the RAM determination value is calculated in step S3127 to calculate the backup area 513a. In step S3128, the RAM access is prohibited and the infinite loop is continued until the power is completely cut off and the processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the stack area and work area of the RAM 513 that are backed up.

In the process of step S3122, since the power-off occurrence information is confirmed after the process performed when the power is turned on, the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a of the RAM 513 is smaller than that in the case where each process is in progress. It is low and can be stored easily. Further, when returning to the state before power-off, since the amount of data stored in the backup area 513a is small, it can be easily restored and the processing load of the payout control device 311 can be reduced. ..

Next, the timer interrupt process of the payout control device 311 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. This timer interrupt process is activated periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 msec).

In the timer interrupt process, first, a command from the main control device 261 is acquired, and the command determination process is performed (step S3201). This command determination process will be described below with reference to FIG.

FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing a command determination process performed by the payout control device 311. In the command determination processing (steps S3124 and S3201), first, it is determined whether or not the command reception flag is turned on in step S3301. The command reception flag is turned on when the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received in the reception interrupt process (see FIG. 28) described above.

If it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is off, a new command has not been received from main controller 261 and this processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3301 that the command reception flag is on, the received command is read from the RAM 513 in step S3302, and the command reception flag is turned off in step S3303. By turning off the command reception flag in step S3303, the processing of steps S3302 to S3311 can be skipped until a new command is received, so that the control of the payout control device 311 can be reduced.

In the processing of steps S3304 to S3306, the type of command read from the RAM 513 is determined. In step S3304, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout initialization command, in step S3305 it is determined whether or not it is a payout return command, and in step S3306, is it a prize ball command. It is determined whether or not.

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is the payout initialization command, it is determined in step S3307 whether or not the payout permission flag is already turned on. If the payout permission flag is turned off, the main power is turned on when the power is turned on. Since the controller 261 has instructed the initialization of the RAM 513, the work area (area) other than the stack area of the RAM 513 is cleared to 0 in step S3308, and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set in step S3309. Thereafter, in step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on, and the payout permission of the prize ball is set.

As described above, the main control device 261 performs the initialization process of the RAM 503 after transmitting the payout initialization command, and the payout control device 311 receives the payout initialization command and then performs the initialization process of the RAM 513. Therefore, the timing at which the RAM 503 is initialized and the timing at which the RAM 513 are initialized are substantially the same. Therefore, even if the payout control device 311 receives the command transmitted from the main control device 261 due to the deviation of the initialization timing, the RAM 513 is initialized and the control corresponding to the received command cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent the adverse effects of Further, since the payout permission flag is turned on after the RAM 513 has been initialized, it is possible to reliably set the payout permission of the prize balls.

On the other hand, if the payout permission flag is already turned on in step S3307, this command determination processing is ended without performing the work area of the RAM 513 and the initialization processing of the RAM 513. That is, the process of step S3307 prohibits the RAM 513 from being initialized with the payout permission flag set. Since the payout initialization command is a command transmitted only when the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on when the power is turned on, it is not received with the payout permission flag turned on. It is conceivable that the payout control device 311 recognized the payout initialization command due to the influence of noise or the like. Therefore, if the work area of the RAM 513 is cleared (step S3308) and the initial value of the RAM 513 is set (step S3309) while the payout permission flag is on, the prize balls will not be paid out, etc. Although a bad effect is caused to cause a loss to the player, since the RAM 513 is prevented from being initialized while the payout permission flag is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from being lost.

If the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is a payout return command (step S3304: NO, step S3305: YES), the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before power-off, In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on in order to permit the payout of prize balls. That is, when there is power-off occurrence information and the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 return to the state before the power-off, the payout of prize balls is permitted. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, since the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, the read pointer becomes the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

Further, if the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is the prize ball command (step S3305: NO, step S3306: YES), the received prize ball number is added to the total prize ball number and stored in step S3310. In step S3311, the payout permission flag is turned on to permit the payout of prize balls. At this time, the payout control device 311 sequentially reads the prize ball commands stored in the command buffer (ring buffer), and adds the prize ball number corresponding to the command to the total prize ball number stored in the predetermined buffer area. And remember. Since the prize balls corresponding to the number of prize balls are paid out based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 261, the prize ball command is a payout instruction command for instructing the payout of prize balls. .. Further, when the prize ball command is received, the payout permission is immediately set, so that the prize balls can be paid out early for the winning. When the payout permission flag is turned on in the process of step S3311, since the process based on the command stored in the predetermined storage area of the command buffer is completed, the read pointer becomes the read pointer corresponding to the next storage area. Will be updated.

If the command transmitted from the main controller 261 is neither a payout initialization command (step S3304: NO) nor a payout return command (step S3305: NO), and is not a prize ball command (step S3306: NO), The command determination process ends without turning on the payout permission flag.

Here, the flow chart of FIG. 30 will be described again. When the command determination process ends, in step S3202, it is determined whether or not the payout permission flag is turned on in the command determination process. Here, if the payout permission flag is not turned on, this processing is ended as it is. That is, it is possible to prevent the prize balls from being paid out before the command is transmitted from the main control device 261.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S3202, then in step S3203 a firing permission is set in the firing control device 312, and in step S3204 the state return switch 321 is checked, and if it is determined that the state return operation has started, the state is returned. Execute the return operation. By this processing, when the state return switch 321 is pressed when a payout error occurs such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 358a, the payout motor 358a is rotated in the normal and reverse directions, and the ball clogging is eliminated (return to the normal state). Planned.

After that, in step S3205, setting of the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state is executed according to the change of the state of the lower plate 15. That is, the lower plate full tank state is determined by the detection signal of the lower plate full tank switch, and when the lower plate full tank is full, the lower plate full tank state is set, and when the lower plate full tank is not reached. , Set the lower plate full tank release status. In addition, in step S3206, the tank sphere-free state (ball-out state) or the tank sphere-free state (ball-present state) is set according to the change in the state of the tank sphere. That is, the tank sphere no switch detection signal is used to determine the tank sphere no state, the tank sphere no special feature is set, the tank sphere no state is set, and the tank sphere no longer no special feature is set. Execute the setting.

After that, in step S3207, it is determined whether or not there is a state to be notified, such as an error state, and if there is a state to be notified, the state is notified.

Subsequently, a payout control process of prize balls and ball rental is executed. Specifically, the payout amount setting process is performed in step S3208, the motor control state acquisition process is performed in step S3209, and the motor drive process is performed in step S3210.

In step S3211, the state return switch 321 is checked to perform the ball removal process by driving the payout motor 358a on condition that the ball removal operation is not disabled and the ball removal operation is not started. In a succeeding step S3212, control of the vibrator 360 (vibration motor control) is executed on condition that the ball is in a clogged state. Then, the process returns to the beginning of this timer interrupt process.

Next, a normal process of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S3901, the port corresponding to the command input of the input/output port 554 is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control device 261 is received.

If the command is received, the command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553 in step S3902. The command buffer of the RAM 553 is composed of a ring buffer that temporarily stores a command transmitted from the main control device 261. The ring buffer has a predetermined storage area, commands are stored with regularity from the beginning to the end of the storage area, and if the commands are stored in all storage areas, they are stored at the beginning of the storage area. The return command is configured to be updated. Therefore, when the command is stored and when the command is read, the storage pointer and the read pointer in the command buffer are updated, and the command is stored and read based on each pointer.

In a succeeding step S3903, a reservation information storage process of storing the advance command information output from the main control device 261 in the reservation information storage area provided in the RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 is performed. In the starting command, as described above, information indicating which of the first starting winning device 33a and the second starting winning device 33b is the variation display triggered by the winning, the variation information corresponding to the jackpot. It includes information indicating whether there is a jackpot, information indicating a jackpot type, and information indicating a reach type.

The holding information storage area of the sub-control device 262, like the special variable holding area of the main control device 261, includes a first holding information storage area and a second holding information storage area, each of which has four holding areas (holding first to holding fourth areas). It has a pending information storage area and one execution area. In the first pending information storage area, in accordance with the reception history of the advance command based on the first variable display (information stored in the first special variable pending area), information on whether or not a big hit, big hit type, small hit Information regarding whether or not information is displayed and information regarding variation display such as reach type (variation information) are stored in time series. Further, in the second suspension information storage area, the variation information is stored in time series in accordance with the reception history of the advance command based on the second variation display (information stored in the second special variation suspension area). By adopting the configuration, the variation information regarding the first variation display triggered by the entry into the first start winning device 33a and the second variation display triggered by the entry into the second starting winning device 33b. It is possible to store four pieces of variation information related to each. As a result, not only the execution areas of the first and second special variation holding areas of the main control device 261, but also the variation information stored in the holding area can be grasped by the sub control device 262. ..

The pending information storage processing will be described below with reference to FIG. First, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not the advance command is received (whether or not the advance command is stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). When a negative determination is made in step S4101, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4101, does the starting command correspond to the entry into the second starting prize device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation suspension area) in step S4102? Determine whether or not. If a negative determination is made here, that is, if the advance command corresponds to a ball input (change information stored in the first special change hold area) of the first start prize-winning device 33a, in step S4103. , The first variable hold counter Nd that counts the number of held variable information held in the first hold information storage area is incremented by one.

In a succeeding step S4104, the information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, the information on the jackpot type, the information on whether or not the jackpot is reached, the information on the reach type, and the like are stored in the free holding area of the first holding information storage area. Store in the first area.

Further, in subsequent step S4105, advance notice information storage processing is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, there may be a case where intentional presentation of effect displays related to each other in a plurality of continuous variable displays (so-called “continuous notice” is performed). Here, the value of the continuous notice counter for determining whether or not to give the continuous notice and the value of the notice type counter for determining the type of the continuous notice are acquired, and the count value is stored in the first pending information storage. Of the areas, the variation information is stored in the newly stored holding area in step S4104.

The continuous notice counter is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 49, for example, and then returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 49). The continuous notice counter is updated periodically, and the value of the continuous notice counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (continuous notice counter buffer) each time.

The advance notice type counter is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 9, for example, and then returns to the lower limit value of 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 9). The advance notice type counter is periodically updated, and the value of the advance notice type counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer (previous notice type counter buffer) each time.

Then, in the notice information storing process, when the variable information is stored in the pending information storage area, the values of the continuous notice counter and the notice type counter stored in the continuous notice counter buffer and the notice type counter buffer are acquired. The Rukoto. Further, each holding area and execution area of the holding information storage area is provided with a continuous notification flag which is turned on when it is determined that the continuous notification is derived.

Further, in this embodiment, the ROM 552 is provided with a notice success/failure determination table that is taken into consideration when deciding whether or not to give continuous notice, and a notice table that is taken into consideration when deciding the mode of continuous notice. A plurality of advance notification success/failure determination tables and advance notification tables are provided, and the advance notification success/failure determination table and the advance notification table to be taken into consideration are selected according to the variation information.

After step S4105, in step S4106, one of the first holding lamps 46a in the off state (for example, the leftmost one among the four first holding lamps 46a that are extinguished) is turned on. State. The first holding lamp 46a of this embodiment emits blue light. In a succeeding step S4107, a continuous announcement lottery process for deciding whether or not to execute the continuous announcement is performed. In the present embodiment, the continuous announcement lottery process of step S4107 constitutes the specific effect determination process.

In the continuous notice lottery process of step S4107, when the value of the first fluctuation holding counter Nd is “2” or more, based on the value of the continuous notice counter newly stored in the first holding information storage area, It is determined whether or not to execute continuous notice by referring to the notice success/failure determination table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach type, and the game mode. Further, when it is decided to execute the continuous notice, based on the value of the notice type counter newly stored in the first holding information storage area, the notice table corresponding to the jackpot type, the reach type, and the game mode. Refer to to determine whether to execute the continuous notice. In addition, the continuous notice flags of all the holding areas in which the variation information is stored among the holding areas of the first holding information storage area are turned on. However, the continuous notice flag of the execution area is not turned on.

Now, in the present embodiment, after step S4107, in step S4113, a hold icon setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed. That is, in the present embodiment, a "car" as a specific object that can be used in a "car effect" as a specific effect that will be described in detail later can be customized according to the player's preference. After step S4113, this process ends.

In addition, in the case of a negative determination in step S4102, that is, in the case where the advance command corresponds to the entry into the second starting prize device 33b (variation information stored in the second special variation suspension area) Then, the process proceeds to step S4108, and the second fluctuation hold counter Ne that counts the number of holdings of the fluctuation information held in the second holding information storage area is incremented by one.

After that, in step S4109, information on whether or not the jackpot is included in the advance command, information on the jackpot type, information on whether or not the jackpot is reached, information on the reach type, and the like are stored in the second holding information storage area in the vacant holding area. Store in the first area. In a succeeding step S4110, the value of the continuous notice counter and the value of the notice type counter are acquired, and the counter value is stored in the holding area in which the fluctuation information is newly stored in the step S4109 of the second holding information storage area.

After step S4110, in step S4111, one of the second holding lamps 46b in the off state (for example, the leftmost one of the four second lamps 46b extinguished) is in the lighting state. And The second holding lamp 46b of the present embodiment emits red light. In a succeeding step S4112, a continuous announcement lottery process for deciding whether or not to execute the continuous announcement is performed. The continuous announcement lottery process of step S4112 only corresponds to the continuous announcement lottery process of step S4107 for entering the second starting winning device 33b, and a description thereof will be omitted. After step S4112, in step S4114, a hold icon setting process, which will be described in detail later, is performed, and then this process is ended.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, after step S3903 or when a negative determination is made in step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3904, and it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached, that is, the start of the previous normal processing. It is determined whether or not a predetermined time (2 msec in this example) has elapsed from. Then, if the predetermined time has already elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3905, while if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the previous normal processing, the process proceeds to step S3915.

In step S3905, update processing of various counters is executed. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 uses various counter information when displaying the decorative pattern. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 33, a jackpot decorative symbol counter CO, and left/middle/right used for setting each out symbol in the left symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol display area. Each symbol counter CL, CM, and CR are used. The symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured such that register values are added by using an R register (refresh register) in the CPU 551, and as a result, numerical values randomly change.

When the big hit state occurs, the big hit decoration symbol counter CO determines a pattern (big hit pattern) when the decoration pattern display device 42 stops changing, and in the present embodiment, as the big hit decorative symbol counter CO. , 9 (0 to 8) counter values are prepared. That is, the jackpot decorative pattern counter CO is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 8 and returned to 0 after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 8).

Then, when the symbol command transmitted from the main control device 261 is “AA11” indicating that the symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot is stopped, based on a table (a table that associates counter values with decorative symbols) not shown, For example, if the counter value is 0, the combination of the big hit symbols is determined such as "1" (the doublet) and 1 if the counter value is "2" (the doublet). The jackpot decorative symbol counter CO is periodically updated by the counter updating process of step S3905, and is read from the counter buffer of the RAM 553 at the timing when the sub controller 262 receives the symbol command, as described later. In the present embodiment, the jackpot decoration symbol counter CO is stored in the jackpot decoration symbol counter buffer of the RAM 553, but is not stored in the buffer but the counter value is referred to at the timing of receiving the symbol command. You may

Further, when the symbol command is “AA12” indicating that the symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot is stopped, for example, if the counter value is 0 or 1, it is “2” (double eye), and if it is 2 to 4. "4" (the doublet), 5, 6 if it is "6" (the doublet), 7, 8 is "8" (the doublet), etc., the combination of the jackpot symbols is determined. ..

Each of the left, middle, and right symbol counters CL, CM, CR determines the combination of each stopped symbol in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas when the winning/winning lottery is missed. Since any of the nine decorative symbols is displayed in the row, nine counter values (0 to 8) are prepared for each. The stop symbol in the left symbol display area is determined by the left symbol counter CL, the stop symbol in the middle symbol display area is determined by the middle symbol counter CM, and the stop symbol in the right symbol display area is determined by the right symbol counter CR.

In this embodiment, the values of the counters CL, CM, and CR are randomly updated by using the numerical value of the R register built in the CPU 551. That is, when updating each of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted to determine the current value. .. Each symbol counter CL, CM, CR is updated so that the update times do not overlap, and the combination of those symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a front/rear outreach symbol buffer of RAM 553, a reach symbol buffer other than out of front/rear, and complete. It is stored in any of the out-of-design symbol buffers.

Here, the update process of each symbol counter CL, CM, CR will be described in detail. As shown in FIG. 34, in step S4001, it is determined whether it is the update time of the left symbol counter CL, and in step S4002, it is determined whether it is the update time of the middle symbol counter CM. The left, middle, and right symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are configured to be updated one by one in one update process. Therefore, if the right symbol counter CR has been updated in the previous update processing, an affirmative decision is made in step S4001. If the left symbol counter CL has been updated in the previous update process, an affirmative decision is made in step S4002. If the left symbol counter CL is updated (YES in step S4001), the process advances to step S4003 to update the left symbol counter CL. If the middle symbol counter CM is updated (YES in step S4002), the process advances to step S4004 to update the middle symbol counter CM. Furthermore, if the right symbol counter CR is updated (NO in steps S4001 and S4002), the process proceeds to step S4005, and the right symbol counter CR is updated. In updating the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in steps S4003 to S4005, the value of the lower 3 bits of the R register is added to the previous counter value, and when the addition result exceeds the upper limit value, 8 is subtracted, The calculation result is set as the current value of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR.

According to the above CL, CM, and CR update processing, the left, middle, and right symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are sequentially updated one by one in one update processing, and the update times of the respective counter values overlap. There is no. As a result, one set of the symbol counters CL, CM and CR is updated every time the update process is executed three times.

After that, in step S4006, whether or not the combination of the updated symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is a combination of reach symbols (the symbol in the left symbol display area and the symbol in the right symbol display area are the same) is determined. If it is determined and it is a combination of reach symbols (YES in S4006), in step S4007, it is a combination of jackpot symbols (the symbols in the left and right symbol display areas and the symbol in the middle symbol display area are the same). Determine whether. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4007, this processing is terminated without storing the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR in the RAM 553.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4007, then in step S4008, it is determined whether or not the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, CR is a combination of front and rear deviation symbols. When the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of front and rear deviating symbols (rear out of front and rear reach) (YES in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4009, and the combination of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is before and after the RAM 553. This is stored in the out-reach pattern buffer, and this processing ends. When the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR are combinations of symbols other than front and rear (reach other than front and rear) (NO in S4008), the process proceeds to step S4010, and combinations of the symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time Is stored in the reach symbol buffer other than the front and rear of the RAM 553, and this processing is ended.

If the combination is a combination other than the reach symbol (NO in S4006), the combination of the detachment symbol counters CL, CM, and CR is the combination of the detachment symbol (completely detached symbol), so in step S4011, the The combination of the deviation symbol counters CL, CM, and CR at that time is stored in the complete deviation symbol buffer of the RAM 553, and this processing is ended.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, a holding process is performed in step S3906. Hereinafter, the holding process will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S4201, it is determined whether or not a fluctuation pattern command has been received (whether or not the fluctuation pattern command has been stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553). If an affirmative decision is made in step S4201, it is decided in step S4202 whether the value of the second fluctuation suspension counter Ne is larger than "0". When a negative determination is made in step S4202, that is, when the variation information of the second variation display is not stored in a suspended state, the process proceeds to step S4203 and the value of the first variation suspension counter Nd is decremented by 1.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is preferentially digested over the first variation display, and when the second variation display is stored on hold, the first variation display is digested. There is no such thing. That is, when the variation information of the second variation display is retained and stored in the second suspension information storage area, the variation pattern command corresponding to the first variation display is not sent. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in step S4202, by determining whether or not the value of the second variation hold counter Ne is greater than “0”, the variation pattern command is displayed as the first variation display and the second variation display. It is determined which of the two pieces of variation information is stored. Of course, the variation pattern command is given information as to which variation information of the first variation display or the second variation display, and based on the variation pattern command, the variation pattern command It may be determined which variation information of the second variation display has.

After step S4203, in step S4204, a process of shifting the data stored in the first suspension information storage area is executed. The data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data (including the continuous notice flag) stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the first holding information storage area to the execution area side. The data in each area is shifted in the order of →execution area, second holding area→first holding area, third holding area→second holding area, fourth holding area→third holding area.

In the following step S4205, one of the lit first holding lamps 46a (for example, the rightmost one of the lit first holding lamps 46a) is turned off. After step S4205, the process moves to step S4209.

If a positive determination is made in step S4202, that is, if at least one variation information item of the second variation display is retained and stored, the value of the second variation suspension counter Ne is decremented by 1 in step S4206.

In subsequent step S4207, a process of shifting the data stored in the second suspension information storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the holding first to fourth areas of the second holding information storage area to the execution area side, and the holding first area→the execution area, the holding second The data in each area is shifted in the order of area→holding first area, holding third area→holding second area, holding fourth area→holding third area. In addition, in this embodiment, the number of execution areas of the suspension information storage area is one, and the data stored in the first suspension information storage area and the second suspension information storage area is displayed in a variable display corresponding to the data. When it is called, it will be shifted to a common execution area.

In the following step S4208, one of the second holding lamps 46b in the lighting state (for example, the rightmost one of the second holding lamps 46b in the lighting state) is turned off. After step S4208, the process moves to step S4209.

In step S4209, advance notice setting processing for determining the type of display effect used for continuous advance notice is performed. In the notice setting process of step S4209, it is determined whether or not the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4107) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is ON. Since this is not performed, this processing ends as it is. On the other hand, in the case of affirmative determination, based on the variation information of the variation pattern command, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, what type is it, and if it is not a jackpot, what is the reach type? , The type of continuous notice is determined by referring to the corresponding table. The continuous notice of the type determined here is derived at the desired timing when the corresponding variable display is performed.

After step S4209, in step S4210, a hold icon shift process for shifting the hold icon 411 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is performed. In addition, each hold area of the hold information storage area and the execution area are provided with a hold icon storage area for storing the type of the hold icon. The four hold icons 411 are displayed in the hold display area 405 at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 42, and every time one variable display is consumed (executed), the hold icon located at the leftmost position. 411 is deleted, and the hold icon 411 arranged on the right side thereof is shifted to the left by one (the display location is moved).

After step S4210, in step S4211, it is determined whether or not the variable display this time is a variable display corresponding to a jackpot with a payout. In the case of affirmative determination in step S4211, in step S4212, the sub control device 262 side resets the sub side variation number counter for counting the number of variations of the special symbol (decorative symbol), and then this process ends. To do.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S4111, the sub-side variation counter is incremented by 1 in step S4213, and then this processing is ended. In other words, the sub-side variation number counter is not reset for a big-win with no coins (“2RS”, “2RN”) or “small win”, but is continuously added.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the second variation display is configured to be preferentially digested over the first variation display. Therefore, when continuous announcements are made for a plurality of times of the first variation display, the first variation display is performed. If a ball enters the second starting winning device 33b during the variable display of the display, the second variable display may be interrupted between the plurality of times of the first variable display, and the continuous notice may be interrupted. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the effect used as the continuous notice is a display effect that can be derived even in the normal variable display when the continuous notice is not given (an effect that can be derived for a single variable display). Is used. Therefore, even if the consecutive notices are interrupted, no discomfort occurs.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, a display setting process is performed in step S3907. Here, based on the information stored in the command buffer of the RAM 553, various calculation processes such as generating a display command to be output to the display control device 45 and command output setting are performed. That is, here, the display mode to be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is determined. For example, when the variation pattern command and the symbol command are received, the sub control device 262 refers to the corresponding table based on the variation type, the variation time, the stop symbol, etc., and determines the display pattern and the like. Then, control such as outputting the determined items as a display command to the display control device 45 is performed.

The display control device 45 performs a drawing process in response to a command from the sub control device 262, and starts the variable display of the decorative symbol on the decorative symbol display device 42. It should be noted that once the fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 261, until the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses, the symbols are cooperated with the sub control device 262 and the display control device 45. The variable display of is continued.

Further, when the variable display is started, if the continuous notice flag (see the continuous notice lottery process of step S4105) in the execution area of the hold information storage area is on, each situation is determined based on the change information of the change pattern command. The table corresponding to is used to determine the type of continuous notice to be derived in the variable display, to determine the derivation of notice production different from the continuous notice, and to display corresponding to the operation of the production button 125 or the like. Or Furthermore, in the display setting process of step S3907, a process (hit display process) for performing an effect control during a big hit or a small hit is also performed.

Here, the hit display process performed in the display setting process of step S3907 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S4701, it is determined whether or not an opening command for informing the start of the big hit state or the small hit state has been received from the main control device 261. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4701, then in step S4702 a “16” is returned to the round grasp counter for grasping the remaining number of rounds based on the information contained in the opening command, based on the information contained in the opening command. Set "8RS" and "8RN" to set "8", and set "2RS", "2RN" and "small hit" to "2".

After that, in step S4703, if it is a big hit with a payout, the setting of the opening effect for 8 seconds (the image of the decorative pattern display device 42, the sound of the speaker SP, the setting of the lighting state of various lamps) is performed, and then this processing is performed. finish. Note that the sub-control device 262 is provided with a table or the like that stores the correspondence relationship between the jackpot type, the number of remaining rounds, and various presentation modes during the jackpot state, and the corresponding presentation is performed by referring to the table. You will choose and let it run.

If a negative decision is made in step S4701, it is decided in step S4704 whether an interval command has been received. When an affirmative determination is made in step S4704, in step S4705, if the jackpot with a payout is a jackpot, the production is set during a round of up to 30 seconds, and then this processing is ended.

When a negative determination is made in step S4704, it is determined in step S4706 whether an interval command has been received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4706, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4707, and in the case of a big hit with a payout ball, in step S4708, the effect is set during an interval of 4 seconds, and then this processing is ended.

If a negative decision is made in step S4706, it is decided in step S4709 whether or not an ending command is received. If an affirmative decision is made in step S4709, the round grasping counter is decremented by 1 in step S4710, and if the jackpot with a payout is a jackpot, an ending effect of 10 seconds is set, and then this processing ends.

In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit or a small hit other than a big hit with a payout, an opening period (2 seconds), a round period (0.4 seconds), an interval period (1 second), and an ending period ( The effect is not set in each period such as 1 second), but the effect (announcement, etc.) is set throughout the period.

If a negative decision is made in step S4709, it is decided in step S4712 whether or not a hit end command has been received. If a negative decision is made in step S4712, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S4712, then in step S4713, the ending display is immediately terminated, and setting is made such that it is in the normal gaming state in which variable display is carried out. After that, this processing ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in steps S3908, S3909, and S3910, processing relating to data transfer between the pachinko machine 10 and the mobile communication terminal (for example, a smartphone) carried by the player is executed. .. That is, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 and the server operated by the game machine manufacturer can exchange data relating to the game of the player via the portable communication terminal carried by the player. It is configured.

Here, the overall schematic configuration of the game system will be described with reference to FIG. As a method of transmitting information from the pachinko machine 10 to the mobile communication terminal, a QR code (registered trademark) as code information that is a two-dimensional code is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 and read by the mobile communication terminal. Done. The mobile communication terminal in the present embodiment is a reading unit (camera, decoder, etc.) capable of reading the QR code displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, a communication unit capable of communicating with the server, and data supplied from the server ( And a portable display means (display) capable of displaying a web page and the like.

By reading the QR code, the mobile communication terminal can obtain character string information in URL (Uniform Resource Locator) format by the conversion application (bar code reader) preinstalled in the mobile communication terminal. The server is accessed based on the server address information and the like included in the column information (the process indicated by the character string information is requested).

The server performs display in response to a request from the mobile communication terminal, and displays various information included in the character string information for each model (game machine ID) of the pachinko machine 10 and for the player (identification of the mobile communication terminal). It is stored for each information). Further, information stored in various information accumulated and stored (ranks given according to the number of jackpots and the number of fluctuations) and settings made by the player are also stored. In addition, in response to a request from the mobile communication terminal, a password is issued based on various information stored and stored corresponding to the player.

Then, when the player inputs the password into the pachinko machine 10, the player can play a game in which various information corresponding to the player is reflected. In the present embodiment, by inputting the password issued from the server to the pachinko machine 10, the balance of the production is changed or the game is input without entering the password, as compared with the case where the game is executed without inputting the password. When performing, the effect that is not derived can be derived. Hereinafter, a game performed by inputting a password is referred to as a "mobile interlocking game", and a game performed without inputting a password is referred to as a "non-mobile interlocking game".

Further, the sub-control device 262 of the present embodiment, a game information storage area as a game information storage means capable of accumulating and storing game information which is information about the game of the player, and selection information which is information about the player's hobbies and preferences. And a selection information storage area as selection information storage means capable of accumulating and storing. The game information of the present embodiment includes “the number of fluctuations”, “the number of jackpots”, and “information about whether or not the first to third premium reach have been derived”. Correspondingly, in the game information storage area, a variation number counter that counts the number of variations in the mobile-linked gaming state, a jackpot number counter that counts the number of jackpots in the mobile-linked gaming state, and a first number in the mobile-linked gaming state. -Three experienced flags that are turned on when the third various premium reach is derived are provided. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation number counter and the jackpot number counter form the game information counting means.

In addition, only the first premium reach among the first to third premium reach can be derived in the initial state even in the non-mobile interlocking game state or the mobile interlocking game state. On the other hand, if the first premium reach is derived even once in the mobile interlocking game state, the second premium reach can be derived in the subsequent mobile interlocking game state and has already been derived. The derivation probability of the first premium reach is increasing. Further, when the second premium reach is derived while the second premium reach is derivable, the third premium reach is derivable and the first and second premiums that have already been derived. The reach probability has been increased. Further, when the third premium reach is derived while the third premium reach is derivable, the derivation probabilities of the first to third premium reach are increased.

In addition, in the mobile interlocking game state, when the first premium reach is derived, the first experienced flag is turned on, and when the second premium reach is derived, the second experienced flag is turned on and the third premium is obtained. When the reach is derived, the third experienced flag is turned on. By the way, the premium reach corresponds to “16RS”, and when the premium reach is derived, it can be understood that the jackpot state of “16RS” occurs at that time. In the present embodiment, as the probability of occurrence of premium reach increases, the probability that odd-numbered double stitches stop at the time of stop display of variable display when the probability variation jackpot is won is configured to decrease accordingly. ..

Further, as described above, in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 42 in order to suggest or teach which game mode is staying in the normal mode, the probability variation mode, the time reduction mode, and the latent probability mode. In, the production stage of any one of the normal stage, the probability variation stage, the pullback stage, and the precursor stage is displayed. Among them, as for the “normal stage” indicating that the player is staying in the normal mode, there are three stages, that is, the first stage, the second stage, and the third stage in which the production method changes as the background and the appearing characters change. It is prepared. For example, in the normal process of the sub-control device 262, it is periodically determined whether or not the input information of the cross button 126 is detected, and when the determination is affirmative, the variation stop state of the decorative symbol on the normal stage (various types described later) It is determined whether or not the menu screen is in a non-display state) or a high-speed fluctuation state (a state in which all the decorative patterns are changing). If the determination is affirmative, it is determined whether or not the input is "right or bottom" of the cross button 126, and if the determination is positive, the first stage→the second stage→the third stage→the first stage. The production stage is changed in the order of stages, and when a negative determination is made, the production stages are changed in the order of third stage→second stage→first stage→third stage.

In addition, three stages are also available for the big hit state. More specifically, in the variable display of the decorative pattern display device 42, when even-numbered double stitches are stopped and displayed, one of the jackpot states with a payout occurs (the second start winning device 33b. If it is a variable display based on a ball, the jackpot state with payout is confirmed.) If an odd-numbered doublet other than "7" is stopped and displayed, one of the jackpot states with payout occurs and "7 When the doublet of "" is stopped and displayed, "16RS" is generated. In the present embodiment, in the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42, when an even-numbered doublet or an odd-numbered doublet other than “7” is stopped and displayed, a presentation for teaching the big hit type during the big hit state (“Promotion production”) is performed, but the stage in the big hit state is divided into three (more precisely, four stages including those for confirming “16RS”) due to the difference in the production.

In the present embodiment, when an even-numbered doublet is stopped and displayed during the variable display, a higher probability jackpot type such as "probability variation jackpot", and when an odd-numbered doublet other than "7" is stopped and displayed, "16RS". That is, at the start of the jackpot round, "Suddenly notify stage (for example, in the case of an internally higher jackpot type, one lottery to win at 50% triggered by the operation of the effect button 125 is performed. If the player wins, the final announcement stage (for example, if it is an internal high-ranked jackpot type, 5% will be triggered by the operation of the production button 125). In the case of winning the lottery to win in a maximum of 15 times), the promotion production in which the player participates by operating the production button 125 or the like in any of the second to seventh rounds is derived. Stage (for example, in the case of a high-ranked jackpot type internally, 30% performed by operating the production button 125 during the promotion production period, which is derived with a probability of 50% at the start of the second to seventh rounds. If you win in the lottery to win, you will be able to produce success)." Then, a selection screen for selecting a stage is displayed at the start of the jackpot state, and when the cursor button is operated by the cross button 126 in accordance with the option corresponding to the desired stage and the effect button 125 is operated, the jackpot round is started on the corresponding stage. It will be.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a display prompting the user to operate the effect button 125 is displayed during variable display on the decorative symbol display device 42, and whether or not the effect button 125 is operated (pressed) within the set period and the operation of the effect button 125. There may be a button effect in which the effect to be derived changes depending on the number of times (the number of consecutive hits).

As the selection information of the present embodiment, the number of fluctuations in each production stage in a normal game state, the number of selections of the “suddenly notify stage”, the “final notification stage”, the “chance production stage”, and the button production There is information about whether the button 125 has been operated and how many times the effect button 125 has been operated. That is, in the selection information storage area, a stay stage counter that counts the number of fluctuations in the “first stage”, the “second stage”, and the “third stage”, a “sudden notice stage”, and a “final notice stage” , A jackpot stage selection counter that counts the number of selections of the “chance production stage”, a button counter that is counted when the production button 125 is not operated at the time of button production, and the production button 125 is operated at the time of button production. And a continuous hit counter for counting the total number of times. In particular, in this embodiment, two sets of stay stage counters, jackpot stage selection counters, button counters, and continuous hit counters are provided for personal use and for statistics use.

In addition, as will be described in detail later, the present embodiment has a customization function that allows the design of the image object (character or the like) displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 to be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, basically, the customization function can be used only when the mobile linked game is being performed. In addition, the sub-control device 262 is provided with a customization information storage area for storing customization information regarding customization performed during the mobile interlocking game, so that the customization information can be stored and stored in the same manner as the game information. It has become.

In the present embodiment, the QR code may include various kinds of information such as game information such as the number of jackpots and the number of fluctuations as described above, and selection information obtained by counting how many times the player has selected what is selectable. Is configured. In the present embodiment, a gaming system is configured by the pachinko machine 10, the mobile communication terminal operated by the player, and the server.

Next, the menu display processing of step S3908 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S6101, it is determined whether or not the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) are being variably displayed. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6101, this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S6101, it is determined in step S6102 whether or not the jackpot state is in progress. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6102, this processing is terminated as it is. When a negative determination is made in step S6102, it is determined in step S6103 whether the effect button 125 has been operated. If a negative decision is made in step S6103, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S6103, then in step S6104, it is decided whether or not the top menu screen is being displayed. When a negative determination is made in step S6104, a process of displaying the top menu screen on the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed in step S6105. As shown in FIG. 40(a), on the top menu screen, "password input (start mobile linked game)", "issue code (initial registration/end mobile linked game)", "delete mobile linked game data", "game" Operation items such as "History" and "Close menu screen" are displayed. After step S6105, this process ends.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S6104, then in step S6106 a password select operation (operating the effect button 125 with the cursor placed on the operation item of "password input (mobile interlocking game start)"). It is determined whether or not it has been performed. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6106, the password input screen is displayed in step S6107, and then this processing ends.

As shown in FIG. 40(b), in the password input screen, the selection of the alphanumeric characters "AZ" and "1-9" used for the password, "one character erase", "decide", and "return" In addition to displaying the items, a word display unit composed of eight horizontally arranged frames is displayed in order to display the eight-character word entered as the password separately for each character. .. Further, the password input screen is composed of an alphanumeric character used for the password, “one character erase”, “decide”, and “return to menu” input cursor, and eight frames. An input location cursor indicating which frame the alphanumeric character is input to when the alphanumeric character is selected with the input cursor in the word display area for input operation is displayed.

If a negative decision is made in step S6106, in step S6108, the effect button 125 is operated in a state where the cursor is placed on the operation item of the code issuing operation (“code issuance (first registration/end of mobile interlocking game)”. It is determined whether or not If an affirmative decision is made in step S6108, then in step S6109 a process for displaying a code issuance screen is carried out. As shown in FIG. 40(c), on the code issuance screen, operation items such as "code issuance (end of mobile linked game)", "first registration", and "return to top menu" are displayed. After step S6109, this process ends.

If a negative decision is made in step S6108, in step S6110, a mobile linked game data erasing operation (operating the effect button 125 in a state where the cursor is placed on the operation item of "mobile linked game data erasing"). It is determined whether or not it has been performed. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6110, then in step S6111, processing for displaying a data deletion screen is carried out.

In the data deletion screen, the characters "Do you want to delete the mobile linked game data" and the selection items "Yes" and "No" are displayed. Then, when the cursor is moved to the item of "Yes" and the determination input is performed, various information (game information, selection information, etc.) of the player individual regarding the mobile linked game is erased. Further, the mobile interlocking game flag indicating that the mobile interlocking game is in progress is set off. After step S6111, this process ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S6110, it is determined in step S6112 whether or not a game history display operation (manipulating the effect button 125 with the cursor placed on the operation item of "game history"). To determine. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6112, then in step S6113 the game history screen is displayed and then this processing ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S6112, is an operation of closing the menu screen performed in step S6114 (operating the effect button 125 with the cursor placed on the operation item of “close menu screen”)? Determine whether or not. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6114, then in step S6115 the top menu screen is closed and then this processing ends. On the other hand, if a negative decision is made in step S6114, the present process is terminated.

The operation of the cursor during display of various menu screens, for example, in the normal process of the sub-control device 262, periodically determines whether or not the input information of the cross button 126 is detected. It is determined whether or not various menu screens are being displayed. If the determination is affirmative, the cursor is moved according to the operation of the cross button 126 corresponding to each menu screen.

Next, the password input process of step S3909 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S6201, it is determined whether or not the password input screen is open on the decorative pattern display device 42. If a negative decision is made in step S6201, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S6201, it is decided in step S6202 whether or not the production button 125 has been operated. When a negative determination is made in step S6202, it is determined in step S6216 whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is started.

If a negative decision is made in step S6216, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S6216, in step S6217, the menu screen including the password input screen is closed, and the variable display of the decorative design of the decorative design display device 42 is made visible, and then this processing is performed. finish.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S6202, it is decided in step S6203 whether or not the input operation is to return to the top menu. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6203, then the flow shifts to step S6204, the top menu is displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, and then this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in step S6203, it is determined in step S6205 whether or not it is an input operation of each word constituting the password. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6205, in step S6206, the processing of displaying the word designated by the input cursor on the frame of the word display portion designated by the input location cursor is performed, and then this processing is ended.

In the present embodiment, the password can be input regardless of whether or not the password has already been input. However, for example, when a negative determination is made in step S6203, the mobile If it is determined whether or not the linked game is being played, and if the result is affirmative, then notes such as "You have already entered the password. If you want to enter a new password, erase the current password." The present process may be terminated after the explanation is displayed.

If a negative decision is made in step S6205, it is decided in step S6207 whether or not the operation is to delete one character of the word input on the word display portion. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6207, in step S6208, if the word of the frame designated by the input location cursor in the word display portion or the word has not yet been input in the frame designated by the input location cursor. In this case, the word of the previous (one left) frame is erased, and this process is terminated.

In addition, in the case of negative determination in step S6207, that is, when the player has finished inputting the password on the word display unit and operated the effect button 125 with the input cursor aligned with the operation item of “OK” In step S6209, password authentication processing is performed. In a succeeding step S6210, it is determined whether or not the inputted combination of words is registered in advance as a combination of valid passwords. That is, not all of the above-mentioned combinations of alphanumeric characters are used as passwords, but some combinations are not used.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S6210, an input error display process is carried out in step S6211, and then this process ends. That is, in the input error display process, a message such as “password is wrong” is displayed, and operation items for which the player's consent is obtained are displayed with the cursor being selected from the beginning, and the player operates the effect button 125. Then, the setting for returning to the password input screen is performed.

If a negative decision is made in step S6210, then in step S6212, password reflection processing for reflecting the information contained in the input password in the game of the pachinko machine 10 is performed. After step S6212, in step S6213, a process of executing an input completion announcement indicating completion of password input (for example, image display for 2 seconds on the decorative pattern display device 42) is performed. After that, in step S6214, the mobile interlocking game flag indicating that the mobile interlocking game is in progress is set to ON, and then this processing is ended.

It should be noted that the password has a fluctuation rank assigned according to the number of fluctuation displays (the number of fluctuations) performed on the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) when the player plays the game, and a jackpot state. The jackpot rank given according to the number of occurrences (number of jackpots), and whether or not the first to third premium reach as predetermined specific effects have been derived. In addition to the information about the history rank, the player's favorite information regarding the game is also included.

Next, the process relating to the QR code issuance in step S3910 (code issuing process) will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S6301, it is determined whether or not the code issuing screen is open on the decorative pattern display device 42. If a negative decision is made in step S6301, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S6301, it is decided in step S6302 whether or not the production button 125 has been operated. When a negative determination is made in step S6302, it is determined in step S6316 whether or not the variable display of the decorative symbol display device 42 is started.

If a negative decision is made in step S6316, the present processing is terminated. On the other hand, if a positive determination is made in step S6316, it is determined in step S6316 whether or not the QR code is being displayed. When a negative determination is made in step S6317, in step S6318, the menu screen including the code issuance screen is closed, and the variable display of the decorative design of the decorative design display device 42 is made visible, and then this processing is ended. ..

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S6317, then in step S6319 the mobile interlocking game flag is set to OFF, and then in step S6318 a process of closing the menu screen including the code issuing screen is carried out, and this process is executed. finish.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S6302, it is decided in step S6303 whether or not the input operation is the initial registration. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6303, it is decided in step S6304 whether or not the mobile interlocking game is being performed (whether or not the mobile interlocking game flag is set to ON). If a negative decision is made in step S6304, in step S6305, a QR code corresponding to the initial registration is set and displayed, and then this processing is ended. The QR code displayed on the "first registration" subpage includes a gaming machine ID, a server address, and information indicating that the game is a first game.

Although the QR code registered for the first time does not include game information and the like, the QR code for the next time onward is configured to always include game information, selection information, and customization information. Further, by reading the QR code with the mobile communication terminal, the above-mentioned server address, game information, etc. are displayed in a URL format character string on the display of the mobile communication terminal, and by accessing the server, game information, etc. Will be sent to the server.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S6304, in step S6306, for example, a cautionary explanation such as "please register after deleting mobile linked game data" is displayed, and then this processing is executed. finish. That is, in the present embodiment, the initial registration cannot be performed in the state where the personal data of the player regarding the mobile linked game remains. It should be noted that the initial registration code may be issued in either the mobile interlocking gaming state or the non-mobile interlocking gaming state.

If a negative determination is made in step S6303, it is determined in step S6307 whether the input operation is to display the QR code. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6307, it is decided in step S6308 whether or not a mobile linked game is being performed. When an affirmative determination is made in step S6308, a QR code is set in step S6309, and processing for displaying it on the decorative pattern display device 42 is performed. In the present embodiment, the QR code displayed on the sub-page of “Code issuance (end of game)” is the gaming machine ID that identifies the pachinko machine 10, the address of the server operated by the gaming machine manufacturer, and the mobile-linked game this time. Game information, selection information, and the like. In particular, the game information includes a fluctuation number counter, a jackpot number counter, and stored contents of an experienced flag, and selection information includes a stay stage counter, a jackpot stage selection counter, a button counter, and a continuous hitting counter for personal and statistical purposes. Both of the storage contents and customization information regarding customization described later in detail are included. After step S6309, this process ends.

On the other hand, if the determination in step S6308 is negative, in step S6310, there is no data that can be output. When playing a mobile linked game, please enter the password issued by the server. After displaying, the present process is terminated.

When a negative determination is made in step S6307, it is determined in step S6311 whether or not the QR code is being displayed. If an affirmative decision is made in step S6311, that is, if the operation input of “return (erasing the QR code display screen)” is made on the QR code display screen, it is stored in the pachinko machine 10 in step S6312. A process of deleting the game data of the player who is playing is performed. More specifically, in step S6312, the fluctuation number counter, the jackpot number counter, and the experienced flag are reset (the counter value is 0 and the flag is turned off), and the stay stage counter, the jackpot stage selection counter, Of the button counter and the continuous hitting counter, personal ones are reset. Further, various customization information stored in the customization information storage area is also erased.

Note that the statistics of the stay stage counter, the jackpot stage selection counter, the button counter, and the continuous hitting counter are not reset at this point. The storage area for statistics is configured to be able to store the selection information for one week separately for each day, and to erase the information that is over one week based on the date counter that counts the dates. ing.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variation number counter, the big hit number counter, and the individual stay stage counter, the big hit stage selection counter, the button counter, the count to the continuous hit counter, the experienced flag, and the customized information storage area. Memories are stored only in mobile games. On the other hand, the storage in the count to the stay stage counter for statistics, the jackpot stage selection counter, the button counter, and the continuous hit counter is performed not only in the mobile interlocking game but also in the non-mobile interlocking game. Corresponding to these configurations, the QR code may include not only game information and selection information of each player, but also selection information and questionnaire information for one week including those of other players. Is set.

After step S6312, the mobile interlocking game flag is set to OFF in step S6313, and in step S6314, the menu screen including the code issuing screen is closed, and then the present process ends.

Further, when a negative determination is made in step S6311, that is, when the code issuance screen is displayed but the operation input to return to the top menu is made without issuing the QR code, the top menu is displayed in step S6315. After performing the processing, the present processing ends. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 corresponds to the display means, and the function of displaying the QR code on the decorative symbol display device 42 constitutes the information output means.

Here, the processing of the "server" (access-corresponding processing) when there is access from a predetermined mobile communication terminal (for example, a mobile phone, a smartphone, etc.) will be described with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the server uses the mobile communication terminal to display a variation counter, a jackpot counter, an experienced flag, a stay stage counter for personal use and statistics, a jackpot stage selection counter, a button counter, a continuous hit counter, and customization information. A server-side game information storage area that includes a server-side variation number counter, a server-side jackpot number counter, and a server-side experienced flag so that the information can be stored when the information with the storage area is transmitted. As a server-side selection information storage area having a server-side stay stage counter for personal use and statistics, a server-side jackpot stage selection counter, a server-side button counter, and a server-side continuous hit counter, and a server-side continuous display object information storage storage means Server side customized information storage area.

First, in step S6401, it is determined whether there is an access from a mobile communication terminal. If a negative decision is made in step S6401, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S6401, it is decided in step S6402 whether or not the information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal includes information indicating that it is the first time.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S6402, in step S6403, the portable communication terminal in question for the server side storage area (server side game information storage area, server side selection information storage area, server side customization information storage area) A process of setting a storage area for storing and storing game information, selection information, and customization information of each player who has accessed via the. In the present embodiment, there are individual and statistical server-side selection information storage areas, but the server-side game information storage area and the server-side customized information storage area are individual. There is only something for you.

In next step S6404, the process of displaying the web page for the first time corresponding to the access using the QR code for the first time is performed on the display of the mobile communication terminal, and then the present process is ended. More specifically, after the formal user registration, the password for the first time is displayed. The first-time password includes information that the game is the first time. In step S6404, Cookie (HTTP cookie) information is stored in the accessing mobile communication terminal. As a result, the mobile communication terminal will also transmit the cookie information to the server when accessing the server from the next time onward, and the server can confirm the cookie information even if the player does not log in. The player's mobile communication terminal with which accumulated data is accessed is grasped and a corresponding display is made. It should be noted that the ID password may be entered and logged in each time the server is accessed.

If a negative determination is made in step S6402, that is, if the mobile communication terminal of the player who has completed the mobile linked game receives access based on the QR code, the mobile communication terminal transmits the information in step S6405. The fluctuation count information (information indicating the value of the fluctuation count) is read from the information, the current fluctuation count is added to the fluctuation count already stored in the fluctuation counter on the server side, and the calculated value is newly added to the server side. Store in the fluctuation counter.

In subsequent step S6406, the jackpot count information (information indicating the value of the jackpot count counter) is read from the information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal, and the jackpot count of this time is stored in the server-side jackpot count counter. And the calculated value is newly stored in the server-side jackpot number counter.

Furthermore, in step S6407, the premium reach occurrence information (information indicating the turned-on experienced flag) is read from the information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal, and if the occurrence is confirmed, the corresponding server-side experienced Turn on the flag.

After that, a variable rank determination process is performed in step S6408. In the present embodiment, the ranking is performed according to how much the player has played the mobile-linked game, and the higher the rank, the more the function of the production is improved, or the balance of the production is changed more greatly compared to the initial state. Or The determination of the rank is basically performed in the server, and in step S6408, it is determined whether or not the number of fluctuations stored in the server-side fluctuation number counter is equal to or more than a predetermined specified number of times. The rank regarding the number of fluctuations (variation rank) will be determined. In the present embodiment, the variation rank can be updated to the second rank by performing the variation display 1000 times in the first rank (initial rank). Further, from the second rank to the third rank, the number of revolutions is 3000, but after that, 5000 revolutions are required to update one rank.

In a succeeding step S6409, a jackpot rank determination process is performed. In the present embodiment, the jackpot rank can be updated to the second rank by executing the jackpot state 10 times in the first rank (initial rank). Further, the second rank→the third rank is 30 times, and the third rank→the fourth rank is 50 times, but after that, 80 times are required to update one rank.

In a succeeding step S6410, history rank determination processing is performed. In the present embodiment, the career rank is such that the first reach is derived from the first rank and the first premium reach is not derived during the mobile-linked game, and only the first premium reach is derived. As a result, the second premium reach can be derived, and the second premium reach is derived in the second rank and the second rank in which the probability of deriving the first premium reach is increased. With this, it is possible to derive the third premium reach, and the third rank reach in which the probability of deriving the first and second premium reach is increased, and the third premium reach is derived in the third rank. Therefore, there is a fourth rank in which the derivation probabilities of the first to third premium reach are increased.

In the following step S6411, various kinds of selection information (information indicating the values of both the stay stage counter for both personal and statistics use, the jackpot stage selection counter, the button counter, and the continuous hit counter) are sent from the information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal. The process of reading and adding to the corresponding counter is performed, or the process of setting the corresponding flag is performed. In the present embodiment, not only the player's individual selection information but also the selection information of other players who have played the pachinko machine 10 played by the player are transmitted via the mobile communication terminal. The individual selection information of each player is stored in the individual selection information storage area that can store the individual selection information of the player in the server-side game information storage area, and the selection information including other players is the player playing the same model. The entire selection information is stored in the overall game information storage area.

In subsequent step S6412, various customization information is read from the information transmitted from the mobile communication terminal and stored in the corresponding storage area of the server-side customization information storage area.

Then, in step S6413, a web page that reflects the rank determined in steps S6408 to S6410, the accumulated data of the selection information added in steps S6411 and S6412, and the customization information on the display of the mobile communication terminal. After performing the processing for displaying, this processing is terminated. In the web page, "specs" that teach specifications such as jackpot probability of the pachinko machine 10, "personal data management" that allows the player to check the game records of individual players, and the player regarding customization in the next mobile-linked game There are operation items such as "setting" for setting items that can be selected, "issue password" that can issue a new password based on accumulated game information, selection information, setting information regarding customization, etc. ..

Next, the process of issuing the password of the “server” (password issuing process) will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S6501, it is determined whether a password issuance request has been issued. If a negative decision is made in step S6501, this processing is ended as it is. If a positive determination is made in step S6501, customization information determination processing is performed in step S6502. In the present embodiment, it is configured that both the pachinko machine 10 and the server can customize the object derived to the specific effect performed in the decorative symbol display device 42. Here, the setting on the server is confirmed. It is supposed to be processed. Although the contents that can be set on the customized pachinko machine 10 side and the contents that can be set on the server side are different, the specific contents will be described later.

In a succeeding step S6503, the variation rank, the jackpot rank, the career rank, the player's individual selection information, the value of the server-side remaining variation count storage area, the value of the server-side remaining variation count storage area, and the setting information regarding customization are referred to. Password setting process for setting a password.

The sub-control device 262 of the pachinko machine 10 has a rank storage area for storing the variable rank, the jackpot rank, and the career rank, and is included in the password in the password reflection process of the password input process (see step S6212 in FIG. 41). The information corresponding to the rank storage area is stored. As a result, it is possible to enjoy the effect according to the rank. In the present embodiment, it is possible to select a design of a character that appears in a predetermined effect or a voice pattern to be output at a predetermined timing according to the variation rank and the jackpot rank. Further, for example, when performing super reach, the value stored in the rank storage area may be confirmed and the corresponding effect table may be selected from among a plurality of effect tables. The stored contents of the rank storage area are erased at the same time when the QR code issued in the code issuing process is erased (see step S6312 in FIG. 42).

Further, the sub-control device 262 has a preference information storage area capable of storing information (preference information) based on the selection information accumulated by the player, and responds when the preference information is read from the password. Information is stored in the preference information storage area. As the preference information of this embodiment, information indicating the most selected stage in the normal gaming state, information indicating the most selected stage in the jackpot state, and the tendency to operate the effect button 125 in the button effect? There is information indicating.

Then, in the above-described password reflection processing of step S6212 (see FIG. 41), when the top menu screen display is closed, processing for automatically shifting to the most selected stage in the normal gaming state and start of the jackpot state Occasionally, the process of setting the selection cursor on the stage selection screen so that it is aimed at the operation item that selects the most selected stage from the beginning, and increasing/decreasing the derivation ratio of button effects (change the selected effect table ) Processing is performed. The stored contents of the preference information storage area are deleted at the same time when the QR code issued in the code issuing process is deleted.

After step S6503, in step S6504, the process of displaying the password set in step S6503 is performed, and then this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 32, in the lamp setting process of step S3911, the lighting pattern of the lamps/illuminations is set in order to synchronize with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42.

In the voice setting process of step S3912, the output pattern of the speaker SP is set so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed by the decorative symbol display device 42. Further, when a command related to voice such as notification of error occurrence is transmitted from the main control device 261, setting for performing these controls is also performed in step S3912.

In step S3913, the customer wait effect (for example, a demo screen display set to be displayed when a predetermined time elapses while the variable display of the decorative pattern display device 42 is not being displayed; an energy saving mode), etc. Process.

In step S3914, an external output process of transmitting a control signal to each device based on the setting contents of steps S3905 to S3914 is executed. For example, a display command is transmitted to the display control device 45 when the decorative design display device 42 displays the decorative design in a variable manner.

After the processing of steps S3905 to S3914 performed every 2 msec is executed, or when the determination in step S3904 is negative, the process proceeds to step S3915, and whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 553. Determine whether. The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 261.

If the power-off occurrence information is not stored, the flow advances to step S3916 to determine whether the RAM 553 has been destroyed. If the RAM 553 is not destroyed here, the process returns to step S3901, and the normal process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 553 is destroyed, the process is infinitely looped to stop the execution of the subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3915 that the power-off occurrence information is stored, power-off processing is executed in step S3917. In the power-off processing, the generation of interrupt processing is prohibited and each output port is turned off. Also, the storage of the information on the occurrence of power failure is erased. After the power-off process is executed, the process loops endlessly.

By the way, in the present embodiment, a "car" as a specific object that can be used in a "car effect" as a specific effect, which will be described later in detail, has a function of customizing the "car" as a player's preference. However, in the present embodiment, the customization function can be used only when the mobile linked game is being performed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 45 and the like, an example of a mode of the decorative symbol display device 42 as the variable display means will be described. Incidentally, FIG. 45 shows the decorative symbol display device 42 in the normal game state (“normal stage” in FIG. 45) during the mobile interlocking game.

Basically, the range including the central portion in the vertical direction of the decorative symbol display device 42 becomes three symbol display regions 401, 402, 403 of left, middle and right in which the decorative symbol (first symbol) can be variably displayed. There is. Further, the lower left portion of the decorative symbol display device 42 is a hold display area 405 capable of displaying the hold icon 411 (second symbol). Further, in the decorative design display device 42, the visibility of the stop display of the decorative design 421 is not hindered (for example, when the decorative design 421 is displayed at the same time as the stop display of the decorative design 421, the decorative design 421 is displayed). The character object 423 (third symbol) is appropriately displayed in the symbol display areas 401, 402, 403 and the like.

Now, in the present embodiment, mainly in the decorative symbol display device 42, there is a case where an effect with a "car" as a motif (hereinafter, also referred to as "car effect") is performed. More specifically, there are “race production”, “contest production”, “power comparison production”, and “date production”. Further, a plurality of types of cars used for such car production are also prepared. More specifically, "sports car", "family car", "armored car", "4WD car", decorated "decoration car (pain car)", "truck (Decotra)", "rear car" There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the mobile linked game is being played, the car used for the "car production" can be customized. The parts that can be used to customize the car used for "car production" are "body front (front half)", "body rear (rear half)", "doors", "tires", "engine & muffler". It is divided into multiple items (customized items). In addition, "Sports car system parts", "Family car system parts", "Armored vehicle system parts", "4WD car system parts", "Decoration car system parts", "Truck system parts" for each item "Parts" and "rear car parts" are prepared, and it is possible to combine different parts into a car. However, with respect to the rear car, there is no distinction between the front and the rear of the body, there is no item for the door, and the car is moved manually (not by the engine, but by a predetermined character object 423).

In addition, for car customization, there is also a "coloring" item, and "sporty", "white", "army", "vivid", "pastel", "metallic", and "classic" are available. .. The coloring is changed not for each part of the car but for the whole car at once. Also, by replacing the "engine & muffler" parts, the engine sound etc. (running sound etc.) can be changed.

Further, when a mobile linked game is being performed, a car in the middle of customization (hereinafter, also referred to as “unfinished car 431”) is displayed in the lower right portion (tuning area 406) of the decorative symbol display device 42. As shown in FIG. 46 and the like, the unfinished car 431 grasps a rough overall image (outer shape) of a car (hereinafter, also referred to as “finished car 441”) in a state in which all customization of the unfinished car 431 is completed. A possible silhouette-shaped base object 432, and as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, etc., a “body front”, a “body rear”, and a “door” that are fitted to the corresponding parts of the base object 432. , “Tire”, and “engine & muffler” part objects 433.

That is, the part in which the base object 432 is displayed as it is is not yet customized, and the part in which the part object 433 is displayed and the base object 432 is not displayed has already been customized. It will be a part. In other words, the unfinished car 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 is masked with respect to the part corresponding to the item that has not been customized yet (the part to which the part object 433 is not applied). It looks like it is being applied. With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp at a glance that there is an item that has not been customized yet. Note that FIG. 45 shows the unfinished vehicle 431 in which the "door" and the "engine & muffler" have been customized. In addition, regarding the "engine & muffler", when customization is performed, only the part of the muffler protruding outside the vehicle is displayed, and the part hidden inside the vehicle is not displayed.

Further, in this embodiment, in order to clarify where the parts corresponding to each customization item are separated (where the boundaries are) with respect to the base object 432, for each part corresponding to each customization item. , Different pattern masking is applied. In the present embodiment, it is configured to make a difference according to "color". "Body front" is "blue", "body rear" is "red", "door" is "yellow", "tire". "Yellow-green" and "Engine & Muffler" are "Green". As described above, since the colors are configured to be different for each masking corresponding to each customized item, the number of items that have not been customized can be made clear at a glance.

In addition, the unfinished car 431 is configured to be continuously displayable on the decorative symbol display device 42 in multiple variable display on the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative symbol display device 42), and is customized over multiple variable display. Will proceed. When parts are assembled for all items of "body front", "body rear", "door", "tire", and "engine & muffler" for the unfinished car 431 The customization will be completed. As for "coloring", "white" is set by default, and therefore the customization of the car may be completed without the player having to customize the coloring.

In the present embodiment, the part object 433 is displayed for the part of the unfinished car 431 that has been customized, but it is relatively thin enough to grasp the shape and coloring of the customized part. It is drawn with a line and a lighter color. On the other hand, with respect to the base object 432, there is only a masking outline set separately for each customization item, and details inside thereof are not drawn. In addition, each masking is basically a thick line (the border between masking may be thin or it can be eliminated) and dark color in order to make a difference from the already customized part. It is designed to be drawn with.

In the present embodiment, regarding the unfinished car 431, the masking area of “engine & muffler” partially overlaps the masking area of “body” and “door”, and the masking of “engine & muffler” is The display is prioritized over the masking of "body" and "door". If the "body" or "door" part object 433 is fitted to the unfinished car 431 and the "engine & muffler" has not been customized yet, "engine & muffler" is displayed. The masking of the "muffler" is also displayed visually.

Further, in the present embodiment, when all the customization for the unfinished vehicle 431 is completed, the completed completed vehicle 441 is moved to the upper right portion (gallery area 407) of the decorative pattern display device 42, and there (Basic It will be displayed continuously until the car effect occurs. However, in this embodiment, the number of completed vehicles 441 that can be displayed in the gallery area 407 is up to two. Therefore, when the third completed car 441 is completed, the player selects the completed car 441 that is not left in the gallery area 407 from among the three completed cars 441 and deletes it from the screen. Is configured. It should be noted that the completed car 441 is not drawn with a relatively thin line and a thin color like the customized part of the unfinished car 431 (the part object 433 in the unfinished car 431). It is drawn with relatively solid lines and colors.

Further, the "car production" itself is a production common to the mobile linked game and the non-mobile linked game, but in the present embodiment, the customization function can be used only when the mobile linked game is being performed. That is, in the non-mobile interlocking game state, the unfinished car 431 in the tuning area 406 and the completed car 441 in the gallery area 407 are not displayed. Further, in the non-mobile interlocking game, the car used for the “car production” is the completed car 441 with the unified vehicle type system, and the lottery performed when the execution of the “car production” is decided (the winning expectation is expected. The vehicle type is selected and determined (according to the degree and the type of car effect). It should be noted that the expectation of winning is an index of how likely a big hit state is to occur, and is easy to select when displaying variation that teaches the occurrence of a big hit state, and is difficult to select when displaying variation that teaches that a big hit state is occurring. The higher the expectation of winning, the higher the prize. On the contrary, the less likely to be selected in the variation display for teaching the occurrence of the big hit state and the more likely to be selected in the variation display for teaching the deviation, the lower the expectation of winning. In the present embodiment, the unfinished vehicle 431 (fourth symbol) and the completed vehicle 441 (fifth symbol) form a continuous display object. The unfinished car 431 corresponds to an unfinished object, and the completed car 441 corresponds to a completed object.

Further, with respect to the hold icon 411, different modes may be used depending on whether the mobile linked game is being played or not. More specifically, in the mobile interlocking game state, in the lower left portion of the decorative symbol display device 42 (holding display area 405), when the hold icon 411 that is not derived in the non-mobile interlocking game state is displayed There is. That is, as shown in FIG. 45 and the like, the hold icon 411 has the above-mentioned normal hold icon 411 (hereinafter, also referred to as “normal hold icon 412”) such as “the jewel 414 on the pedestal 413”. There is a hold icon 411 (hereinafter, also referred to as “item hold icon 416”) that imitates “customized parts of car” used for car production.

As shown in FIG. 47, the item reservation icon 416 includes a "background 417" and a "part object 433" drawn in front of the "background 417". The "parts object 433" is drawn to specifically show which part (customization item) and which vehicle type (customization pattern) the part is, and "background 417" is the customization item to which the parts object 433 belongs. It has a corresponding color.

More specifically, in this embodiment, the color of the “background 417” corresponds to the color of the masking applied to the unfinished car 431 displayed in the tuning area 406. In other words, if it is a "body front" part, it is "blue", if it is a "body rear" part it is "red", if it is a "door" part it is "yellow", if it is a "tire" part. "Yellow green" and "engine & muffler" parts are "green". Therefore, comparing the background 417 of the item holding icon 416 with the unfinished car 431, the part object 433 of the item holding icon 416 corresponds to which part of the unfinished car 431 that is not yet customized. You can see at a glance if you are there.

Then, as will be described later in detail, when it is determined that the part object 433 displayed by the item holding icon 416 is reflected on the unfinished car 431, the part object 433 becomes a corresponding part of the unfinished car 431. It is displayed so that it can be fitted.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 47, with respect to the item reservation icon 416 corresponding to “coloring”, instead of “part object 433”, “colored brush” is drawn in the image of coloring, In addition, the “background 417” is “white” in any coloring. Then, when it is decided to reflect the coloring displayed by the item holding icon 416 on the unfinished car 431, the coloring of all the part objects 433 of the unfinished car 431 is changed at once. It has become. In addition, when the coloring of the unfinished car 431 is in the default state, the "white" coloring is selected.

Now, in the RAM 553 of the sub-control device 262, an unfinished customized storage area for storing the setting contents of a plurality of customized items constituting the unfinished car 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 of the decorative pattern display device 42, and a decoration A complete customization storage area for storing the setting contents of a plurality of customization items constituting the completed car 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 of the symbol display device 42 is provided.

The unfinished customized storage area and the completed customized storage area correspond to the storage area corresponding to the "body front", the storage area corresponding to the "body rear", the storage area corresponding to the "door", and the "tire". A storage area associated with each customization item, such as a storage area corresponding to “engine & muffler”, a storage area corresponding to “coloring”, and the like. And for each item, "Sports car parts", "Family car parts", "Armored car parts", "4WD car parts", "Decoration car parts", "Truck car parts" "Parts" or "rear car parts" is set, and "coloring" is "sporty", "white", "army", "vivid", "pastel", "metallic", "classic". Which of the above is set is stored. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of completed vehicles 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 is set to two, and the completed customized storage area is a storage area for two completed vehicles 441 (first completed vehicle). A customized storage area and a second completed customized storage area).

Further, each holding area and execution area of the holding information storage area of the sub-control device 262 is provided with a customization information storage area for storing information regarding customization. With respect to the information of the customized information storage area, the storage area of the suspension information storage area can be shifted to the execution area side every time variable display is performed together with other game information. As will be described later in detail, the customization information storage area stores information about whether or not an opportunity (customization opportunity) for executing customization of the unfinished vehicle 431 is given, and information indicating a customization item. And an area for patterns for storing information indicating a customization pattern. Further, in the present embodiment, the pending information storage area (customized information storage area) and the incomplete customized storage area of the sub-control device 262 correspond to the customized progress storage means.

Further, the sub-control device 262 as the customization opportunity giving means uses the “customization lottery random number generating means used in the customization lottery random number generating means used in the customization lottery for giving the opportunity (customization opportunity) to execute the customization for the unfinished car 431. The “lottery random number counter” and a “customized winning value storage table” as a customized winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among values that can be generated by the customized lottery random number counter as a value to be won in the customized lottery. I have it.

The customized lottery random number counter is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 199, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 199) as the closing price, returns to 0 as the lower limit value as the opening price. .. The customized lottery random number counter is updated periodically (for example, every normal process), and the value of the customized lottery random number counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. Then, based on the reception of the advance command, the value of the customized lottery random number counter stored in the counter buffer is stored in the hit/miss area of the customized information storage area of the hold information storage area.

In addition, the sub-control device 262 as the customization selection means uses the “item random number counter” as the item lottery random number generation means used in the item lottery for determining the customization item, the value that can be generated by the item random number counter, and the customization item. Generated by a "corresponding item storage table" as a corresponding item storing means for storing a correspondence relationship with ", a pattern random number counter" as a pattern random number generating means used in a pattern lottery for determining a customization pattern, and a pattern random number counter And a “corresponding pattern storage table” serving as a corresponding pattern storage unit that stores the corresponding relationship between the customizable pattern and the possible values.

The item random number counter is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 59, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 59) as the final value, returns to 0 which is the lower limit value as the opening value. The item random number counter is updated regularly (for example, every normal process), and the value of the item random number counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. When the customized lottery performed based on the reception of the advance command is won, the value of the item random number counter stored in the counter buffer is stored in the item area of the customized information storage area of the hold information storage area. It is supposed to be done.

The pattern random number counter is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 999, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 999) as the final value, returns to 0 which is the lower limit value as the opening value. The pattern random number counter is updated regularly (for example, every normal process), and the value of the pattern random number counter is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. Then, when winning in the customized lottery performed based on the reception of the advance command, the value of the pattern random number counter stored in the counter buffer is stored in the pattern area of the customized information storage area of the hold information storage area. It is supposed to be done.

Here, the hold icon setting process performed in steps S4113 and S4114 of the hold information storage process (see FIG. 35) will be described with reference to FIG.

First, in step S7101, a customized lottery process is performed. More specifically, first, the value of the customized lottery random number counter is acquired from the corresponding counter buffer, and is stored in the customized information storage area (correction/absence area) of the corresponding suspension area in the suspension information storage area. Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the value of the customized lottery random number counter stored in the customized information storage area (winning/unwinning area) is a value corresponding to winning in the customized lottery by referring to the customized winning value storage table.

As shown in FIG. 52, a plurality of customized winning value storage tables are provided. In the present embodiment, one for big hit/small hit that is selected when a big hit state or a small hit state occurs, one for front/rear deviation that is selected when a front/rear outreach occurs, and a reach other than front/rear outreach There are two types, one for those other than out-of-front/outside, which is selected when there is a problem, and the other for those other than that (when reach does not occur). Two are prepared for each of the one and the one selected in the case of the high-income state. Further, in the present embodiment, when the customized winning value storage table for out-of-front/outside is referred to, it is easier to win than when the customized winning value storage table for big hit/small hit is referred to. When the customized winning value storage table is referred to, it is more difficult to win the prize than when the customized winning value storage table for the big hit/small hit is referred to. In addition, when the customized winning value storage table for other than that is referred to, it is more difficult to win than when the customized winning value storage table for out-of-place other than before and after is referred to.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the customized winning value storage table is referred to in the high entry state, it is more difficult to win than when the customized winning value storage table is referred to in the low entry state.

After step S7101, in step S7102, it is determined whether or not the customization lottery is won. If an affirmative decision is made in step S7102, it is decided in step S7103 whether or not a mobile interlocking game is being performed (whether or not the mobile interlocking game flag is set to ON). If an affirmative decision is made in step S7103, then in step S7104 a customization chance flag indicating that a customization opportunity is given is set to ON.

The customization chance flag is provided in each holding area and execution area (customization information storage area) of the holding information storage area so that when the variation information or the like is shifted, the setting information of the customization chance flag is also shifted. Is configured. In addition, in the present embodiment, a value indicating that a customization chance is given is stored (overwritten) in the customization information storage area (the area for winning or rejecting) in which the value of the customized lottery random number counter is stored. The customization chance flag is set to ON. The customization opportunity flag can be provided separately from the customization information storage area.

In subsequent steps S7105 and S7106, processing for determining the type of the part object 433 displayed on the item holding icon 416 is performed. That is, as the part object 433, it is necessary to determine which part of the car (unfinished car 431) and what type (model system) the part is. Therefore, in step S7105, where part It is configured to determine whether there is any (customized item), and in step S7106, determine what type it is (customized pattern).

First, in the customization item determination process of step S7105, the value of the item random number counter is acquired from the corresponding counter buffer and stored in the customization information storage area (item area) of the corresponding suspension area in the suspension information storage area. .. Further, by referring to the corresponding item storage table, it is determined which customized item the value of the item random number counter stored in the customized information storage area (item area) corresponds to. Then, the information indicating the corresponding customized item is stored (overwritten) in the customized information storage area (item area) of the corresponding holding area.

In the present embodiment, only one corresponding item storage table is provided, and when the value of the item random number counter is "0 to 9", it corresponds to "the front of the body", and the value of the item random number counter is "10. In the case of "19", it corresponds to "the rear of the body", in the case where the value of the item random number counter is "20 to 29", it corresponds to the "door", and in the case where the value of the item random number counter is "30 to 39". It corresponds to "tire", corresponds to "engine & muffler" when the value of the item random number counter is "40 to 49", and corresponds to "coloring" when the value of the item random number counter is "50 to 59". Is set.

In the customization pattern determination processing in step S7106 after step S7105, first, the value of the pattern random number counter is acquired from the corresponding counter buffer, and the customization information storage area (for the pattern Area). Further, by referring to the corresponding pattern storage table, it is determined whether the value of the pattern random number counter stored in the customization information storage area (pattern area) corresponds to which customization pattern. Then, information indicating the corresponding customized pattern is stored (overwritten) in the customized information storage area (pattern area) of the corresponding holding area.

As shown in FIG. 54, a plurality of corresponding pattern storage tables are provided. In the present embodiment, one for the high-income state selected in the case of the high-income state, one for the low-income state selected in cases other than the high-income state, and a special one from the previous jackpot state. When the variation display of the display devices 43L, 43R exceeds 1000 times, the variation display of the first rare parts high-accuracy state and the variation display of the special display devices 43L, 43R from the last jackpot state are 400 times to 420 times. The second rare part is for the highly accurate state, which is selected when it is set to the range of 600 times to 640 times and 800 times to 880 times.

Here, the customization pattern determination processing in step S7106 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7131, whether or not the value of the sub-side variation number counter (see step S4212 in FIG. 36) exceeds 1000, that is, the variation number performed after the previous jackpot-winning jackpot state is 1000 times. It is determined whether or not it exceeds. If an affirmative decision is made in step S7131, in step S7132, a customized pattern is determined based on the value of the pattern random number counter, referring to the corresponding pattern storage table for the second rare parts high-probability state.

Regarding the corresponding pattern storage table for the second rare parts high-accuracy state, when the value of the pattern random number counter is "0 to 99", it corresponds to "a part of a sports car system", and the value of the pattern random number counter is "100 to "199" corresponds to "parts of family car system", pattern random number counter value corresponds to "200 to 299" corresponds to "parts of armored vehicle system", and pattern random number counter value corresponds to "300 to 379" "Corresponds to "4WD car system parts", the pattern random number counter value corresponds to "980-989" corresponds to "decoration car system parts", and the pattern random number counter value corresponds to "990-999". Corresponds to "parts of the truck system", and the value of the pattern random number counter is "400 to 979" corresponds to "parts of the rear car". After step S7132, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7131, in step S7133, it is determined whether or not the value of the sub-side variation number counter is within the range of 400 to 420, 600 to 640, and 800 to 880, that is, the previous time. When it is determined that the number of fluctuations from the jackpot-winning jackpot state is within the range of 400 to 420 times, 600 to 640 times, and 800 to 880 times, the value of the pattern random number counter is determined in step S7134. Based on this, the customized pattern is determined by referring to the corresponding pattern storage table for the first rare parts highly accurate state.

Regarding the corresponding pattern storage table for the first rare parts high-accuracy state, when the value of the pattern random number counter is “0 to 299”, it corresponds to the “part of the decoration car system” and the value of the pattern random number counter is “300 to”. "899" corresponds to "track system parts", and the pattern random number counter value is "900 to 999" corresponds to "rear car parts", "sports car system parts", "family car system" No.”, “parts of armored car system”, and “parts of 4WD car system” are not set. After step S7134, this process ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S7133, it is determined in step S7135 whether or not the high-ball entering state (whether or not the flag indicating ON is set). If an affirmative decision is made in step S7135, that is, if it is the probability variation mode or the time reduction mode, then in step S7136, based on the value of the pattern random number counter, the corresponding pattern storage table for the high-ball entering state is referred to, Determine the customization pattern.

Regarding the corresponding pattern storage table for the high-ball entering state, when the value of the pattern random number counter is "0 to 99", it corresponds to "parts of the sports car system", and the value of the pattern random number counter is "100 to 399". If the value of the pattern random number counter is "400 to 599", the value corresponds to the "part of the armored vehicle system" and the value of the pattern random number counter is "600 to 999". The value of the pattern random number counter corresponding to "4WD car system parts" and corresponding to "decoration car system parts", "truck system parts", and "rear car parts" is not set. After step S7136, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7135, that is, if the mode is the normal mode or the latent probability mode, in step S7137, the corresponding pattern storage table for the low ball entry state is referred to based on the value of the pattern random number counter. Determine the customization pattern.

Regarding the corresponding pattern storage table for the low ball entry state, when the value of the pattern random number counter is "0 to 199", it corresponds to "parts of the sports car system", and the value of the pattern random number counter is "200 to 699". When the value of the pattern random number counter is “700 to 799”, it corresponds to the “part of the armored vehicle system” and when the value of the pattern random number counter is “800 to 979” Corresponds to "4WD car system parts", and corresponds to "decoration car system parts" when the pattern random number counter value is "980 to 989", and pattern random number counter value is "990 to 999" The value of the pattern random number counter corresponding to "parts of the truck system" and corresponding to "parts of the rear car" is not set. After step S7137, this process ends.

In the present embodiment, the "parts of the decoration car system" and the "parts of the rear car" correspond to specific customization patterns, and the corresponding pattern storage table for the first and second rare parts high-accuracy states is the second pattern storage. Corresponding to the means, the corresponding pattern storage table for the high-ball entering state and the low-ball entering state corresponds to the first pattern storing means, and the corresponding pattern storage table for the first and second rare part high-probability states is selected. The state in which the variation display has exceeded 1000 times since the end of the previous jackpot state corresponds to the second pattern selection state, and the other states correspond to the first pattern selection state. In addition, in the present embodiment, each corresponding pattern storage table and the corresponding gaming state correspond to each other in a one-to-one correspondence, but, for example, the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R from the previous jackpot state can be displayed. If it exceeds 1000 times, 90% of the corresponding pattern storage table for the first rare parts high-accuracy state is selected, and 10% is selected for the other corresponding pattern storage table, depending on the game state. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the corresponding pattern storage tables that are easily selected by the different method are different.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the rare parts high accuracy state (pattern high accuracy state) in which the corresponding pattern storage tables for the first and second rare parts high accuracy states are selected, the decorative pattern display device 42 (for example, the display unit In the lower right part of the), a display for instructing that the rare parts high accuracy state is in progress, for example, a display such as “rare item high accuracy middle” is derived.

Further, in the rare parts high-accuracy state, in the decorative pattern display device 42, the character object 423 performs an operation (gesture) that is executed only in the first rare-parts high-accuracy state, or an operation that is executed only in the second rare-parts high-accuracy state. Alternatively, the operation to be executed is performed only when the rare parts high probability state is approaching (for example, when the variable display is performed 30 times, the state transitions to the first or second rare parts high accuracy state). .. In addition, in the case of normal variable display, various game explanations may be performed on the decorative symbol display device 42, one of which is that a rare item can be acquired if the character's... It may be explained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the variable display of the identification information on the special display devices 43L and 43R (decorative pattern display device 42) is not performed, and further, a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display is finished. Also in the demo screen display derived to the decorative pattern display device 42, a display for teaching that the rare part high-accuracy state is in the decorative pattern display device 42, for example, a display such as "rare item high-probability medium" is derived. It is supposed to be done. In the present embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 42 corresponds to the rare pattern highly accurate state teaching means.

It should be noted that, while the demo screen is being displayed, by operating the effect button 125 or the cross button 126, a display for instructing that the rare parts high-accuracy state is in effect may be derived. Further, the demo screen display may be configured so that it is not known that the rare parts are in the high-accuracy state.

Returning to the description of FIG. 51, after step S7106, in step S7107, the customization information storage area of the reservation information storage area matches the customization item determined in step S7105 and is determined in step S7106. It is determined whether or not there is stored information of the same part object 433 as the customized pattern thus created.

In this embodiment, the customization item (value indicating) determined in step S7105 is stored (overwritten) in the item area of the customization information storage area. The value indicating the customization item is, for example, " "0 to 5" is set, "body front" corresponds to "0", "body rear" corresponds to "1", "door" corresponds to "2", and "tire". Corresponds to “3”, “engine & muffler” corresponds to “4”, and “coloring” corresponds to “5”.

When a negative determination is made in step S7107, in step S7109, the part object 433 is determined based on the customization items and customization patterns determined in steps S7105 and S7106, and the pending information storage area is set. Among them, the processing is performed for storing in the holding icon storage area of the corresponding holding area, and additionally displaying the increased number of item holding icons 416 in the holding display area 405 at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 42. .. That is, when the information indicating the parts object 433 is stored in the holding icon storage area, the item holding icon 416 of the corresponding parts object 433 is displayed in the holding display area 405.

However, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of the hold icons 411 displayed at the same time in the hold display area 405 is four, and further, the second variation display (variation based on a ball entering the second starting winning device 33b). Since the display) is given priority over the first variation display (variation display based on the ball entering the first start winning a prize device 33a), first, in this step S7109, the current hold icon 411 is changed in the variation order. It is within the fourth range, and if it is within the fourth range, the specific number is grasped. If it is within the fourth, the pattern of the hold icon 411 is grasped by referring to the hold icon storage area of the corresponding hold area, and the hold icon 411 drawn based on the pattern is displayed in the hold display area 405. Display it at the corresponding position. After step S7109, this process ends.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the hold icon 411, the first variation display based on the entry into the first starting prize device 33a, and the first variation display based on the entry into the second starting prize device 33b. It is a mode in which it is not specified which of the two variable displays is to be displayed. However, it is possible to determine which of the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b is a fluctuation display based on a ball entered by checking the fluctuation specifying lamp 40 and the transition of the lighting mode of the holding lamps 46a and 46b. It is configured to be able to. Further, in this embodiment, in the mobile-linked game state, the effect of changing the color of the normal hold icon 412 is not performed, but it may be configured to be performed.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S7107, that is, if the item holding icon 416 of the same part object 433 has already been displayed in the holding display area 405, in step S7108 the item area of the customized information storage area. "1" is added to the value stored in (when "6" is obtained by adding "1", "0" is set). As a result, the customization item is changed as a result. After step S7108, the process returns to step S7107. That is, the process of changing the customization item is repeated until a negative determination is made in step S7107. With this configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation where two or more of the same item reservation icons 416 (part objects 433) are displayed in the reservation display area 405.

If a negative determination is made in step S7103, that is, if it is not in the mobile interlocking game state, in step S7110, setting processing of the hold icon 411 (normal hold icon 412) in the non-mobile interlocking game state is performed. That is, in the non-mobile interlocking game state, while the hold icon 411 (item hold icon 416) having the part object 433 is not displayed, the color of the normal hold icon 412 (in this example, the jewel 414 on the pedestal 413) is changed to the same color. It is configured to change and suggest a winning expectation such as a jackpot (perform a prefetch pending notice effect).

Specifically, first, the value of the pattern random number counter is acquired from the corresponding counter buffer, and is stored in the customized information storage area (pattern area) of the corresponding holding area of the holding information storage areas. Note that the pattern random number counter and the customization information storage area are also used when setting the item holding icon 416 (parts object 433) when a mobile linked game is being performed, and are shared in this embodiment. Is being pursued.

Further, the custom hold pattern storage table as the non-mobile interlocking pattern table that stores the correspondence between the value of the pattern random number counter and the pattern of the item hold icon 416 (color of the jewel 414) is referred to, and the customized information is stored. It is determined whether or not the value of the pattern random number counter stored in the area (pattern area) corresponds to which pattern of the item holding icon 416 (color of the jewel 414). Then, the information indicating the pattern of the corresponding item reservation icon 416 is stored in the customized information storage area (pattern area) of the corresponding reservation area.

A plurality of normal hold pattern storage tables are provided. In the present embodiment, one for big hit/small hit that is selected when a big hit state or a small hit state occurs, one for front/rear deviation that is selected when a front/rear outreach occurs, and a reach other than front/rear outreach There are two types, one for those other than out-of-front/outside, which is selected when there is a problem, and the other for those other than that (when reach does not occur). Two are prepared for each of the one and the one selected in the case of the high-income state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal hold pattern storage table for out-of-front/back deviation is referred to, a color having a higher winning expectation is selected as compared to the case of referring to the normal hold pattern storage table for big hit/small hit. It is easy to win when it is referred to the normal holding pattern storage table for out-of-place other than before and after compared to when the customized winning value storage table for big hit/small hit is referred to. In the present embodiment, the color of the jewel 414 is white as a default, and the colors are associated such that the winning expectation is high such as blue<yellow<green<red<rainbow. In the present embodiment, it is configured such that white may be selected even when each normal hold pattern storage table is referred to in step S7110, which is performed when it is determined in step S7102. There is.

In addition, when referring to the customized winning value storage table for other than that, it is easier to select a color having a lower winning expectation than when referring to the normal reserved pattern storage table for deviation other than before and after. Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal hold pattern storage table is referred to in the high-ball entry state, a color having a higher winning expectation is selected as compared with the case where the normal hold pattern storage table is referred to in the low-ball entry state. It's getting harder.

Then, the determined pattern of the normal hold icon 412 is stored in the hold icon storage area. In the present embodiment, when “white” is selected as the pattern of the normal hold icon 412 (no other pattern is selected), the storing process in the hold icon storage area is not performed and the default value is set. It is supposed to be left as it is.

After step S7110, in step S7111, a holding process for additionally displaying the normal hold icon 412 that has increased this time is performed in the lower left hold display area 405 of the decorative symbol display device 42. That is, when the information indicating the normal hold icon 412 is stored in the hold icon storage area, the corresponding normal hold icon 412 is displayed in the hold display area 405.

However, in step S7111, first, the hold icon 411 of this time is within the fourth order in the changing order, and if it is within the fourth order, the specific number is grasped. Then, when the number is within the fourth, the pattern of the hold icon 411 is grasped by referring to the hold icon storage area of the corresponding hold area, and the hold icon 411 drawn based on the pattern is displayed in the hold display area 405. Display it at the corresponding position. After step S7111, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7102, additional display processing of the normal hold icon 412 is performed in step S7112. That is, since the default value is set in the hold icon storage area, the normal hold icon 412 (white color) that has been increased this time is displayed in the hold display area 405 at the lower left of the decorative pattern display device 42 based on the default value. 414) is additionally displayed.

However, also in the step S7112, if the hold icon 411 of this time is within the fourth order in the changing order, and if it is within the fourth order, the specific number is grasped and within the fourth order. If it is, the normal hold icon 412 is displayed at the corresponding position in the hold display area 405. After step S7112, this process ends.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, a customization variation time process regarding customization performed at the start of variation of a decorative symbol will be described. First, in step S7201, it is determined whether or not the customization chance flag of the execution area of the hold information storage area is set to ON. If a negative decision is made in step S7201, this processing is ended as it is.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S7201, a process for displaying a parts selection screen as shown in FIG. 48 is carried out in step S7202. Specifically, based on the information of the part object 433 stored in the hold icon storage area of the execution area (of the item hold icon 416 displayed in the hold display area 405 at the previous variable display). The part object 433 is displayed in the central portion of the screen of the decorative pattern display device 42 (in this example, it is displayed in the same manner as the item holding icon 416). Further, at the upper position of the part object 433 in the center of the screen, a description “Do you want to use the acquired parts?” is displayed, and “Yes” and “No” are displayed at the lower position of the part object 433 in the center of the screen. Selection items are displayed and can be selected and input by operating the cross button 126 and the effect button 125. In the tuning area 406, the part of the unfinished car 431 corresponding to the part object 433 in the center of the screen is displayed in a blinking manner.

In the following step S7203, the display time of the part selection screen display (input time limit) is set in the timing measurement timer. More specifically, in the present embodiment, the decorative design 421 (in this example, basically, the left design display in any of the three design display areas 401, 402, 403 from the start of the variable display of the decorative design). The parts selection screen is displayed by replacing the image during the period in which the decorative pattern 421) in the area 401 is in the high-speed fluctuation state until it is stopped and displayed (high-speed fluctuation period). Therefore, in step S7203, the time of the high-speed fluctuation period of fluctuation display is grasped, and the value corresponding to the time is set in the timing measurement timer.

After step S7203, in step S7204, the parts selection screen display flag indicating that the parts selection screen is being displayed is set to ON, and then the present process ends.

Next, the part selection process, which is the process during displaying the part selection screen, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7301, it is determined whether or not the flag for displaying the parts selection screen is set to ON. If a negative decision is made in step S7301, the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S7301, then in step S7302, it is decided whether or not "No" is input on the parts selection screen. If an affirmative decision is made in step S7302, then in step S7303 a process of deleting the parts selection screen is carried out. Subsequently, in step S7304, the flag for displaying the parts selection screen is turned off, and then this processing ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S7302, it is determined in step S7305 whether or not "YES" is input on the parts selection screen. If an affirmative decision is made in step S7305, in step S7306, the parts object 433 displayed in the center of the parts selection screen is reflected in the corresponding part (corresponding customization item) of the unfinished car 431 in the tuning area 406. The reflection flag indicating that is set to ON. After step S7306, the processes of steps S7303 and S7304 are executed, and then this process ends.

If a negative decision is made in step S7305, it is decided in step S7307 whether or not the timing measurement timer has become "0". If a negative decision is made in step S7307, the value of the timing measurement timer is decremented by 1 in step S7308, and then this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S7307, that is, if the display (possible) period of the parts selection screen has ended, the reflection flag is set to ON in step S7306, and then the processing of steps S7303 and S7304 is executed. After this, this process ends. In the present embodiment, if no selection input of “Yes” or “No” is made within the display period of the parts selection screen, it is considered that the selection input of “Yes” has been made, Although the reflection flag is turned on, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the reflection flag is not set to on.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display (possible) period of the parts selection screen corresponds to the high-speed fluctuation period of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the decorative pattern display device 42, and “Yes” is displayed within the display period of the parts selection screen. If no selection input of "," "No" has been made, the high-speed fluctuation of the decorative design will be ended together with the deletion of the parts selection screen. In addition, if "Yes" or "No" is selected within the display period of the parts selection screen, the high-speed fluctuation of the variable display is displayed until the high-speed fluctuation period of the variable display of the decorative pattern ends. The Rukoto.

Next, a reflection process for reflecting the parts object 433 on the unfinished car 431 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, in the present embodiment, the number of completed vehicles 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 is up to two, and the tuning area is displayed with two completed vehicles 441 displayed in the gallery area 407. When the unfinished vehicle 431 of 406 is completed, the player selects one out of the three completed vehicles 441 including the completed vehicle 441 just completed and erases it. At this time, information on the remaining two completed vehicles 441 is stored in the completed customization storage area.

First, in step S7401, it is determined whether the reflection flag is set to ON. If a negative decision is made in step S7401, this processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if affirmative determination is made in step S7401, in step S7402, the part object 433 (the part object displayed in the center of the part selection screen, which is stored in the hold icon storage area of the execution area of the hold information storage area). 433) is stored in the corresponding storage area of the unfinished customized storage area.

The incomplete car 431 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is drawn based on the information stored in the incomplete customization storage area. Therefore, storing the information of the part object 433 in the unfinished customized storage area results in reflecting the part object 433 to the corresponding part (corresponding customized item) of the unfinished car 431. Incidentally, the completed car 441 is drawn based on the information stored in the completed customization storage area.

After step S7402, in step S7403, whether or not the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 is completed, that is, the part object 433 (customization pattern) is stored corresponding to each customization item in the unfinished customization storage area. It is determined whether or not the information of the part object 433 is stored in all the storage areas to be stored (whether or not the default value is gone).

If a negative determination is made in step S7403, that is, if there is a customization item for which the part object 433 has not been set for the unfinished car 431, in step S7404, the decorative pattern display device 42 stores the pending information. Processing for performing a reflection display such that the part object 433 stored in the hold icon storage area of the execution area of the area is attached (customized) to the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 (reflection display when incomplete) Process).

By performing the reflection display processing at the time of incompleteness, the reflection display performed on the decorative pattern display device 42 is displayed in the center of the screen on the parts selection screen (see FIG. 48) as shown in FIG. 49. The part object 433 is moved to the tuning area 406 at the lower right of the screen, and is further displayed. The part object 433 is fitted to the corresponding part of the unfinished car 431, and the fitted part object 433 blinks brightly for a while. Be seen. After step S7404, this process ends.

If a positive determination is made in step S7403, that is, if the parts object 433 is reflected in all the customization items of the unfinished car 431 in the tuning area 406 and the completed car 441 is obtained, in step S7405, unfinished The stored information in the customized storage area is stored (copied) in the completed vehicle storage storage area.

In the present embodiment, in addition to the completed customized storage area and the unfinished customized storage area, a completed vehicle storage storage area is provided as a completed object storage storage means for storing information on the completed vehicle 441 completed in the mobile interlocking game this time. ing. When the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 is completed, the information (the combination of the part objects 433, etc.) of the completed vehicle 441 is always stored in the completed vehicle storage area. The stored contents of the completed car storage memory area are erased even if the information of the corresponding completed car 441 is erased in the completed customized storage area (the corresponding completed car 441 is erased on the screen of the decorative pattern display device 42). It does not happen, and is continuously stored (for example, 50 vehicles can be stored and stored). However, when the code issuing screen is closed after issuing the QR code to end the mobile interlocking game, the storage information of the completed car storage storage area, the completed customized storage area, and the unfinished customized storage area is different from that of other individuals. It will be erased (default value is set) together with the data (game information of the individual player who finished the mobile linked game).

In addition, when terminating the mobile interlocking game, when the QR code is issued, the completed car storage storage area and the unfinished customized storage area are referenced, and the QR code is completed when the mobile interlocking game is completed this time. The information of the car 441 and the information of the incomplete car 431 at the end of the mobile interlocking game are set to be included. The server stores, for each player, a server-side completed vehicle storage area for storing and storing information of completed vehicles 441 completed by the player, and an unfinished vehicle 431 for storing information of incomplete vehicles. It has a completed vehicle storage area. When the server receives the information about customization, the server stores the information of the unfinished vehicle 431 at the end of the game in the unfinished vehicle storage area, and configures the completed vehicle 441 newly completed in this game. When the combination of the part objects 433 is new, the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored (added) in the server-side completed vehicle storage storage area. In the present embodiment, the server-side completed vehicle storage storage area and the incomplete vehicle storage area configure the server-side continuous display object information storage means.

Further, in this embodiment, the player is configured to be able to set the customization on the web page of the server. As an item of such setting, for example, a setting as to whether or not to take over the contents of the unfinished car 431 at the end of the previous mobile interlocking game (if no setting is made, “take over” is selected), completed until now. A setting for selecting up to two completed vehicles 441 to be displayed in the gallery area 407 of the decorative pattern display device 42 at the start of the mobile linked game from the completed vehicle list (when the setting is not performed, " None is selected). Then, the setting information regarding the customization is included in the password.

Then, at the next mobile interlocking game, by inputting such a password into the pachinko machine 10, the unfinished car 431 at the end of the previous game is displayed in the tuning area 406 of the decorative pattern display device 42, and customization is continued. It is possible to display the desired finished car 441 in the gallery area 407.

After step S7405, in step S7406, whether or not the gallery area 407 has a vacancy, that is, at least one of the first completed customized storage area and the second completed customized storage area stores the information of the completed vehicle 441. It is determined whether or not the state has not been set (the state in which the default value is set). More specifically, for example, a storage area corresponding to a predetermined customization item in the first completed customization storage area is referenced to determine whether or not the value is the default value. It may be configured to refer to a storage area corresponding to a predetermined customization item in the completed customization storage area and determine whether or not the value is the default value.

When confirming whether the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the completed customized storage area in step S7406 or the like, reference is made to the storage areas provided corresponding to the plurality of customized items in each completed customized storage area. If the storage area is determined, it is possible to erase the storage content of the referenced storage area without erasing all the storage content of the storage area provided corresponding to the plurality of customization items of each completed customized storage area. Only by leaving it, it is determined that the information of the completed vehicle 441 is not stored. Therefore, when erasing the memory of each completed customized memory area, by adopting a configuration in which only the memory area that may be referred to when confirming whether the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored is adopted, It is possible to simplify the processing related to erasing.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S7406, that is, if there is a vacancy in the gallery area 407 (only one completed car 441 is displayed or none is displayed), in step S7407, The storage information of the unfinished customized storage area is stored (copied) in the empty first completed customized storage area or second empty customized storage area.

In the following step S7408, in the decorative symbol display device 42, the part object 433 stored in the hold icon storage area of the execution area of the hold information storage area is attached to the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 (customized). ) And a completion display such as moving to the gallery area 407 because the unfinished vehicle 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 is completed (reflection display processing at completion). After step S7408, the stored information in the unfinished customized storage area is reset (default value is set) in step S7409, and then the present process ends.

If the determination in step S7406 is negative, that is, if the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 is completed in the state where two completed vehicles 441 are already displayed in the gallery area 407, in step S7410, A process for displaying a completed car selection screen for allowing the player to select one of the three completed cars 441 to be deleted is performed.

For example, as shown in FIG. 50, on the completed car selection screen, an explanation such as “It is full. Please select one completed car to delete.” is displayed at the top of the decorative pattern display device 42, and the decorative pattern is displayed. From the left, the completed vehicles 441 corresponding to the first completed customized storage area, the completed vehicles 441 corresponding to the second completed customized storage area, and the completed vehicles 441 corresponding to the unfinished customized storage area are arranged side by side in the center of the display device 42. Is displayed, and a selection item such as “Delete this” is displayed below each completed vehicle 441. In addition, on the completed car selection screen, for example, "You can check all completed cars (including deleted ones) obtained today by accessing the home page (server) after the (mobile linked) game. In addition, in the next mobile-linked game, you can select a completed car to use on the actual machine (pachinko machine) from the completed cars that you have obtained, and use it for production etc. For example, scroll display is performed from right to left below the selection item; not shown in FIG. 50).

After step S7410, in step S7411, the display time (input time limit) of the completed vehicle selection screen is set in the timing measurement timer. In the present embodiment, the display period of the completed car selection screen is set to end at least until the variable display of the decorative pattern that has displayed the completed car selection screen ends. For example, in the case of “big hit”, “small hit”, “out-of-front/rear reach”, and “reach other than out-of-front/rear” in which the reach state occurs, the reach state is started. On the other hand, in the case of "complete disengagement" in which the reach state does not occur, it is until just before the end of variable display. Therefore, in step S7411, the type of fluctuation display and the remaining fluctuation time are grasped, and the corresponding value is set in the timing measurement timer.

After step S7411, in step S7412, the completed vehicle selection screen display flag indicating that the completed vehicle selection screen is being displayed is set to ON, and then the present process ends.

Next, the completed vehicle selection processing, which is the processing during the display of the completed vehicle selection screen, will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7501, it is determined whether or not a completed vehicle selection screen displaying flag indicating that the completed vehicle selection screen is being displayed is set to ON. If a negative decision is made in step S7501, the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S7501, whether or not the deletion input of the first completed customized storage area has been carried out in step S7502, that is, of the completed vehicle displayed on the left side on the completed vehicle selection screen. It is determined whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated in a state where the cursor is placed on the option located below. If an affirmative decision is made in step S7502, in step S7503 the storage information of the unfinished customized storage area is stored (overwritten) in the first completed customized storage area.

After step S7503, in step S7504, the stored information in the incomplete customized storage area is reset (default value is set). In a succeeding step S7505, processing for displaying such that the completed car 441 which has not been erased moves to the gallery area 407 is performed. After step S7505, in step S7511, the flag indicating that the completed vehicle selection screen is displayed is turned off, and then this process ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S7502, in step S7506, it is determined whether or not the deletion input of the second completed customized storage area is performed, that is, the completed vehicle displayed in the "center" on the completed vehicle selection screen is displayed. It is determined whether or not the effect button 125 has been operated in a state where the cursor is placed on the option located below. If an affirmative decision is made in step S7506, in step S7507 the storage information of the incomplete customization storage area is stored (overwritten) in the second completion customization storage area. After step S7507, the processes of steps S7504, S7505, and S7511 are executed, and then this process ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S7506, in step S7508, it is determined whether or not the unfinished customized storage area has been erased, that is, below the completed vehicle displayed on the right side of the completed vehicle selection screen. It is determined whether or not the effect button 125 is operated in a state where the cursor is placed on the option located at. If an affirmative decision is made in step S7508, the processing of steps S7504, S7505 and S7511 is executed, and then this processing is ended.

If a negative decision is made in step S7508, it is decided in step S7509 whether or not the value of the timing measurement timer has become zero. If a negative decision is made in step S7509, the value of the timing measurement timer is decremented by 1 in step S7510, and then this processing is ended. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S7509, then the processing of steps S7504, S7505, and S7511 is executed, and then this processing ends. That is, when the player does not perform the erase input operation while the completed car selection screen is displayed, the unfinished car 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 is returned to the uncustomized state, and the gallery area 407 is displayed. The completed car 441 will be left as it is.

In the present embodiment, when the sub control device 262 receives from the main control device 261 a variation pattern command corresponding to “big hit”, “small hit”, or “out-of-front reach”, the reach effect (super In some cases, "car effect" is selected as one of the reach effects). For example, when the variable display is set in step S3907, the "car effect" is selected at a rate of 3/4 in the variable display that teaches the occurrence of the big hit state or the small hit state, and the out-of-front/reach reach is derived. In the variable display, "car effect" is selected at a rate of 1/2. The sub-control device 262 of the present embodiment is provided with a “car effect flag” indicating that the “car effect” is to be derived, and in the case of winning by a lottery as to whether or not to derive the car effect, The car effect flag is set to ON.

Next, a vehicle effect setting process performed when “vehicle effect” is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 59. Incidentally, the car effect process is also performed when the variable display of the decorative symbol is set in the display setting process of step S3907.

First, in step S7601, it is determined whether the vehicle effect flag is on. If a negative decision is made in step S7601, the present process is terminated. On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S7601, it is decided in step S7602 whether or not the mobile interlocking game is being performed.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S7602, it is decided in step S7603 whether or not it is the "normal stage" or the "symptom stage". As described above, the normal stage is an effect state corresponding to the normal mode, and the precursor stage is an effect state that suggests that the player stays in either the normal mode or the latent probability mode.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S7603, in step S7604, a customization opportunity is given in the variable display by referring to the hold icon storage area (customization chance flag) of the execution area of the hold information storage area (part selection). Screen is displayed). If a negative determination is made in step S7604, that is, if the customization chance is not given, normal vehicle effect setting processing is performed in step S7605.

Here, the outline of the car effect in the normal stage and the precursory stage will be described. The car production is divided into "competition part" and "preparation part before competition". First, when the car effect is started, the type of the car effect is taught, the preparation for the competition is started, and the completed car 441 to participate in the competition is selected. Therefore, when two completed cars 441 are displayed in the gallery area 407, a screen for allowing the player to select one of them is displayed. Then, when selection input is performed, a display that introduces the selected completed car 441 is displayed until the competition start timing arrives, and when the competition start timing arrives, A predetermined character will board the selected completed vehicle 441, and an effect such that a competition with a rival character will be played in the selected competition will be started.

In addition, in the car production (normal car production) of the normal stage and the precursory stage in the present embodiment, when the jackpot with a payout (16RS, 8RS, 8RN) is “success”, the front/rear reach (disconnection) occurs. In the case of "failure", and if there is no odds of probability variation big hit (2RS) or small hit, it will be "not settled (draw)".

When the selection input is not performed until the start timing of the competition, the completed vehicle 441 (the completed vehicle 441 on the left side) corresponding to the first completed customized storage area is automatically selected. When only one completed car 441 is displayed in the gallery area 407, the completed car 441 is automatically selected. Further, when no completed car 441 is displayed in the gallery area 407, a family car is automatically selected.

Further, in the present embodiment, the success of the “car production” is achieved by the combination of the “type of car production (competition)” and the “type of the completed car 441 used for car production (competition in the competition)”. It is configured to indicate the degree of expectation, that is, the degree of expectation of occurrence of a jackpot state with a payout. As described above, the types (systems) of the completed vehicle 441 of this embodiment include a sports car system, a family car system, an armored vehicle system, a 4WD car system, a decoration car system, a truck system, and a rear car system.

Further, as types of car effects, there are “race effects”, “power comparison effects”, “contest effects”, and “date effects”. "Race production" is relatively advantageous for "sports car system, family car system" (hereinafter these two systems are collectively referred to as "Group A"), and "power comparison production" is "armored car system, 4WD car". "System" (hereinafter, these two systems are collectively referred to as "group B") is advantageous, and "contest production" is "decoration car system, truck system" (hereinafter, these two systems are collectively referred to as "group C"). Correspondence is made so that (referred to) is advantageous. Furthermore, the "sports car system" is more advantageous than the "family car system", the "armored vehicle system" is more advantageous than the "4WD car system," and the "decoration car system" is more advantageous than the "truck system". Such correspondence is made. In addition, the “date production” is set to have no superiority or inferiority between “group A” to “group C”. The "mix system" and "rear car system" are set to have no superiority or inferiority depending on the type of "car production".

Here, the normal vehicle effect setting process of step S7605 will be described with reference to FIG. First, in step S7701, it is determined whether or not the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the first completed customized storage area. If an affirmative decision is made in step S7701, then in step S7702 a confirmation process is carried out for the type of the completed vehicle 441 stored in the first completed customization storage area. That is, each customization item in the first completed customization storage area is checked, and in the present embodiment, when three or more customization items are grouped in the same system, the system is the completed vehicle 441. If there are at most two customization items of the same system, it is determined as other (hereinafter also referred to as “mix system”).

Further, the sub-control device 262 is provided with a system determination flag used in the car effect setting process, and the system determination flag is a sports car system, family car system, armored vehicle system, 4WD car system, decoration car system. , A truck system, a rear car system, and a mix system are individually provided with eight flags. Then, the system determination flag corresponding to the type (system) of the completed vehicle 441 determined in step S7702 is set to ON in step S7703.

After step S7703 or if a negative decision is made in step S7701, it is decided in step S7704 whether or not the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the second completed customization storage area. If a positive determination is made in step S7704, in step S7705, confirmation processing of the type of the completed vehicle 441 stored in the second completed customization storage area is performed. In subsequent step S7706, a system determination flag corresponding to the type (system) of completed vehicle 441 determined in step S7705 is set to ON. After step S7706, the process moves to step S7709.

When a negative determination is made in step S7704, it is determined in step S7707 whether or not the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the first completed customized storage area. When a negative determination is made in step S7707, that is, when the information of the completed vehicle 441 is not stored in either the first completed customized storage area or the second completed customized storage area (the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the gallery area 407). If there is no such vehicle), the system determination flag corresponding to the family car system is set to ON in step S7708. After step S7708, or if an affirmative determination is made in step S7707, the process moves to step S7709.

In step S7709, it is determined whether the type of the completed vehicle 441 is the "rear car system" or the "mix car system" by referring to the system determination flag. In the present embodiment, when the type of the completed vehicle 441 is discriminated by referring to the system discrimination flag, "flag corresponding to rear car" → "flag corresponding to decoration car" → "flag corresponding to armored vehicle" → "sports car" Are referred to in the order (rare order) of "flag corresponding to", "flag corresponding to truck", "flag corresponding to 4WD car", and "flag corresponding to family car". Then, when the system determination flag that is set to ON is confirmed (even when the two system determination flags are ON), the process of identifying the type of the completed vehicle 441 ends.

When a negative determination is made in step S7709, it is determined in step S7710 whether or not the present car effect is successful, that is, whether or not a big jackpot with a payout is achieved. If an affirmative decision is made in step S7710, then in step S7711 the type of vehicle effect is determined by referring to the vehicle effect table for success based on the value of the vehicle effect random number counter.

The car effect random number counter is configured to be incremented one by one in the range of 0 to 14, for example, and after reaching the upper limit value (that is, 14) as the closing price, returns to 0 which is the lower limit value as the opening price. .. The car effect random number counter is updated regularly (for example, for each normal process), and the value is stored in the corresponding counter buffer. In step S7711, the value of the car effect random number counter is acquired from the counter buffer. Further, the car effect table is a table that stores the correspondence relationship between the value of the car effect random number counter and the type of car effect (type category). As shown in FIG. , “For special draw/for special success”, and “for special failure/for special draw”.

The process of step S7711 will be described more specifically. As shown in FIG. 62A, when the car effect table for success is referred to, the value of the car effect random number counter is “0 to 5”. When the value of the car effect random number counter is determined to be "category 1" and the value of the car effect random number counter is "6 to 9," it is determined to be the type of car effect of the "category 2" and the value of the vehicle effect random number counter. Is 10 to 12, it is determined as the type of "Category 3" car effect, and when the value of the vehicle effect random number counter is "13, 14", it is determined as the type of "Category 4" car effect. To be done.

Subsequently, referring to the vehicle type correspondence table that stores the correspondence relationship between the type (vehicle type group) of the completed vehicle 441 and the type (type category) of the vehicle effect shown in FIG. 63, the vehicle type group of the completed vehicle 441 and the vehicle effect The type of car effect is determined based on the type category. That is, in the case where the vehicle type group is “Group A; sports car system, family car system”, if the type category of the car effect is “category 1”, “race effect” is selected, and the type category of the vehicle effect is “ In the case of "category 2", "date production" is selected, when the category of car production is "category 3", "contest production" is selected, and when the category of car production is "category 4" "Driving force comparison" is selected.

Further, when the vehicle type group is “Group B; armored vehicle system, 4WD car system”, when the type category of the vehicle effect is “category 1”, “power comparison effect” is selected, and the type category of the vehicle effect is “ In the case of "category 2", "date production" is selected, when the category of car production is "category 3", "race production" is selected, and when the category of vehicle production is "category 4" "Contest production" is selected.

Further, when the vehicle type group is “Group C; decoration car system, truck system”, when the type category of the car effect is “category 1”, “contest effect” is selected, and the category category of the vehicle effect is “category”. In the case of "2", "Date production" is selected, in the case where the type category of car production is "Category 3", "Force comparison production" is selected, and when the type category of car production is "Category 4" "Race production" is selected.

After step S7711, this process ends. In addition, when a negative determination is made in step S7710, it is determined in step S7712 whether or not the car effect fails, that is, whether or not the variable display corresponds to "out (front/rear)". If an affirmative decision is made in step S7712, in step S7713, the vehicle effect table for failure (see FIG. 62(b)) is referred to based on the value of the vehicle effect random number counter, and the type category of the vehicle effect. And the vehicle effect type is determined based on the vehicle effect type category and the vehicle type group. After step S7713, this process ends.

If the determination in step S7712 is negative, that is, if there is no payout big hit (2RS) or a small hit, then in step S7714, a car effect table for the time of draw based on the value of the car effect random number counter or the like. With reference to FIG. 62C, the type category of the vehicle effect is determined, and the type of the vehicle effect is determined based on the type category of the vehicle effect and the vehicle type group. After step S7714, this process ends.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S7709, it is decided in step S7715 whether or not the car effect is successful. When an affirmative determination is made in step S7715, in step S7716, the vehicle effect table for special success (see FIG. 62D) is referred to based on the value of the vehicle effect random number counter and the like, and the type of vehicle effect is specified. The category is determined, and the type of the vehicle effect is determined based on the type category of the vehicle effect and the vehicle type group. After step S7716, this process ends.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S7715, then in step S7717, based on the value of the car effect random number counter or the like, the car effect table for special failure/drawing is referred to (see FIG. 62(e)), The type category of the vehicle effect is determined, and the type of the vehicle effect is determined based on the type category of the vehicle effect and the vehicle type group. After step S7717, this process ends.

Returning to the description of FIG. 59, after step S7605, the vehicle effect flag is turned off in step S7606. In the following step S7611, the car effect execution flag indicating that the car effect has been set is turned on, and in step S7612, a value corresponding to the car effect timer that measures the time until the vehicle effect is executed is set. To do. After that, this processing ends.

If an affirmative determination is made in step S7604, that is, if a customization opportunity is given (the parts selection screen is displayed) in the variable display, the vehicle effect is not set in step S7606. The effect flag is turned off, the processes of steps S7611 and S7612 are performed, and then the present process ends. That is, as described above, in the car production, the type of the completed car 441 and the type of the vehicle production are associated with each other in accordance with the degree of expectation of winning for the occurrence of a jackpot with a payout, etc. In the stage and the precursory stage, the player selects a completed car 441 used in the car production from the completed cars 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 in the car production. Therefore, in the configuration for determining the type of car effect at the start of the variable display, if the number of completed vehicles 441 used for the vehicle effect is increased or changed after the type of car effect is determined. There is a possibility that the correspondence relationship between the type of the completed vehicle 441 and the type of car effect and the expected winning degree may deviate. Therefore, in order to avoid such a situation, in this example, the vehicle effect is not derived in the variable display in which the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 may be completed.

If a negative decision is made in step S7603, it is decided in step S7607 whether or not the stage is the probable variation stage. When an affirmative determination is made in step S7607, in step S7608, the vehicle effect setting in the probability variation stage (probability variation vehicle effect setting process) is performed.

In the "car production" of the "probability variation stage", if there is a jackpot with a payout (16RS, 8RS), that is, "if the jackpot condition occurs, the probability variation stage continues", then the result is "success" ), it means "not settled (drawing)", and there is no payout, usually a big jackpot (2RN) or a small hit, that is, when "the probability variation stage ends" or "the probability variation stage ends. If the probability transition stage of continues (fake), it becomes a "failure".

Further, in the “probability variation stage”, the visual state of the background and the like on the decorative symbol display device 42 is different from that of the “normal stage” and the “prediction stage”, and basically, a display in which the completed vehicle 441 continues to run is displayed. In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the probability variation mode is at the end of the jackpot state (timing at the end of the ending effect) or after the completion, and when it is determined that the probability variation mode, the occurrence of the jackpot state this time is " In the case of being instructed by "car effect", a display that the completed car 441 used for the vehicle effect runs on the decorative symbol display device 42 is displayed. On the other hand, in the case of the winning instruction other than the car production, a display for prompting the user to select the completed vehicle 441 to be driven at the end of the jackpot or after the completion is selected from the completed vehicles displayed in the gallery area 407. Done. In addition, even after the start of the probability variation stage, it is possible to replace the traveling completed vehicle 441 with the completed vehicle 441 in the gallery area by the player's operation on the way, but during the variable display where the "car production" is performed. Has a configuration in which no opportunity to change the completed car 441 is given. That is, the completed vehicle 441 that is running is directly led to the “car production”. For this reason, in the probability variation time vehicle effect setting process of step S7608, the type of the completed vehicle 441 used for the vehicle effect at the start of the variable display is specified, and thus the step of the normal vehicle effect setting process (see FIG. 60). The same processing as the processing after S7709 (however, the correspondence between the success or failure of the car effect and the hit type is different) is performed.

After step S7608, the vehicle effect flag is turned off in step S7606, the processes of steps S7611 and S7612 are performed, and then this process ends. Even in the "probability variation stage", the customization of the unfinished vehicle 431 and the like are performed in the same manner as in the "normal stage" and the "symptom stage".

If a negative determination is made in step S7607, that is, if the pullback stage is in either the time shortening mode or the probability variation mode, but which is not taught, in step S7609. , Car setting on the pullback stage (pullback vehicle effect setting process) is performed.

In the "car production" of the "pullback stage", if there is a jackpot with a payout (16RS, 8RS), that is, "when the jackpot state occurs, move to the probability variation stage", "success" is reached, and the front and rear reach If the result is “out”, it will be “failure”, and if it is a normal big hit (2RN) or small hit without a ball, it will be “undecided (draw)”.

Further, in the "pullback stage", similarly to the "probability variation stage", basically, the display that the completed vehicle 441 continues to travel (the background is different from the "probability variation stage") is displayed. Then, in step S7609, the type of the running complete vehicle 441 is grasped, and the same process as the probability variation time vehicle effect setting process (however, the correspondence relation between the success or failure of the vehicle effect and the hit type is different) is performed. It will be.

After step S7609, the vehicle effect flag is turned off in step S7606, the processes of steps S7611 and S7612 are performed, and then the present process is ended. Even in the "pullback stage", customization of the unfinished vehicle 431 and the like are performed in the same manner as in the "normal stage" and the "precursor stage".

When a negative determination is made in step S7602, a non-mobile interlocking vehicle effect setting process is performed in step S7610. In the non-mobile interlocking game state, the car used for the car production cannot be customized, and the car (completed car 441) to be used is unilaterally selected by the sub-control device 262 also in the car production. It Therefore, regarding the non-mobile linked car effect setting process, after the process of selecting the completed car 441 used for the car effect is performed, the same process as the probability variation time vehicle effect setting process (however, if the car effect is successful or not) , The correspondence relationship with the hit type is different). After step S7610, this process ends.

In the non-mobile interlocking gaming state, for example, only a family car system may be used for car production, or a lottery for determining a vehicle type may be performed.

Next, a vehicle effect execution process when executing a vehicle effect will be described with reference to FIG. 64. First, in step S7801, it is determined whether or not the car effect execution flag is set to ON. If a negative decision is made in step S7801, the present process is terminated.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S7801, in step S7802 used car selection indicating that the used car selection screen for allowing the player to select the completed car 441 to be used for car production is displayed. It is determined whether or not the screen display flag is set to ON. If a negative decision is made in step S7802, it is decided in step S7803 whether or not the value of the car effect timer has become zero. If a negative decision is made in step S7803, the value of the car effect timer is decremented by 1 in step S7804, and then this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S7803, it is decided in step S7805 whether or not a mobile linked game is being performed. If a positive determination is made in step S7805, it is determined in step S7806 whether the stage is the normal stage or the precursor stage.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S7806, then in step S7807 it is determined whether or not there is memory for two completed cars 441 in the completed customized storage area, that is, the first completed customized storage area and the second completed customized area. It is determined whether or not the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored in both the storage areas. If an affirmative decision is made in step S7807, then in step S7808, processing for displaying the use vehicle selection screen is carried out. For example, in the used car selection screen, in the vertical center of the decorative pattern display device 42, the completed car 441 of the first completed customized storage area is displayed on the left and the completed car 441 of the second completed customized storage area is displayed on the right. , Above that, for example, a guide such as "Please select one completed car to be used for car production" is displayed, and below each completed car 441, a selection item such as "Use this car" is displayed. To be done.

In the following step S7809, the use vehicle selection screen display flag is set to ON, and in step S7810, a value corresponding to the display time of the use vehicle selection screen is set in the car effect timer, and then this processing is ended. .. When displaying the used vehicle selection screen, it is necessary to secure the display time. Therefore, for example, in the car effect setting process of FIG. 59, when it is determined that the stage is the normal stage or the precursory stage, the car effect timer setting process of step S7612 corresponds to a shorter time than other cases. The value may be set in the car production timer. In this case, it is possible to unify the display time of the car production itself (time of competition).

If a negative decision is made in step S7807, it is decided in step S7811 whether or not there is one completed car 441 stored in the completed customized storage area. If an affirmative decision is made in step S7811, in step S7812, the completed car 441 in the completed customization storage area that has a memory in the first completed customization storage area or the second completed customization storage area is set as the vehicle (vehicle). Information of the corresponding completed vehicle 441 is stored in the used vehicle storage area referred to when rendering the effect).

In subsequent step S7813, the corresponding completed customization storage area is reset (default value is set). That is, in the present embodiment, once the completed car 441 is used for the car production, after the car production is finished, the completed car 441 once used for the car production (regardless of the result of the car production) displays the decorative pattern. It is configured to be erased from the screen (gallery area 407) of the device 42. After step S7813, this process ends.

If a negative determination is made in step S7811, that is, if there is no completed vehicle 441 in the gallery area 407, the "family car" is set as the vehicle to be used in step S7814. After that, this processing ends.

If the determination in step S7806 is negative, that is, if it is the probability variation stage or the pull-back stage, in step S7815, the completed vehicle 441 running and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 42 is used as it is for vehicle production. Set as. In subsequent step S7816, the corresponding completed customization storage area is reset. After that, this processing ends. In addition, when the jackpot occurrence big hit state does not occur after the end of the variable display in which the car effect is performed, the running customization is performed until the car effect is displayed and the information of the completed car 441 used for the vehicle effect is stored. The information of the completed car 441 in the area is erased. For this reason, after the car rendering (after the car rendering fails), if the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the completed customization storage area that has not been erased, the completed vehicle 441 is displayed and displayed. When the information of 441 is not stored, the "family car" is displayed for traveling. Also, in the probability transformation stage or the pullback stage, when the unfinished vehicle 431 is completed, the completed vehicle 441 is displayed in the gallery area 407. If the completed vehicle 441 exists in the gallery area 407, the completed vehicle 441 is displayed. It is possible to display.

If the determination in step S7805 is negative, that is, if the non-mobile interlocking game is in progress, the vehicle set in the non-mobile interlocking vehicle effect setting process (see step S7610 in FIG. 59) in step S7817. Is set as the used vehicle (the information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the used vehicle storage area), and then the present process ends.

If an affirmative decision is made in step S7802, that is, if the use vehicle selection screen is being displayed, then in step S7818, it is determined whether or not the player has performed an input operation of selecting the completed vehicle 441 to be used for the vehicle effect. To determine. If an affirmative decision is made in step S7818, then in step S7819 the selected completed vehicle 441 is set as the used vehicle (information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the used vehicle storage area). In subsequent step S7820, the corresponding completed customization storage area is reset. After that, in step S7821, the in-use vehicle selection screen display flag is turned off, and then the present process is terminated.

If a negative decision is made in step S7818, it is decided in step S7822 whether or not the value of the car effect timer is zero. If a negative decision is made in step S7822, the car effect timer is decremented by 1 in step S7823, and then this processing is ended.

On the other hand, if an affirmative decision is made in step S7822, in step S7824, the completed vehicle 441 in the first completed customized storage area is set as the used vehicle (information of the completed vehicle 441 is stored in the used vehicle storage area). That is, in the state where two completed cars 441 are displayed in the gallery area 407, if the player does not perform a selection input operation at the time of starting the car production, the completed cars 441 (in the first completed customized storage area) The completed car 441) arranged on the left side of the gallery area is automatically selected. In subsequent step S7825, the first completed customized storage area is reset. After that, in step S7821, the in-use vehicle selection screen in-display flag is turned off, and then this processing is ended.

The information of the completed vehicle 441 stored in the used vehicle storage area is deleted along with the shift processing of the variation information (the used vehicle storage area may be provided in the execution area of the reserved information storage area). Further, after the jackpot state is finished, it is determined whether or not it is the probability variation stage or the pullback stage, and when the determination is affirmative, the completed vehicle 441 information stored in the used vehicle storage area indicates the probability variation stage and the pullback stage. It is stored in the traveling vehicle storage area that is referred to when the traveling vehicle is drawn on the stage.

In addition, the decorative pattern 421 has the same aspect in both the mobile interlocking gaming state and the non-mobile interlocking gaming state, and basically has the common aspect regardless of the stay stage. In addition, in the car production, a predetermined character object 423 is boarded on the used complete car 441, but the winning degree may be changed depending on the type of the character object 423. Further, it may be configured that the player can select and set the character object 423 by a customization function that can be used by performing a mobile linked game.

As described above in detail, in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern display device 42 is configured to be able to customize a car that can be used for a specific effect (vehicle effect), and the customization is performed over a plurality of variable displays. Done. That is, regarding the car, a plurality of customizable parts (customization items) are set, and by applying a part object 433 having a plurality of patterns corresponding to each customization item to each customization item, customization is performed. Is configured to take place. In the present embodiment, in the case where the variable display of the decorative pattern is stored in a pending manner, the customization lottery is performed and whether or not the opportunity (customization opportunity) to apply the part object 433 to the unfinished car 431 is given, and the customization is performed. The type of the part object 433 is determined when the lottery is won, and the customization chance is given when the corresponding variable display is started. In this way, an object (car) whose form can be variously changed according to customization that can be performed as the game progresses is provided, and the customized car can be used for a specific effect (car effect). By doing so, it is possible to diversify the production and the like, and suppress the monotonous feeling during the game.

Further, regarding a car in the middle of customization (unfinished car 431) in which customization items that have not been customized yet (default) exist, in the variable display of multiple times in the tuning area 406 at the lower right of the decorative pattern display device 42. It is displayed continuously. Then, in regard to the unfinished car 431, when customization of all the customization items is completed and the completed car 441 is displayed, the completed car 441 is moved and displayed in the gallery area 407 in the upper right part of the decorative pattern display device 42, The gallery area 407 waits for an opportunity to be used for car production, and is continuously displayed in a plurality of variable displays.

Particularly, in the present embodiment, the unfinished vehicle 431 displayed in the tuning area 406 is a base object 432 which is drawn as a silhouette (overall image of the vehicle) simulating a rough outer shape of the vehicle (completed vehicle 441). , A detailed shape and color are drawn and fitted to the corresponding part with respect to the base object 432, "body front", "body rear", "door", "tire", and "engine & muffler". , And each of the part objects 433. That is, the base object 432 is visually recognized in the part that is not customized, and the part object 433 is visually recognized in the part that is already customized. In other words, the unfinished car 431 is masked on a part that has not been customized yet. Therefore, by checking the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406, it is possible to recognize at a glance that there is a site (customized item) that has not been customized (there is room for further customization). Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely understand how much the “car” that can be used for car production, etc. can be customized, and, by extension, seeing the entire customization function makes it relatively smooth to enjoy the customization function. Can be found. As a result, the customization function can be fully exerted, and the production using the "customizable car" can be fully enjoyed. Furthermore, by increasing interest in the customization function, it is possible to improve motivation to play the game.

In addition, since the unfinished car 431 that has been masked can effectively and clearly recognize that there is a part that has not been customized, a detailed explanation of the customization function will not be given carefully. I'm done. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the flow of the production becomes worse due to the explanation of the customization function (especially, a player who has already grasped the game takes unnecessary time), and the game progresses relatively smoothly. You can

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in order to clarify where the parts corresponding to each customization item are separated (where the boundary is) with respect to the base object 432 of the unfinished car 431, the customization items are Masking with different patterns (masks of different colors in this example) is applied to each corresponding part. Therefore, even if masking corresponding to a plurality of customization items is adjacent, it is difficult to determine whether the masking corresponds to one customization item or a plurality of customization items. It is possible to more surely avoid such a situation. Therefore, it is possible to set the masking area corresponding to the plurality of customization items relatively freely, and it is still customized by checking the mode of the unfinished car 431 (just by looking at the base object 432). It is possible to grasp at a glance how many remaining parts (customized items) exist (the number of items that have not been customized yet). Therefore, by more effectively deriving more information about the customization function, the player can make a decision about the customization function quickly and surely, and while fully advancing the game, fully enjoy the process of customization. can do.

Further, in the present embodiment, whether or not to reflect the part object 433 on the unfinished car 431 can be selected and determined by the player operating the effect button 125 and the cross button 126. Therefore, the player's individual game history and various settings (preferences) can be reflected in the customization of the unfinished car 431. Therefore, it is possible to prevent frustration such as customization not being as desired by the player while suppressing the customization function from becoming one pattern. As a result, the player can be more attached to the "car production" while diversifying the customization function, and the motivation for the game can be improved.

Further, when a plurality of completed cars 441 (up to two in this example) are displayed in the gallery area 407, the player selects the completed car 441 to be used for car production from the plurality of completed cars 441. can do.

In addition, the type of the specific effect is selected according to the type of the completed vehicle 441 (combination of customization patterns of each customization item) and the expected winning degree. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the combination of the completed object and the type of the specific effect greatly deviates from the expected winning degree.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, a difference is provided in the easiness of selection of the customization pattern of the part object 433, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the number of changes is the target number of times). If it is), it is configured so that a rare pattern can be easily selected. Therefore, by providing a state in which a rare customization pattern is easily added (first rare part high-accuracy state, second rare part high-accuracy state), the interest in the game at a different dimension from the factors related to increase or decrease in the game value. Can be held, and the opportunities for production can be increased. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling at the time of playing the game and improve the motivation for playing the game.

In particular, the number of executions (variation number) of the variable display of the decorative pattern on the decorative pattern display device 42 is the trigger for the state transition to the first rare parts high-accuracy state and the second rare parts high-accuracy state. This makes it easier for the player to recognize when the transition trigger comes. Therefore, for a player who wants to play a game in the first rare parts high-accuracy state and the second rare parts high-accuracy state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to start by using the number of times of variation as a guide, Make it easier to explain the phenomenon corresponding to the parts high accuracy state (why a rare customized pattern was selected, and the special production for the first rare parts high accuracy state and the second rare parts high accuracy state was set. It is possible to make it easier to understand the explanation of such effects in the case of being). Further, by advancing the game, the approach is surely approached toward the trigger of the state change, so that it is possible to add value to the advancing game.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the parts object 433 is determined (see steps S7105 to S7109 in FIG. 51), the holding area of the holding information storage area is referred to and displayed in the holding display area 405 (currently being displayed). It is configured not to select the same part object 433 as the part object 433 of the item reservation icon 416. Therefore, for example, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable when the same item holding icon 416 is continuously selected, and the customization function can be more fully enjoyed.

In particular, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the part objects 433 are duplicated, the customization pattern that is different in ease of selection depending on the state is not changed, but the customization item is changed. .. Therefore, for example, although the user stays in the first rare part high-accuracy state or the second rare part high-accuracy state, it is not selected in the first rare part high-accuracy state or the second rare part high-accuracy state, or , It is possible to avoid a situation where the customization pattern is changed (not rare) that is difficult to select. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the player is given a bad impression or an impression that an unfavorable operation is performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the QR code issued when ending the mobile linked game, information of the unfinished car 431 (unfinished customized storage area) and the completed car 441 completed in this mobile linked game. Information (information of the completed vehicle storage area) is included. By accessing the server with the mobile communication terminal that has read the QR code, various information included in the QR code is stored on the server side. Furthermore, when accessing the server in the case of performing the next mobile interlocking game, setting of whether to inherit the data of the previous unfinished car 431, and the gallery area 407 of the decorative pattern display device 42 at the start of the mobile interlocking game. The password including the setting information is issued by setting the selection of two of the completed vehicles 441 that have been completed up to now for the completed vehicle 441 displayed in FIG. By inputting the password to the pachinko machine 10, the unfinished car 431 displayed at the end of the previous game is displayed in the tuning area 406, and the completed car 441 selected by the player is displayed in the gallery area 407. Is displayed.

In this way, information about customization can be carried over to the next game (mobile interlocking game), so if the unfinished car 431 is not completed in one game, the effect of using the completed car 441 will be created. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing the situation where the player is overwhelmed during the current game, such as the structure that only the player can see the game. Therefore, the convenience can be improved, and the production using customized car objects can be made more diverse and deeper. In addition, it is possible to enjoy and accumulate customizations over many days without overdoing it with one game.

Further, since the customization function is effective only when the mobile linked game is being executed, it is possible to increase the motivation to participate in the mobile linked game.

Regarding the pachinko machines that can customize the costume of the character and various sound effects according to the points obtained by playing the mobile linked game, basically, various customizations can be made on the web page of the server. Settings are made, and various customization settings cannot be made on pachinko machines. For this reason, even if a new customization can be executed by the points obtained in the mobile-linked game this time, in order to reflect the customization, the mobile-linked game this time is terminated (the QR code is displayed. Then, a series of operations such as starting the mobile linked game again (inputting a password) is required.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by adopting a configuration in which the player can perform various settings relating to the customization of the “car used for car production” in the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to temporarily terminate the mobile interlocking game. Even the customization can be reflected. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the convenience of customization and make the customization function more enjoyable (easy to install).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the customization is completed and the completed car 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 is used for car production, the completed car 441 is deleted from the gallery area 407. There is. Further, when the unfinished vehicle 431 is completed in a state where two completed vehicles 441 are displayed in the gallery area 407, one of them is deleted. However, the information of the completed car 441 completed by the mobile-linked game this time (the information of the combination of the part objects 433 of the customization items that make up the completed car) is always stored in the completed car storage memory area and the mobile At the end of the interlocking game, a QR code including the storage memory information of the completed vehicle storage memory area is issued. Then, the information of the completed vehicle 441 is sent to the server via the mobile communication terminal and stored in the server (if the combination is the first time). For this reason, for example, it is possible to suppress the feeling of disappearance when the completed car 441, which is finally completed by customizing the unfinished car 431, is deleted due to the flow of the game, and further, the collection. You can add fun like collecting.

In addition, when the completed cars 441 are still being accumulated in the pachinko machine 10 without being erased, for example, the display mode of the decorative pattern display device 42 (gallery area 407) becomes messy, and the display process thereof is relatively difficult. It may take a long time to select a vehicle to be used for car production from the completed car 441, which may worsen the rhythm of production and may increase the storage capacity. However, such concerns can be dispelled by gradually erasing.

In the present embodiment, in the completed car selection screen for the player to select the completed car to be deleted from the three completed cars 441, for example, “(mobile interlocking) homepage (server) after the game ends You can check the completed objects that you got today by accessing the.In addition, in the next mobile linked game, you can select the completed object to use on the actual machine (game machine) from the completed objects that you have obtained, It can be used for staging, etc.” is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to clearly recognize how the erased completed car 441 is treated, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to concentrate on the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the customization function is exhibited only in the mobile interlocking game state, it is possible to improve the motivation to participate in the mobile interlocking game. Even in the non-mobile interlocking game state, the customized lottery is performed as in the mobile interlocked game state, and when the customized lottery is won, the suggestion effect (prefetch pending notice effect) is performed instead of the customization not performed. It is configured. Furthermore, when the pattern of the suggestive effect (the color of the jewel 414 of the normal hold icon 412) is determined, the value of the pattern random number counter used also in the determination of the customized pattern is acquired, and the determination is performed based on this value. .. Therefore, enjoyment such as suggestive effect (prefetch pending notice effect) can be given to the player who is not playing the mobile-linked game. Furthermore, by controlling the random number counter used for determining whether the control and pattern of the suggestive production are to be used together with the control relating to the customization of the mobile linked game and the random number counter used for determining the customization pattern, control is performed. Can be simplified and the storage area can be reduced.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the game balls enter the starting prize winning devices 33a and 33b, and the win/loss random number counter C1 or the like relating to win/loss lottery is stored in the special variation holding area, the starter is output from the main controller 261. When the sub-control device 262 receives the command and stores the information included in the advance command in the holding information storage area, the customization lottery is performed, and in the case of winning, the customization item and the customization pattern are selected. ing. Therefore, when the variable display is suspended, the contents of customization, that is, the item suspension icon 416 in which the parts object 433 is drawn is displayed in the suspension display area 405, and a customization chance is given, and It is possible to teach the player the contents of customization at that time. Therefore, for example, when the variable display is newly suspended when the variable display is already suspended, the step before the newly suspended variable display is executed, that is, rather than the variable display being suspended. It is possible to teach the content of customization given based on the newly suspended variable display while the previously suspended variable display is being performed. In this case, the player can deal with the instructed customization contents (preparation, operation, etc.) with a sufficient margin.

That is, for example, "the desired item object 433 item reservation icon 416 is displayed, so at the time of a customization opportunity in the corresponding variable display, perform an operation of reflecting the part object 433 on the unfinished vehicle 431." Or, "I have just customized the A pattern for the first customization item of the unfinished car 431, but in response to the two pending variable displays, the B pattern is added to the first and third customization items. It turns out that customization can be done, so stop the A pattern system and align with the B pattern system." Therefore, for example, when the player is requested to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation is not in time due to the short input period. In addition, with this configuration, it is not necessary to forcibly lengthen the variable time in order to secure an extra input period for the operation. Therefore, due to the long variable time, the progress of the game is delayed and the interest is reduced. It is possible to suppress the situation that causes

In this embodiment, the background color of the item reservation icon 416 and the masking color of the portion of the unfinished car 431 corresponding to each customization item correspond to the customization item. As a result, it is possible to easily understand where the part object 433 of the item holding icon 416 corresponds to the part of the unfinished car 431.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the contents described in the above embodiment, and may be carried out as follows, for example.

(A; Masking Pattern) In the above embodiment, the parts corresponding to the respective customization items of the base object 432 of the unfinished car 431 are color-coded, but the invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration, and By performing the masking, it is possible to identify that at least the unfinished car 431 has an unfinished part (a part corresponding to a customized item that has not been customized yet), and it is possible to determine where the unfinished part is. It only needs to be identifiable (except for how many unfinished parts there are). By doing this, it is possible to identify that the unfinished part is not the completed part by masking the unfinished part, and the customization is completed (becomes a completed object) by customizing until the unfinished part disappears. Can be identified.

Further, for example, as a mode of "masking",
1) A part or all of the unfinished part, or a range including at least a part of the unfinished part,
2) A pattern that is not added in the completed part (a pattern consisting of lines, faces, spaces, etc., for example, not only a pattern like wallpaper, but also a stamp (a pattern such as a face of a character or a character) is pressed. Such as, such as a state where there is only the frame of the unfinished part and there is a void),
Colors that will not be derived in the completed part (for example, different hues (for example, sepia tone), different colors (such as monotone tone, which has few types of hues), etc.), Or
Touch of unfinished part that is not derived in the completed part (how to draw lines; thickness, fineness (number of lines), roundness of edges, etc.), or
These combinations
3) Covering, shielding, overlapping (on the front side or the back side of the unfinished portion), composition, application, and reflection.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the masking patterns of all the customization items are different (not covered by one), but it is sufficient that the patterns are different from at least the adjacent masking areas. In addition, the masking may be performed without dividing each customization item (the base object 432 may be a single color and the border line may be removed) so that it can be seen that there is a part that has not been customized yet. Good. However, it is still customized by differentiating the masking patterns of adjacent masking areas, or in place of or in addition to them, by separating the masking areas from each other or by drawing a line on the boundary of the masking areas. It is possible to understand how many customization items there are not.

Furthermore, as in the above-described embodiment, by associating each customization item with a color, the color of the background 417 of the item reservation icon 416 displayed in the reservation display area 405 indicates the color of the item reservation icon 416. It is possible to make it easier to understand which part of the unfinished car 431 the part object 433 corresponds to. Even when the masking areas are separated from each other or a line is drawn on the boundary of the masking areas, the masking patterns of the adjacent masking areas are made different, so that the unfinished customization items can be completed more easily and quickly. It is possible to distinguish the number, type, etc.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, each area (masking area) partitioned corresponding to each customization item in the base object 432 of the unfinished car 431 is configured to be identifiable, but in addition to such a configuration, The boundary of each part object 433 may be identified even for the part to which the part object 433 has already been fitted (displayed). For example, the boundary line of each part object 433 may be left, or the pattern similar to the masking of the base object 432 may be added to each part object 433 while it is displayed on the unfinished car 431 (coloring is changed). May be performed).

In the above embodiment, for example, based on the player's operation of the effect button 125 or the cross button 126, the appearance pattern of the completed car 441 in the decorative pattern display device 42, when the completed car 441 is used for the vehicle effect, The feature (development of production that is easily selected) may be displayed (in a small window so that it can be compared with the unfinished car 431). Further, a display that suggests that such a feeling is obtained by customizing a predetermined part object 433 (for example, the part object 433 of the item hold icon 416 displayed in the hold display area 405) for the current unfinished car 431. May be derivable. Furthermore, when the parts object 433 is customized for the unfinished car 431, explanations about the parts object 433 (for example, "It is a sports car system" and "I am good at racing") are available (for example, balloons and It may be configured so that it is displayed (in the form of a telop). The display of these samples and explanations constitutes the display related to the unfinished object.

(B; Avoidance of Duplication of Parts Objects, Configuration of Customized Storage Area) In the above embodiment, when the parts object 433 is determined (see steps S7105 to S7109 of FIG. 51), the holding area of the holding information storage area is referred to and the holding is performed. Although it is configured not to select the same part object 433 as the part object 433 of the item holding icon 416 displayed in the display area 405, the configuration is not particularly limited to this. For example, instead of or in addition to such a configuration, the unfinished customized storage area may be referred to and the part object 433 may be changed when the same part object 433 exists. In this case, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the aspect of the part object 433 does not change even if it is customized. Further, in the above embodiment, the duplication of the part object 433 is avoided by changing the customization item, but the duplication of the part object 433 may be avoided by changing the customization pattern. .. Note that the part object 433 may be determined without considering any overlap.

In the above embodiment, the unfinished customized storage area or the completed customized storage area is configured to have a storage area capable of storing a customization pattern for each customization item. (For example, in the completed car 441, the “front body” and “rear body” are “decoration car system parts”, and the “door”, “tire”, and “engine & muffler” are “sports car”. In the case of "system parts" and "coloring" is "sporty", "F12B" may be stored in the corresponding completed customization storage area). However, considering the ease of inputting/outputting information for each customization item, it is preferable to store the information separately for each customization item.

(C; Mobile interlocking, simple pass, etc.) In the above embodiment, the mobile interlocking game cannot be played unless the password issued by the server is entered. A (temporary) mobile interlocking game may be configured to be performed by performing a (simpler) predetermined operation. In other words, although the game information up to the previous time by entering the password cannot be reflected in the game this time, the game information of this time is accumulated and stored in the pachinko machine 10 even if the password is not entered, or customization is performed. The function (how much can be used is set for each model) is made available, and the game information for this time is added to the game information stored and stored in the server, or the initial registration is performed. Along with this, the game information for this time may be stored in the server. However, in order to reflect the game information this time to the next game, issue a QR code when the game is finished, read it with a mobile communication terminal to access the server, and the first person should register for the first time. , Others need to make additional requests such as this game information.

The customizing function may be used only by playing the game normally (without entering the password or performing any other special operation). Further, in the non-mobile interlocking game state, it is not possible to use all the customization functions that can be performed in the mobile interlocking game state, but some of the customization functions can be used (for example, the player's discarding in the customization opportunity etc.). It may be configured such that selection is not possible, or the number of selectable customization patterns is small), or the customization function may be advertised. In addition, it is also possible to embody the present invention in a pachinko machine 10 that does not have the function itself of playing a mobile linked game.

Also, during the mobile interlocking game, the item hold icon 416 is displayed in the hold display area 405, and the part object 433 of the displayed item hold icon 416 can be reflected in the unfinished car 431 and the item hold icon 416 is displayed. Not, and the state in which the part object 433 is not reflected in the unfinished car 431 (state in which the tuning area 406 and the gallery area 407 are not displayed; the state similar to the non-mobile interlocking game state), It may be configured to be switchable by a player's operation on the way (for example, opening a corresponding screen from the main menu screen). Further, it may be configured such that detailed setting such as "display/not display item reservation icon 416", "display/not display unfinished car 431", "display/not display completed car 441", and the like can be performed. ..

In addition, regarding the customization function related to car production, even if the menu screen is opened and the setting of "apply/not apply" is not performed, the player does not perform the input operation indicating that the part object 433 is not adopted while the part selection screen is displayed. If the rejected input count counter is provided to count the number of times, the customized function cannot be automatically exerted on the pachinko machine 10 side when the rejected input count counter exceeds a certain number ( It may be configured to switch to a non-mobile linked game state). Of course, it is possible that adoption will continue to occur.Therefore, even if it is configured to require the player's selection input at the time of state switching, or even if it is once switched to a state where the customization function is not exhibited, the player's input It is possible to switch to the state where the customization function is activated based on the operation, and to return to the state following the state before switching to the state where the customization function is not activated (state where the customization function is activated immediately When it is returned to, the state may be the same as the state before switching to the state in which the customization function is not exerted (the same state as the hold display area 405, the tuning area 406, the gallery area 407, etc.).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the information of the completed car 441 completed in this mobile interlocking game and the information of the incomplete car 431 at the end of the mobile interlocking game are sent to the server via the mobile communication terminal. Although it is configured as described above, the information that can be handed over to the next mobile-linked game among the information regarding customization is set appropriately for each model. Further, the player may be configured to select the information of the completed car 441 to be sent to the server and the information of the completed car 441 that may not be sent (further, the upper limit is set to 30). Note that the configuration may not be able to inherit the information regarding customization. In addition, it may be configured such that the player can play a game using a completed car on the web page of the server.

In addition, in order to enhance the customization function, it is possible to increase the amount of information supplied from the server to the pachinko machine 10. However, in the configuration in which the password issued by the server is manually input to the pachinko machine 10. However, there is a concern that the amount of information will not increase so much, in addition to being time-consuming. On the other hand, the server also issues a two-dimensional code (QR code, etc.), and the two-dimensional code displayed on the display unit of the mobile communication terminal is read by the camera provided in the pachinko machine 10 and converted into a two-dimensional code. The included information may be reflected in the mobile linked game. In this case, a large amount of data can be easily input to the pachinko machine 10.

The mobile communication terminal may be configured to be able to play a game that succeeds the customization of the pachinko machine 10 that is performing the mobile-linked game. That is, when the mobile-linked game is registered for the first time, an application dedicated to the pachinko machine 10 is downloaded to the mobile communication terminal, and if the application is opened, the server can be easily accessed, and based on the data of the mobile-linked game. The game may be configured to be played.

Further, with respect to the two-dimensional code (QR code or the like) displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 at the end of the mobile linked game, together with the game machine identification information for identifying the pachinko machine 10, the main control device 261 (and the sub control device). The identification information including the management information 262) may also be included. In this case, by transmitting the information related to the mobile connection to the server via the Internet or the like, on the gaming machine manufacturer side, based on the identification information included in the information, is the pachinko machine 10 equipped with a proper board, etc.? Can be confirmed. That is, it is possible to discover an illegal act such as replacing the main control device 261 with a non-genuine one without directly checking the main control device 261 or the like at the place where the pachinko machine 10 is installed. Therefore, it is possible to increase the chances of checking for fraudulent activity and to detect fraudulent activity early. It should be noted that the pachinko machine 10 in which mobile interlocking games are frequently played is a popular model in many cases, and fraudulent acts such as replacing the main control device 261 are generally targeted to the popular model. In this respect, according to the above configuration, the more popular models are, the more frequently the main control device 261 and the like are checked, which is very effective as a countermeasure against fraud.

(D; Reflection of Parts Object, Display Period of Parts Selection Screen) In the above embodiment, selection of whether or not to reflect the parts object 433 displayed in the customization opportunity (display of parts selection screen) to the unfinished vehicle 431 is performed. Although it is configured to be performed by an input operation using the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 by the player, for example, the customization pattern that the player may reflect in the unfinished car 431 and the customization that should not be reflected. Patterns may be set in advance, and in the customization opportunity, selection of the part object 433 may be performed based on the setting information. Even in this case, it is possible to customize the player's preference, and it is possible for the player to be more attached to the effect using the customize function (customized car).

Further, such a setting can be performed by, for example, opening the setting screen from the main menu of the pachinko machine, or can be performed on the web page of the server, so that the password for the mobile interlocking game includes the scrap information. It may be configured to. Even if the pachinko machine 10 is configured to be able to switch between an automatic state in which the pachinko machine 10 automatically selects and discards the part object 433 and a manual state in which the player selects and discards the part object 433 based on the registered content in advance. Good. In addition, the player may not be allowed to make any selection.

Further, in the above embodiment, in the variable display of the decorative symbol in the decorative symbol display device 42, the high-speed variable period from the start of variation until the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 401 is stopped is displayed on the part selection screen ( Although the maximum) display period is set, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, when it is determined that a customization chance is given (a parts selection screen is displayed) corresponding to the variable display (variation information) at the start of the variable display, the start of the variable display is waited for. The variable display may be started when the selection screen is displayed and "Yes" or "No" is input, or when the maximum display period of the parts selection screen has elapsed. In addition, for example, when the variable display is started, if it is determined that a customization chance is given in the variable display, an extra time for displaying the parts selection screen is secured (the variable display time becomes long). It may be configured as follows. However, in the case of adopting these configurations, if the sub-control device 262 arbitrarily changes the variation time that is the start timing of the variation display, the variation display of the special display devices 43L and 43R is shifted, so that the main control Based on a predetermined determination of the device 261, it is determined whether or not the customization chance is given (the main control device 261 side performs a lottery as to whether or not the customization chance is given, and if the lottery is won, accordingly) The variable time may be set long). Note that, for example, the configuration may be such that the customization chance is generated only when the long variable display is selected (the customization chance is not generated when completely dislocated).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the customization chance is provided when the variable display corresponding to the variation information for which the customization opportunity is determined is started, but the customization opportunity is determined. It may be configured such that a customization chance may be given (for example, the part object 433 is reflected) (in response to an operation of the effect button 125 or the like) in a state in which the variation information is stored on hold.

(E; Determination of Parts Object) In the above embodiment, the type (customization item and customization pattern) of the parts object 433 of the customization chance is arbitrarily determined by the pachinko machine 10 side without considering the intention of the player. The type of the part object 433 may be determined according to the player's setting or operation. For example, as the correspondence pattern storage table for the low entry state, it is easy to select "sports car system, family car system, decoration car system" and "armored car system, 4WD car system, truck car system". In the case where the player has set up the pachinko machine 10 or the web page of the server, which system is preferred by the player (the setting on the server is a mobile linked game including such setting information). When the password is input to the pachinko machine 10), the corresponding pattern storage table included in the system in which it is easy to select the car of the preferred system may be configured to be referred to.

Further, for example, during the mobile-linked game, it is configured to count which type of part object 433 is reflected in the unfinished car 431 and which type of part object 433 is rejected in the customization opportunity. At the same time, by sending the count value to the server via the mobile communication terminal, it is possible to grasp which type of part object 433 is desired and which type of part object 433 is not desired on the server side. Based on such information, the password issued by the server may be configured to include information on which correspondence pattern storage table is referred to when determining the customization pattern.

When these configurations are adopted, the player's individual game history, various settings (preferences), etc. can be reflected in the customization of the unfinished car 431 (selection of the customization pattern by the customization selection means). Therefore, it is possible to prevent frustration such as customization not being as desired by the player while suppressing the customization function from becoming one pattern. As a result, the player can be more attached to the effect using the completed car 441 while diversifying the customization function, and the motivation for the game can be improved.

Furthermore, instead of conducting a lottery on whether or not to give an opportunity for a customized lottery, for example, every time a variable display is performed a prescribed number of times or when a predetermined condition is cleared in a mobile linked game, a customized lottery random number is given. The value of the counter may be acquired, and it may be determined based on the value whether or not the customization chance is given. In addition, the variable display is given a right for one customized lottery by being displayed a predetermined number of times, and the right for ten customized lottery is granted when a predetermined condition is cleared in the mobile interlocking game. Good.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, the number of the part objects 433 to be added is one for one variable display, but it is configured to add a plurality of part objects 433 in one variable display. Good. That is, in the above-described embodiment, when the customization items are divided into “front body”, “rear body”, “door”, “tire”, “engine & muffler” (“coloring”), and winning the customization lottery. Is configured to select the part object 433 of any one of the customization items. Item) may be selected and reflected at once in the customization opportunity (or selectively). In this case, the progress of customization is further suppressed and the performance is enhanced, and as a result, the interest can be improved. As the item reservation icon 416, the item reservation icon 416 in which a plurality of part objects 433 are attached to one background 417 is displayed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the sub-control device 262 performs the customized lottery at the time of receiving the advance command from the main control device 261, and determines the part object 433 (customized item and customization pattern) when it is won. Although the information about the parts object 433 is configured to be stored in the corresponding holding area of the holding information storage area, the customized lottery is performed when the variable display is started, not when the advance command is received, and the parts object 433 may be determined, or a customized lottery may be performed at the time of receiving the advance command, and the part object 433 may be determined when the variable display is started. However, in this case, it becomes impossible to display the item holding icon 416 in the holding display area 405. Therefore, in order to improve the performance and the convenience of customization, the customized lottery is performed when the advance command is received. It is desirable to configure and perform the part object 433.

Incidentally, when the advance command is received, the value of the item random number counter and the value of the pattern random number counter may be acquired together with the value of the customized random number random counter without winning the customized lottery. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 or the like in which the variable display is not held, the configuration relating to the customization of the above-described embodiment can be embodied as much as possible.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 side does not give a customization opportunity or unilaterally selects the customization item and the customization pattern, but selects the selection in accordance with an operation input by the player's effect button 125 or the like (also in the case. May be configured). For example, a customized lottery is performed when the variation information is stored in the suspension information storage area in a suspended manner, and when the variation information is won, a suspension icon 411 that causes smoke in the suspension display area 405 and an effect button 125 in the vicinity thereof. When a display indicating that the operation is performed is performed and the operation of the effect button 125 is performed, the values of the item random number counter and the pattern random number counter are acquired, and the customization item and the customization pattern are determined based on the values. The item holding icon 416 with the corresponding parts object 433 may be displayed so that smoke can be removed.

Further, for example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, a lottery is performed as to whether or not an opportunity for a customized lottery is given. When the display is performed and the effect button 125 is operated, the value of the customized lottery random number counter is acquired, and it may be determined whether or not the customization chance is given based on the value. .. Furthermore, the player may play the mini game by operating the effect button 125, the cross button 126, or the like, and a customization chance may be given when the mini game is successful. It should be noted that there may be a period in which a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to give an opportunity for the customized lottery, a period in which the lottery is not performed, and a period in which the winning probability of the lottery is high.

In addition, a method of acquiring the parts object 433 (a trigger for the customization lottery, a method for determining the customization item and the customization pattern, a determination timing, etc.) or a plurality of customization modes with different effects at the time of acquisition is set, and the mode is set at a predetermined trigger. It may be configured to migrate. For example, one of the customization modes may be selectable by the player's operation. When a new customization mode is selected, a predetermined condition is achieved in a mobile linked game (a specified number of customizations are performed in a predetermined customization mode, a mobile linked game given according to a game time, a variation count, etc.) The points may be configured to be required points, the target customization is completed, etc.).

As a method of acquiring the part object 433, for example, some part objects 433 may be displayed, and the player may select one or a plurality of them. Further, in order to obtain the selected part object 433, it may be configured such that a condition such as success in a mini game or the like needs to be achieved. Further, for example, as described above, the customized lottery or the lottery for determining the customized item and the customized pattern is performed based on the operation of the effect button 125, or the pattern or the like cannot be identified based on the operation of the effect button 125. The part object 433 displayed in the mode may be changed to a mode in which the pattern or the like can be identified.

In addition, when the parts object 433 of the item hold icon 416 displayed in the hold display area 405 is not preferable for the player, the player operates the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 to cause the item hold icon 416 to be displayed. The part object 433 may be given an opportunity to be changed (a customized re-lottery function for determining at least one of the customized item and the customized pattern by lottery again may be provided).

(F; Rare Parts High Accuracy) In the above embodiment, the first rare parts high accuracy state or the second rare parts high accuracy state (second pattern selection state) is switched according to the number of times of variable display. Although configured, in place of or in addition to such a configuration, a lottery (pattern high-probability lottery) is performed to determine whether to make the first rare parts highly accurate state or the second rare parts highly accurate state, You may comprise so that it may transfer to such a state when it wins. In this case, it is possible to always play the game while expecting a state change to the first rare parts high-accuracy state or the second rare parts high-accuracy state, and the first rare parts high-accuracy state or the second rare part. It is possible to perform an effect regarding the state change to the parts high accuracy state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotonous feeling during the game.

Further, in the above embodiment, the number of fluctuations after the end of the jackpot with jackpot is counted, and when the number of such fluctuations reaches the prescribed number, the rare parts are highly accurate.However, the jackpot with jackpot occurrence occurs. Not only when there is no payout but also when a big hit (special game state) or a small hit (fake in the special game state) occurs, the number of fluctuations that shifts to the first or second rare parts high-precision state is counted. The value of the sub-side variation counter may be reset. Further, apart from the sub-side fluctuation number counter, a counter is provided only for measuring the transition timing to the first rare parts high-accuracy state or the second rare parts high-accuracy state, and the value of the counter is set based on a predetermined trigger. It is also possible to perform a lottery (lottery for accelerating the transition timing) in which is changed to a side closer to the transition timing.

The first rare parts high-accuracy state, or the state transition lottery to the second rare parts high-accuracy state may be carried out every time the decorative display is changed, or another condition (digestion of the specified number of changes). , Occurrence of corresponding effects, etc.) is established. In addition, the first rare parts high-accuracy state or the second rare parts high-accuracy state may be ended after the specified number of fluctuations have been exhausted, or may be ended when a specified time has elapsed, or whether or not to end. You may finish by the lottery. Furthermore, it is possible to set a plurality of modes in which the winning probability of the pattern high-accuracy lottery changes.

In addition, a configuration is provided in which a plurality of corresponding pattern storage tables with different allocations are provided, and a switching lottery is performed to determine whether or not to switch the referenced corresponding pattern storage table. An order is set in the plurality of corresponding pattern storage tables. The corresponding pattern storage table to be referred to may be switched in order when the selection lottery is won. For example, there are five corresponding pattern storage tables, and a switching lottery is performed based on a predetermined trigger. By winning, the corresponding pattern storage table set one step up is referred to When the selection lottery is performed in a state where the corresponding pattern storage table set in is referred to, it is configured to shift to the state in which the corresponding pattern storage table set at the bottom is referred to. May be.

Further, a plurality of switching rotation speed storage tables for storing the number of times of variable display in which the corresponding pattern storage table to be referred to is switched are provided. It may be configured to be performed. Furthermore, when a specific condition is satisfied (for example, a specific number of fluctuations is exceeded, a specific lottery is won, etc.), a plurality of corresponding pattern storage tables are operated by the player's operation of the effect button 125 or the cross button 126. The corresponding pattern storage table referred to from among may be selectable.

Further, for example, when the big hit state, the small hit state, or the end of the time reduction mode (in a broad sense, based on the result of a predetermined lottery of the main control device 261), the first rare parts high-accuracy state, or It may be configured to shift to the second rare parts high-precision state. Especially when the jackpot that is not a probabilistic jackpot is won, when a jackpot without a ball is won, when the time reduction mode is finished, or when a jackpot is won In addition, by shifting to the first rare parts high-accuracy state or the second rare parts high-accuracy state, it is possible to reduce discouragement, a significant decrease in game motivation, and the like. In addition, by newly providing the first rare parts high-accuracy state or the second rare parts high-accuracy state in which the value is increased, it is possible to prolong the period during which the motivation for the game can be improved. In the case of being embodied in a rotary type gaming machine (slot machine), the rare parts high accuracy is confirmed for a predetermined number of games after the bonus game is over, the assist time is over, or the assist replay time is over. It may be in a state.

Further, for example, the number of times a predetermined effect is derived (one or more times), the game time (for example, the game time is recorded by using a real-time clock provided in the pachinko machine 10), the number of jackpots, and the mobile linking. The state may be shifted to the first rare parts high-accuracy state or the second rare parts high-accuracy state according to the points accumulated in the game, the predetermined mission clear, and the like. In addition, it may be configured to shift to the rare parts high-accuracy state when the one with a high expectation for a big hit state is out of the super reach production. The number of correspondence pattern storage tables and the contents thereof (distribution ratio and distribution destination) are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. For example, there may be only one corresponding pattern storage table, and the selection ratio of the customized pattern may not change in any state.

In addition, although not particularly mentioned in the above embodiment, in a predetermined display means such as the decorative pattern display device 42, the state is changed to the first or second rare parts high-accuracy state (second pattern selection state). It may be configured to display the remaining number of times of variable display up to. Furthermore, when the upper limit of the number of fluctuations is set for the period like the second rare parts high-accuracy state, the remaining fluctuation display number until the second rare parts high-accuracy state ends is displayed. You may comprise.

Further, in the decorative pattern display device 42, prior teaching such as what kind of state the rare parts high-accuracy state is, and what kind of conditions are satisfied to shift to the rare parts high-accuracy state, and the current rare parts state. It is also possible to omit the teaching that the high-accuracy state is in effect. However, by displaying a guide for teaching the player of the existence of the first rare parts high-accuracy state and the second rare parts high-accuracy state, the first rare parts high-accuracy state and the second rare parts high-accuracy state are displayed. Presence can be more actively appealed to the player. In the above embodiment, the function of performing the guidance display in the decorative symbol display device 42 for teaching the player of the existence of the first rare parts high accuracy state and the second rare parts high accuracy state is the pattern high accuracy teaching means. Make up.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, during the demonstration screen display, by operating the effect button 125 or the cross button 126, a display for instructing that the rare parts high-precision state is in effect is derived. Good. In this case, the opportunity for the pachinko machine 10 to be touched can be increased. Further, the demo screen display may be configured so that it is not known that the rare parts are in the high-accuracy state. In this case, the player who is interested in the customization can be made to perform the variable display even once in order to know whether or not the rare parts are in the highly accurate state.

(G; Highly Accurate Customization) In the above embodiment, in the customization lottery for whether or not to give a customization opportunity, the low entry state is easier to win than the high entry state, and in the variable display. Although it is configured that winning is easier when the reach occurs than when the reach does not occur, the present invention is not particularly limited to such a configuration. For example, like the above-mentioned first rare parts high-accuracy state, or the second rare parts high-accuracy state, depending on the number of times the decorative pattern changes, it is easy to win a customized lottery (customized high-accuracy state) The transfer may be performed, or a lottery (customized high-accuracy lottery) as to whether or not the customized high-accuracy state is set may be performed. In addition, by utilizing the configuration in which the winning probability of the customized lottery differs depending on the state, it is possible to have an interest in the game at a dimension different from the factor related to the increase or decrease of the game value, while suppressing the monotonous feeling during the game, It is possible to improve the willingness to play the game.

Incidentally, as a trigger for the state transition to the customized high accuracy state, it can be appropriately set for each model, as in the rare parts high accuracy state. For example, a lottery to decide whether or not to shift to the customized high-precision state is performed, or the state is shifted to the customized high-precision state according to the number of times a predetermined effect has been derived, the number of jackpots, the points accumulated in mobile-linked games, etc. Alternatively, after finishing the time reduction mode, after finishing the big hit state of “2RS”, and after finishing the small hit state, the state may be shifted to the customized high accuracy state. The winning probability of the customized lottery may not be changed.

(H; Customization Motif) In the above embodiment, “car” is adopted as the customization motif and the car production is performed using the customized car. However, the customization motif is different for each model. It can be set appropriately.

(H-1; puzzle) Next, an example of a specific effect performed using a customizable object will be described with reference to the example shown in FIGS. 65 and 66. In the tuning area 406 of the decorative pattern display device 42 shown in FIG. 65, an unfinished object 901 such as a puzzle composed of six pieces 902 is displayed. The unfinished object 901 in the initial state is in a state where the piece 902 without a pattern is fitted to the mount (or the state where the piece 902 is not fitted; see the lower part of the unfinished object 901 in FIG. 65). There is. However, similar to the above embodiment, in order to easily understand how many unfinished objects 901 have not been customized and where they are, a portion corresponding to a customization item (installation of 6 pieces). Area (specifically, upper left area, upper middle area, upper right area, lower left area, lower middle area, lower right area), each in a different manner (color or pattern) It is designed to be masked. Then, when all pieces are correctly applied, the completed object 905 is moved and displayed in the gallery area 407, and a new puzzle mount is displayed in the tuning area 406.

In the present mode example, there are "walking reach effect", "moving reach effect" and the like as the specific effects, and when the execution of the specific effects is determined, the player can determine the type of the specific effects. .. More specifically, in the tuning area 406, "track", "dog", etc. are set as the completed form of the unfinished object 901, the "track" corresponds to the "moving reach effect", and the "dog" is It is configured to correspond to "walking reach production". For example, when the unfinished object 901 is completed as a “track”, the track that has become the completed object 905 is moved and displayed in the gallery area 407. Up to two completed objects 905 can be displayed in the gallery area 407. When the third object is completed, the player selects one completed object 905 to be deleted from the three and deletes it. .. Further, when the execution of the specific effect is decided and the completed object 905 is displayed in the gallery area 407, the player selects one from the displayed completed objects 905. A selection input screen is displayed so that you can perform (without selection). Then, when the selection input of the completed object 905 is performed, the specific effect of the corresponding type is derived. That is, in the present mode example, the type of the specific effect can be customized.

Similar to the above-described embodiment, the piece 902 of the unfinished object 901 has its contents (corresponding to any of the 6 pieces as a customization item) in the hold icon 411 corresponding to when the customization opportunity is determined to be given. It is configured so as to be taught whether it is a part and which item corresponds to a specific effect as a customization pattern. Further, when a predetermined condition is satisfied (the mobile-linked game point reaches a specified point, etc.), the player may be allowed to select a desired mount.

In addition, the timing at which the mount of the unfinished object 901 is switched is not particularly limited, and may not be switched until it is completed, or even if it is not completed, based on a predetermined lottery, or The switching may be performed when a predetermined event occurs (a predetermined number of times) or based on an operation of a player (who has obtained a predetermined right). Further, when the mount of the unfinished object 901 is switched before all the pieces 902 are applied, the display indicating the type of the piece 902 in the hold icon 411 is also switched and displayed (the mount is When switching from “dog” to “truck”, the suggestion display of the piece 902 of the hold icon 411 may be switched from “part of dog” to “part of truck” display). Furthermore, when the mount of the unfinished object 901 is switched, the pieces 902 (the number of which) have already been fitted to the unfinished object 901 at that time are assumed to be installed pieces and are inherited after the switching ( The pattern may be changed to a corresponding one), and no matter how many pieces 902 are fitted to the unfinished object 901, if the mount changes, it must be collected again from the beginning (mobile interlocking game). It is possible to add a function that can avoid it as a part of the privilege).

Further, as the unfinished object 901, the same object may be derived over the jackpot state, an object changed according to the game mode may be derived, or a completely different object may be derived. Good. For example, the types of the mounts of the unfinished objects 901 that can be selected may be different between the “probability change stage” and the “pullback stage” and the “normal stage” and the “prediction stage”.

(H-2; Scratch) In the above embodiment, the selection ratio of the customization pattern is different or the winning probability of the customization lottery is different depending on the state. However, instead of such a configuration, or In addition, for example, the method of dividing the customization items (number, target site, boundary, etc.) may be changed depending on the state.

Here, the example of the aspect shown in FIGS. 67 and 68 will be described. In the tuning area 406, a card 911 such as an instant lottery card is displayed, and at first, masking 913 is applied to hide the object 912 (see FIG. 68) written on the card 911. The area of the masking 913 is usually divided into six areas as shown in FIG. 67, and when the coin-shaped hold icon 411 displayed in the hold display area 405 is erased when the corresponding variable display is started. , One of the areas of the masking 913 divided into six parts is shaved, and a part of the object 912 is exposed. Then, when all of them are exposed, the object 912 is moved and displayed in the gallery area 407 (the specific effect is the same as the above (h-1)). When the player makes a selection to change the card 911 by operating the effect button 125 or the like when starting the variable display corresponding to the card-type hold icon 411 displayed in the hold display area 405, the tuning area The card 911 of 406 is renewed (a masking area has not been removed at all, and it is in a state where it is impossible to know what object).

In addition, for example, when the prescribed condition is satisfied, for example, when it is determined that the number of fluctuation displays performed after the end of the jackpot with jackpot state is 200 to 230, 400 to 430, 600 to 630, 800 or more. 68, the masking area of the tuning area 406 is divided into four, as shown in FIG. That is, during this period, the entire object 912 in the tuning area 406 can be exposed relatively quickly. In addition, when the predetermined condition is satisfied (the mobile interlocking game point reaches the specified point, etc.), the masking area is exposed as in the case where the coin-shaped hold icon 411 is displayed in the hold display area 405. It may be configured to be able to. Furthermore, the masking area to be exposed may be selected from the plurality of masking areas when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(I; There are a plurality of customized motifs) Further, the customized motif is configured such that not only one but a plurality of motifs (base objects of a plurality of patterns) exist, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, It may be configured to shift to a state (customization mode) in which any of the motifs is customized. For example, in addition to the customization mode for completing a car, a customization mode for completing a ship or a customization mode for completing an airplane may be set.

Further, in the case of adopting the configuration, as in the above embodiment, the variable display (variation information) is suspended, the execution of the customization opportunity and the contents of customization are determined when the variable display is suspended, and the contents are suspended. In the configuration displayed as the item holding icon 416 in the display area 405, for example, the item holding icon 416 having the car part object 433 (customization object) is won in the customization lottery in the car customization mode and is displayed in the holding display area 405. It is conceivable that there is an opportunity to decide whether or not to change the customization mode before the variable display corresponding to the item reservation icon 416 is executed after the display. In this case, the unfinished object (base object) displayed in the tuning area 406 is different from the vehicle (ship or ship) while the item holding icon 416 having the car part object 433 is displayed in the holding display area 405. It is necessary to avoid the situation that it will be replaced by an airplane.

As a method thereof, for example, when the item hold icon 416 is displayed in the hold display area 405, the switching of the customization mode is postponed or the switching of the customization mode is determined until the state is canceled. For example, the number of pending variable displays may be confirmed, and the display timing of the unfinished object in the tuning area 406 may be switched to the timing at which the confirmed pending number is consumed. More specifically, the switching of the customization mode (base object) is determined and executed when the advance command is received from the main control device 261 and the variation information is stored, and the type of the customization object depends on the customization mode. The substantial switching of the base object may be configured such that the switching of the customization mode is performed at the timing when the variable display corresponding to the determined variable information is executed.

By adopting these configurations, when the change of the base object is determined, until the variable display corresponding to the pending icon 411 (item pending icon 416) as the already displayed suggestion information is consumed. The change of the base object is waited, and the hold icon 411 is derived from the hold icon 411 corresponding to the changed type of the base object. Therefore, in the configuration in which the customization pattern (part object 433) to be customized is displayed in advance, the base object is changed immediately before the desired customization pattern is displayed. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the part object 433 is also changed accordingly.

Further, regarding the item holding icon 416 corresponding to the variation information held after the customization mode is switched, the item holding icon 416 corresponding to the changed base object 432 is displayed. For this reason, the player can detect the change of the customization mode in advance, and when the change of the customization mode is associated with the jackpot expectation or the like, or the base object 432 is supposed to be changed, but it is not changed When performing the above, it is possible to improve the performance.

If the part object 433 corresponding to the changed base object is displayed as the suggestion information before the base object is changed, it is possible to know in advance that the base object will be changed. .. Using such a phenomenon, when the change of the base object and the expected degree of winning are associated with each other, or when the uncomfortable effect that the base object is supposed to be changed is not changed, the performance is improved. Can be planned.

(J; Proximity Detection Sensor) In the above embodiment, various selection inputs regarding customization are performed using the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 as the operating means, but instead of or in addition to this, another An input means may be adopted. For example, it is possible to detect the proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of points of the decorative pattern display device 42 as a variable display means that displays various announcements regarding the customization function, and is connected to the input/output port 554 of the sub control device 262. Proximity detection means may be provided. For example, proximity to the variable display device unit 35 and the center frame 47 as proximity detection means having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion capable of detecting an object (a player's hand or the like) in front of the decorative symbol display device 42. It is also possible to provide three sets of detection sensors (for example, infrared sensors, etc.) so as to correspond to the left symbol display area, the middle symbol display area, and the right symbol display area, respectively. Further, for example, a touch panel as an approach detection unit may be provided on the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 42.

That is, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 can perform customization, and the player can make various selection decisions regarding customization. Further, such a selection decision is configured so that it can be performed only within a part of the variable display of the decorative pattern, and there is not much time margin. Therefore, within the time limit, the user can read and understand the explanation displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42, select an appropriate option from the options, and operate the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 to make a selection decision. Is a relatively difficult operation for a player who is not accustomed to the operation of determining various selections regarding customization.

In this respect, the decorative pattern display device 42 on which the description, choices, objects to be customized, etc. relating to customization are directly touched (intuitively) so that the input operation can be performed (for example, the configuration). , The corresponding input is made just by touching the place where the predetermined option is displayed), so that the operation can be made very easy to understand. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation from being confused and timed out, and to prevent the game tempo from becoming worse by setting a relatively long time for such operation.

In the decorative pattern display device 42, when displaying options for requesting selection regarding customization, the player's hand close to or abutting the display position of the options so as to confirm the intention to select each option. It is desirable that each of the holding icons 411 (in this example, in the present example, be configured to be capable of performing various operations on the holding icon 411 in the holding display area 405). It is desirable that the player's hands that are close to or in contact with the four display areas can be detected. Further, it is desirable that each player's hand that is close to or in contact with the display position of each completed car 441 in the gallery area 407 can be detected.

(K; real-time custom, dog motif) In the above-described embodiment, in the normal stage and the precursor stage, as the game progresses (variable display is sequentially executed), the unfinished car 431 is customized, and “car production” is performed. When the derivation of is determined, when the completed vehicle 441 is displayed in the gallery area 407, the completed vehicle 441 can be made to appear in the car effect. In other words, the customization work and the specific effect using the customized object (the car effect using the customized car as the result of the customization) are configured to be performed separately. However, the configuration is not limited thereto.

Hereinafter, an aspect example (a configuration in which customization proceeds in real time while a specific effect using a customizable object is performed) will be described with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. In addition, in the present mode example, in addition to the effect button 125 and the cross button 126, the proximity detection sensor 921 capable of separately detecting the approach of the object to the left part, the middle part, and the right part of the decorative pattern display device 42, and the effect button. A button proximity detection sensor (not shown) that detects the proximity of an object above 125 is provided.

In the example of the present aspect, by using the effect button 125, the proximity detection sensor 921, the button proximity detection sensor, and the like, "contact interaction effect" as if the user can enjoy the touch with the "dog" displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42. It is supposed to be done. On the decorative design display device 42 during the contact effect, "Dog 931" as a main object that performs various actions is displayed mainly in the center of the screen, the operation explanation during the contact effect is displayed on the upper right of the screen, and the lower right of the screen. Displays a "dog mannequin 932" as a sub-object in a simplified (like a silhouette) form of "dog 931" in the center of the screen. These "dog 931" and "dog mannequin 932" are basically continuously displayed over a plurality of variable displays only during the "contact production" period.

It should be noted that the "dog 931" is displayed to perform various actions, and as shown in the upper right part of FIG. 69, the production button 125 is pressed, the decorative symbol display device 42 is touched (a hand etc. Is displayed), and the action is performed (reaction) according to an operation such as holding the hand above the effect button 125 (making the button proximity detection sensor detect the hand or the like). On the other hand, the “dog mannequin 932” is displayed in a stopped state. The direction of the “dog mannequin 932” may be changed by operating the cross button 126.

"Dog 931" is "item" for "head", "face", "neck-upper body", "lower body-tail", and "feet" from the state of not wearing anything (state of FIG. 69). ”Can be added (customized). Further, a plurality of patterns of items 933 can be attached to each of the “head”, “face”, “neck to upper body”, “lower body to tail”, and “leg”. In the present embodiment, the “dog 931” in a state where nothing is worn corresponds to the base object of the main object, and the “item 933” worn by the “dog 931” corresponds to the customized object of the main object.

The “dog mannequin 932” is similar to the “dog 931” in that the “head”, “face”, “neck-upper body”, “lower body-tail”, and “feet” are changed from the state of not wearing anything on the body. The “item 933” can be added (customized). Further, the “dog mannequin 932” in a state where nothing is worn corresponds to the base object of the sub-object, and the “item 933” worn by the “dog mannequin 932” corresponds to the customized object of the sub-object. By the way, the "Dog 931" is in a completed state even when nothing is worn on the body, whereas the "Dog Mannequin 932" that teaches the situation of customization is not completed when nothing is worn on the body. Can be said. Therefore, for example, “dog mannequin 932” in a state where nothing is worn is an unfinished object, whereas “dog 931” in a state where nothing is worn is not an unfinished object. Further, in this example of the aspect, “dog 931” constitutes a display related to the unfinished object.

Regarding the “item 933”, when the sub-control device 162 receives the advance command from the main control device 261 during the “contact production” period and stores the variation information in the holding information storage area, the “item 933” is derived. If a lottery of whether or not to draw out is determined and a derivation is decided, a lottery of which part (customized item) and pattern (customized pattern) of the item 933 to be derived is performed, and based on the lottery. “Item 933” is displayed as a hold icon 411 (item hold icon 416) in the lower left part of the decorative pattern display device 42 (hold display area 405). Then, when the variable display corresponding to the item holding icon 416 is started, a display of whether or not the “item 933” displayed in the item holding icon 416 is reflected in the “dog 931” in the variable display, etc. When the selection and decision input to the effect is made by the player's operation of the effect button 125 or the cross button 126, the “item 933” is applied to both “dog 931” and “dog mannequin 932”. To reflect.

In addition, in the present mode example, with respect to the “dog mannequin 932”, among the “head”, “face”, “neck to upper body”, “lower body to tail”, and “feet”, the “item 933” is not yet attached ( The masking 935 is applied to (the range including) the portion that is not customized. The masking 935 of the present mode example is provided in a range slightly wider than the site so as to include the site to which the “item 933” is not yet added in order to make the target site easy to understand. The masking 935 set for each part (for each customization item) has a different color. On the other hand, the main object "dog 931" is not masked.

As described above, according to this aspect example, by confirming the “dog mannequin 932” that is being customized in the same manner (at the same time) as the “dog 931” in the “contact production”, the “dog 931” is confirmed. It is possible to clearly understand that there are parts that have not been customized yet. On the other hand, the masking 935 is not applied to the "dog 931". Therefore, for example, "Dog 931" is displayed even when all parts (customized items) are not customized yet, and only "Dog 931" is displayed regardless of whether or not "Item 933" is added. However, in a configuration that can entertain the player sufficiently, avoiding a situation in which the design property is deteriorated and the interest is decreased due to the masking of the "dog 931". At the same time, the progress of customization of the "dog 931" can be surely grasped.

The input operation for changing the mode of the "dog 931" and the selection input operation for reflecting the item 933 on the "dog 931" and the "dog mannequin 932" at the time of customization are configured to be different. Is desirable. For example, to change the mode of "dog 931", the production button 125 is pressed, the decorative pattern display device 42 is touched (the proximity detection sensor 921 detects a hand or the like), and the hand is placed above the production button 125 (button). While the proximity detection sensor detects a hand etc.), the selection input operation related to customization is performed by first performing the input operation on the cross button 126 and then the effect button 125. To do. In this case, when the operation related to the change of the mode of "dog 931" is being performed and the operation input related to customization is switched to, the unintentional selection input operation related to customization is not forcefully performed. be able to.

The "base object" is not limited to the "dog 931", and a character such as a person, an animal, or an anthropomorphic object is adopted for each model, and the "customized object" is used as a character costume, Tools, vehicles, backgrounds, etc. used by the character may be adopted. Furthermore, as a "base object", a vehicle used by a predetermined character, a vehicle such as an airplane, a base of an object (cake, weapon, etc.) produced by the character, a background such as a living space or a zoo, is adopted, and a "customized object". As such, components such as vehicles and weapons, decorations, various objects installed in the background, and the like may be adopted. In addition, if a touch panel is adopted in the decorative pattern display device 42, the operation of "contact time" can be made easier to understand, more easily, and more versatile.

Although the sub-object (dog mannequin 932) of the present mode example is a mode in which the main object (dog 931) is simplified, it is not particularly limited to such a configuration and has not been customized yet. It is only necessary to be able to teach a part (customized item). For example, in the tuning area 406, items such as tags associated with each customization item are displayed, and the customization pattern is written on the tag corresponding to the customized part, and the part that is not customized is displayed. The tag corresponding to may be configured without any description. However, by setting the mode of the sub-objects to a mode close to the main object (a mode in which the main object is simplified, etc.), the correspondence relationship between the sub-objects and the main object becomes clearer, and the player customization It can help understanding and operation.

In the example of the present aspect and the above-described embodiment, the character to be customized is configured to be displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 in which the variable display of the decorative pattern is performed, but the character is customized on another display device. The character (one or both of the main object and the sub-key object) in which is performed may be displayed.

(L; Gallery Area, Upper Limit, Definition of Completion) In the above-described embodiment, when the completed car 441 is once used for car production, it is erased from the gallery area 407, but it is particularly limited to such a configuration. Not a thing. For example, by increasing the number of completed cars 441 that can be displayed in the gallery area 407 (they may not be displayed at once, but may be selectively displayed by scrolling or the like), and used for car production. However, it may be configured not to be erased, or the upper limit of the number of times of use may be set to a plurality of times. In the above embodiment, the completed combination vehicle 441 that is completed once by performing the mobile interlocking game is always accumulated and stored in the server, and among the completed vehicles 441 that are accumulated and stored in the next game. Although the completed car 441 selected from the above can be displayed in the gallery area 407 of the decorative pattern display device 42, an additional condition for returning the completed car 441 to the pachinko machine 10 side may be provided. However, it is possible to omit the configuration itself in which the completed vehicle 441 can be returned.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when all the customization items of the unfinished car 431 are customized, they are unconditionally treated as the completed car 441 and are displayed in the gallery area 407. When all the customization items of the unfinished car 431 have been customized, the player operates the effect button 125 and the cross button 126 to input that the customization of the unfinished car 431 is finished (the car When the input indicating the consent to the transition display to the gallery area 407 is performed), the unfinished vehicle 431 may be displayed as the completed vehicle 441 in the gallery area 407.

In this case, you can thoroughly enjoy the customization so that you can personalize it. In addition, when the unfinished car 431 is completed when the gallery area 407 is full, but you do not want to delete any of them, you can wait for the transition display to the gallery area 407 until the car production is performed. It is possible to improve convenience. When the configuration is adopted, the completed unfinished vehicle 431 is not displayed in the completed vehicle storage area but is displayed at the stage where the completed unfinished vehicle 431 is displayed in the gallery area 407. Information about the car 431 is stored.

Further, in the above embodiment, the completed vehicle 441 displayed in the gallery area 407 is returned to the tuning area 406 based on a predetermined operation input by the player (for example, the unfinished vehicle 431 in the tuning area 406 is replaced. ), so that customization can be performed again. By the way, in this case, in the gallery area 407, not only the completed car 441 but also the unfinished car 431 (the car having the customization items that have not been customized) may be displayed. In this case, it is possible to complete a car with more attention. The timing at which the completed vehicle 441 in the gallery area 407 can be returned to the tuning area 406 is not particularly limited. For example, the item reservation icon 416 of the desired part object 433 in the reservation display area 405 is newly displayed. If the completed vehicle 441 in the gallery area 407 can be returned to the tuning area 406 when displayed, convenience and the like can be improved.

In the case where a complicated operation can be executed, the player can directly touch the selection items displayed on the decorative pattern display device 42 or bring his/her finger or the like into the operation input. It is desirable to configure so that it can be performed. In this case, since the operation input is intuitive, the input is easy to understand, and the time required for the input can be shortened, and the input cannot be performed within the time limit, or the time limit can be set longer. As a result, it is possible to avoid a problem such as a decrease in playability.

(M; pending change) In the above embodiment, basically (except for the case where the second variable display is replaced by the first variable display in priority relationship), it is displayed in the pending display area 405 of the decorative symbol display device 42. The mode of the hold icon 411 as the suggestion information is configured not to change midway, but may be configured to change in some cases.

For example, in the variation display corresponding to the variation information that has already been suspended, based on the result of the customized lottery performed for the suspension area of the suspension information storage area in response to the variation information that was suspended later ( It is possible to give a customization chance or change the part object 433 of the item holding icon 416 corresponding to the variation information that has already been held and is decided to be given a customization chance. You may comprise. In this case, since the item hold icon 416 may change the mode before the corresponding variable display is executed even after the item hold icon 416 is once displayed in the predetermined mode, the jackpot suggested by the mode change of the hold icon 411. It is possible to diversify the production, such as the step-up of the occurrence expectation of the state.

Further, for example, in addition to the fluctuation information newly stored in the fluctuation information storage area, if the fluctuation information is already stored in the fluctuation information storage area (the fluctuation display is suspended), the fluctuation The customization chance corresponding to the execution determined in accordance with the information may be configured to be executable in the variable display corresponding to the already stored variation information. In other words, in the variable display where there is a high expectation for the occurrence of a big hit state and super reach production such as "car production" that is performed in a relatively long time is performed, production related to customization is also derived (part selection screen display, completion When the time to display the car selection screen etc. is secured), the time that can be secured for the effect (super reach effect, etc.) for teaching whether or not the big hit state occurs, or the variable time There is concern that the production balance may become unbalanced due to too long.

In this respect, a customization opportunity to be executed based on the change information of the subsequent variable display in the variable display before the variable display after the specific effect such as the super reach effect is performed. By executing the above, it is possible to perform a particular effect (car effect, etc.) such as a super reach effect in the subsequent variable display with a comparatively large margin, and the effect related to customization in the previous variable display. Can be done with relative margin. Further, by providing the customization chance, it is possible to increase the expectation that an effect with a high expectation of winning the jackpot state may be derived in the subsequent variable display. In particular, by applying the above-mentioned configuration in a state in which the variable display time (variation time) of the decorative pattern is set to be relatively short (time reduction state), such an action and effect can be more remarkably exhibited. ..

In addition, in general, the first variation display that is performed with four or three or more first variation displays that are performed based on a ball entering the first variable winning device 33a has a variation time Set short. Therefore, in such a variation display in which the variation time is set to be short, even if the customization opportunity is determined to be performed, the customization opportunity is not given (the part selection screen is not displayed) and the variation is not performed. In the variable display that is performed before or after the display, the customization chance may be provided for that amount. Furthermore, when the customization opportunity is determined to be assigned even in the variable display for shifting the customization opportunity, either one of the customization opportunities is deleted, or the customization that was determined to be assigned in the transition destination variable display is performed. The chance may be changed to another variable display.

It should be noted that the change of the item holding icon 416 is not limited to the configuration of “retrofitting” and may be determined in advance. That is, for example, when determining the customization item and the customization pattern performed when the variation information is stored in the suspension information storage area, it may be configured to also determine whether to change the item suspension icon 416. Good (the item hold icon 416 in the initial form, the item hold icon 416 in the final form (at the start of fluctuation), and the item hold icon 416 when a change in between is determined).

Furthermore, whether or not to allow the change of the mode of the item hold icon 416 displayed in the hold display area 405 is determined based on the player's operation input to the effect button 125, the cross button 126, or the like. You may comprise. In other words, for a player who desires the appearance of the part object 433 attached to the item holding icon 416 before changing the mode, the item holding icon 416 changes mode (changes to another part object 433). By doing so, there is a risk that the interest will be reduced. In this regard, by configuring so that it is possible to determine whether or not to change the mode of the hold icon 411 by an operation input by the player, the above-mentioned inconvenience can be avoided, and customization is advanced while suppressing the occurrence of stress. You can go.

It should be noted that the player may operate the production button 125 or the like to change the item holding icon 416 (re-lottery, shift in a predetermined order, or change as the player intends). Good. Further, the right to change may be obtained when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, when the customization opportunity is determined to be assigned, the part object 433 that has acquired the right to be granted at the customization opportunity is displayed in the corresponding hold icon 411 (the item hold icon 416 is displayed). Although it is configured to be displayed), the present invention is not limited to such a configuration, and the variable display corresponding to the normal hold icon 412 may be configured so that a customization chance may occur. As a mode of the item holding icon 416, it may be configured such that the giving of the customization opportunity is taught but the type of the part object 433 is not taught, or the background 417 may be omitted. The item hold icon 416 itself may be omitted (the normal hold icon 412 only may be used).

Further, the provision of the customization opportunity may be configured to be taught by a method different from the item holding icon 416. For example, a display device may be provided separately from the decorative pattern display device 42 to display the display device, a movable accessory, or a lamp or a signboard associated with each customized item. It may be that. However, by displaying the item hold icon 416 in the hold display area 405, it is possible to give a customization opportunity and teach the type of the part object 433 in advance in an easy-to-understand manner, and further improve the performance of the customization function. it can.

If the customization chance is decided in the customization lottery performed when the information is stored in the holding area of the holding information storage area, the customization chance corresponding to that is not the variable display of the corresponding variation information, and It may be configured to be added when the variable display of. For example, in the decorative pattern display device 42, a customized display area for customization is provided in addition to the hold icon 411 of the hold display area 405, and information regarding customization of eight variable displays (twice the maximum number of variable displays). A customization pending storage area is provided in which (presence/absence of customization opportunity, customization item and customization pattern) can be stored. Further, the customization pending storage area always stores at least four pieces of information regarding customization, and the fluctuation information is not reserved at all in the pending information storage area, and the fluctuation display is not performed. Even if the information is stored in the pending information storage area, the customization chance that is decided to be given when the variation information is stored is given when the variation display is performed four times (without the variation display). Will be done. Therefore, for example, the game ball on hand and the variable display are no longer held, but if the variable display is performed twice more, the desired part object 433 can be obtained, so continue playing the game a little more, etc. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation for playing the game.

(N; continuous notice of suspension) Further, it may be configured such that a customization chance can be given to a plurality of variable displays based on winning in one customization lottery. Further, the customization pattern of the customization chance in the subsequent variable display may be forcibly matched so that the customization pattern of the customization opportunity in the previous variable display can be changed. By adopting these configurations, it becomes possible to perform mutually related continuous effects (so-called continuous notice) over a plurality of variable displays by utilizing the mode of the item reservation icon 416 in the reserved display area 405.

For example, when a start command is received, a holding continuous notice lottery (whether a big jackpot change or a part of front and rear change is won) is performed to determine whether or not to give a continuous holding notice in the hold display area 405. If the winning continuation notice is selected, the type of the pending continuous notice is determined, and the execution and the contents of the customization chance are stored corresponding to the variation information of the targeted holding area. More specifically, for example, in a state where the hold information is stored in the first to third hold areas of the hold information storage area, when the advance command is received and the variation information is stored in the fourth hold area, it is performed. If you win in the holding continuous notice lottery and the sports car holding consecutive notice is selected, the customization chance flags of the first holding area to the fourth holding area of the holding information storage area are turned on and the first holding is performed. Information of "front body parts of sports car" is stored in the hold icon storage area of the area, information of "rear body parts of sports car" is stored in the hold icon storage area of the second hold area, and hold of the third hold area Information of "sports car door parts" is stored in the icon storage area, and information of "sports car tires and sports car engine & muffler" is stored in the holding storage area of the fourth holding area.

As a result, in the hold display area 405, information capable of completing a sports car system car is displayed, and the parts object 433 is reflected in the unfinished car 431 by the customization chance in all the variable displays. If the selection is made, a complete car 441 can be obtained that is made up of sports car system parts. In this case, depending on the mode of the hold display area 405, the game can be made more exciting. Moreover, it is possible to make a suggestion in the stage before the corresponding variable display is performed. You will be able to enjoy new productions that are different from the conventional continuous notice that you can not understand unless you know it.

In the present mode example, even if the parts object 433 is attached to all the customization items of the unfinished car 431 in the tuning area 406 (which forms the body of the completed car 441), the player's effect button 125 and the like. It is configured so that the transition display is not performed unless the input for permitting the transition display to the gallery area 407 by the operation is confirmed. Further, in the case of four variable display suspensions, three cases, two cases, one case, a random number counter used in deciding which suspension is to be provided with a customization chance (multiple selections are possible and no selection is possible) Also, a table may be provided, and when the advance command is received, the table may be selected based on the number of holdings and the variation contents (whether or not to hit big or small or whether to reach out of front or rear). ..

In the case of adopting the above-mentioned configuration, a variation display corresponding to the variation information (stored in the fourth holding area in the above example) for which it is decided to give the continuous holding notice as an effect to close the continuous holding notice. It is desirable to configure so that the car production is performed in. That is, for example, when the advance command is received from the main control device 261, a lottery for whether or not to execute the “car production” is also performed, and it is determined that both the customization setting and the vehicle production are performed. In this case, it is determined whether or not there is one or more pending fluctuation information other than the fluctuation information. When it is judged that there is the fluctuation information, a customization chance is given corresponding to the pending fluctuation information. It may be configured to determine whether or not it is performed, and if the determination is negative, a customization chance may be added to the pending change information. On the other hand, when there is no hold, or when a customization chance is given in correspondence with the held variation information, it is possible to not set the post-installation customization.

Further, it is desirable that the super-reach effect such as a car effect is not derived in a variable display other than the final variable display that constitutes the pending continuous notice. Further, it is possible to change the mode of the item holding icon 416 when the variable display is performed. As a result, for example, by displaying the mode of the continuous notice of the hold in the hold display area 405, the future development can be completely read (unexpectedness disappears) and the interest is lowered. It can be avoided.

(O; Setting of car effect) In the above embodiment, when deciding whether or not to perform a car effect at the time of starting the variable display of the decorative pattern, it is the normal stage or the precursor stage, and the variable display is customized. It is configured to determine whether or not a chance is given, and if the determination is affirmative, the vehicle effect is not performed (step S7604; YES), but the configuration is not limited to this. For example, when the sub control device 262 receives the advance command, it is determined whether or not the vehicle effect is performed, or it is determined whether or not the vehicle effect is the variation information that is likely to be selected when the variation is started. Then, it may be configured such that the customization chance is not provided if the variation information is such that the car production is performed or is likely to be performed. Also in this case, in a configuration that allows the player to select customization, and also in a configuration that suggests the degree of expectation for the occurrence of a jackpot state, etc., in combination with the type of car effect and the type of completed vehicle 441, When the completed car 441 is changed by the player's operation in the variable display after the type of the car effect is determined by the pachinko machine 10 at the start of the variable display, the accuracy of the winning expectation is lowered. The situation can be prevented.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the type of the “car production” is determined based on the type of the completed vehicle 441 used (may be used) for the vehicle production and the result of the variable display (vehicle production). However, if the type of "car production" is determined first and "car production" is "successful", the variation display in which "car production" is performed or the variation held before that is displayed. When displaying, a part object 433 that tends to be advantageous to the determined type of “car effect” (increases expectation of jackpot) may be added. It should be noted that the configuration of associating the type of the completed vehicle 441 with the type of "vehicle effect" and suggesting the expectation of occurrence of the jackpot state may be omitted.

(P; priority order of hold change, hold icon) In the above-described embodiment, a game ball enters the second start winning device 33b rather than a variable display based on the game ball entering the first starting prize device 33a. It is configured that the variable display based on the priority is executed with priority. Which of the first start prize winning device 33a and the second start prize winning device 33b is the variable display based on the ball entering? Regardless, the variable display may be configured to be exhausted in the order in which the display is suspended. In the above embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 42 does not teach which of the first start winning device 33a and the second starting prize device 33b is the variable display based on the entered ball (only the holding icon 411 is visually recognized). However, it may be configured so that it can be recognized which variable display corresponds to which.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, even when five or more variable displays of the special display devices 43L and 43R are suspended in total, the decorative symbol display device 42 displays only up to four suspended icons 411. However, the same number of hold icons 411 as the variable display of the special display devices 43L and 43R may be displayed. Further, in the case where the hold icon 411 can be displayed by the same number as the upper limit of the variable display hold number (eight in the above example), in order to reduce the display space of the hold icon 411 (hold display area 405), It may be configured to be displayed smaller than the four hold icons 411 that are consumed first and smaller than the four hold icons 411 that are consumed later. In addition, the four hold icons that will be consumed later will be in a simplified form such that the number of holds can be grasped or the hue similar to that of the normal hold icon 412 is applied. You may comprise.

(Q) In the above embodiment, the jackpot probability, the number of jackpot types, the opening/closing pattern of the variable winning devices 32a, 32b of each jackpot type, etc. are not particularly limited, and can be appropriately set for each model. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the winning probability in the winning/winning lottery is changed, but the winning probability does not change (is constant), and the period of high-income state (variation) given after the jackpot state ends. The above configuration may be applied to a pachinko machine in which a plurality of patterns are prepared for the number of times.

Further, in the above embodiment, the number and arrangement of the starting winning devices 33a and 33b, the variable winning devices 32a and 32b, the through gate 34 are not particularly limited, and can be set for each model. Further, in the above-described embodiment, the winning/winning lottery performed when the game ball enters the first starting prize device 33a and the winning/winning lottery performed when the game ball enters the second starting prize device 33b are different. The table is referred to and the distribution of jackpot types is changed, but the same may be applied.

(R) In the above-described embodiment, the second starting prize winning device 33b is held after the variation display (first variation displaying) based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting winning prize device 33a which is already held. The variable display (second variable display) based on the entry of the game ball is completed before the first variable display, and the second variable display is prioritized so that the suspended order is changed. However, it may be configured to be digested in the suspended order regardless of whether it is the first variation display or the second variation display.

(S) In the above embodiment, the main controller 261 performs the main process (see FIG. 9) and then the normal process (see FIG. 10). However, the configuration is not limited to such a configuration. is not. For example, after the step S111 of the main process, the process of updating the counter value, which is performed in steps S210 to S219 of the normal process in the above-described embodiment, is performed, and, for example, in the timer interrupt process performed every 2 msec, The processing performed in steps S201 to S209 of the normal processing in the embodiment and the processing in step S401 performed as the NMI interrupt processing in the above embodiment may be performed. As the processing of step S401 in this case, for example, it is determined whether or not the power failure signal SK1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501, and when the output of the power failure signal SK1 is confirmed, the power failure occurs. There is a configuration in which a flag indicating occurrence of is turned on. Further, the processing of step S401 may be performed separately as NMI interrupt processing, as in the above embodiment.

(T) In the above-described embodiment, the information on whether or not the jackpot state is generated is overwritten in the hit/random number storage area that stores the value of the hit/nozzle random number counter C1. It is not limited to. For example, a storage area for storing information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs may be provided separately from the winning random number storage area for the execution area of the special variation holding area and each holding area. In addition to the area, a storage area corresponding to each of the execution areas of the special variation suspension area and each suspension area may be provided to store information on whether or not a jackpot state occurs in the storage area. A storage area for storing the jackpot type may be provided separately from the winning type random number storage area for storing the value of the type determination counter C2, or a reach random number storage area for storing the value of the variation selection counter C3. Separately, a storage area for storing reach information may be provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol is started, whether or not the value of the winning/discarding random number counter C1 is the value corresponding to the winning is checked again, and the process according to the checking process is performed. You may comprise.

(U) You may implement as a pachinko machine of a type different from the said embodiment. For example, movable means that can be changed to a specific area in which a game ball moving in the game area can enter, an open state that allows the player to enter the specific area, and a closed state that prohibits the player to enter the specific area ( Detecting the game ball that entered the specific ball entering means, the specific ball entering means and the non-specific ball entering means in which the game ball entering the specific area can enter Specific entrance detecting means (condition establishment detecting means), special starting means provided outside the specific area and capable of entering a game ball moving in the game area, and detecting a game ball entering the special starting means The special starting detection means and the main control means for controlling the opening and closing of the variable ball entering means are provided, and when the game ball enters the specific area, the game ball is a specific ball entering means and a non-specific ball entering means. Whichever of the following cases, the player is given a predetermined number of game values (gaming balls), and the main control means, based on the detection of the special start detecting means, the variable ball entering means for the first time. Only a small hit state in which it is opened once or a plurality of times, or the variable ball entering means is opened for a second time longer than the first time, or a specified number of variable winning means are opened. One round until the game ball enters the ball is repeated a specified number of times, and a winning/winning lottery is performed to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot state. It may be applied to a gaming machine in which a big hit state is generated when a big hit is won in a win/win lottery and when the specific entry detecting means is detected. In addition, in addition to pachinko machines, various arrangement machines such as arrangement balls, similar game machines such as sparrow balls, slot machines as revolving-type machines, and game machines that combine slot machines and pachinko machines You may.

For example, in the case of being embodied in a slot machine, a plurality (for example, three) of stop-butane pressing order hitting games are set, and a part object 433 is provided when a correct answer is given. If a predetermined car is completed before the push order hitting game ends, the mission may be successful (the special car may be moved to a special gaming state).

[Appendix]
The technical ideas that can be understood from the above embodiment will be described below.

A. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting entrance means provided on the game board, a lottery is carried out as to whether or not a hit state is to be generated, and a lottery is displayed on the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-171480).

In recent years, by exchanging information between a gaming machine and a server operated by a gaming machine maker via a mobile communication terminal carried by the player, it is possible to provide enjoyment that cannot be enjoyed simply by playing the gaming machine. A game system that can be played (mobile linked game) is known. For example, by performing a mobile interlocking game, various customizations such as costumes can be executed with respect to continuously displayed objects such as characters that can be continuously displayed in a plurality of variable displays on the variable display means. .. Furthermore, in order to diversify the production and suppress the monotonous feeling at the time of playing, it is possible to customize multiple items for the continuous display object, and multiple patterns are available for customization of each item. is there.

However, when a plurality of customization items are prepared for the continuous display object, it is relatively difficult (for example, for a player who plays the game machine for the first time) to grasp or predict the final form of the continuous display object. It may be In this case, it may be difficult to understand that there is a customized item that has not been customized, that is, it may be difficult to understand how much the continuous display object can be customized. Therefore, despite the fact that the customization function has been enhanced, the player cannot convey the potential of the customization function, and the customization function hardly contributes to the motivation of the game. There is a risk that the player may stop playing the gaming machine before he/she understands and enjoys.

Further, if the customizing function is carefully explained in sentences on the variable display means or the like, the time required for such an explanation becomes long, and there is a concern that the flow of the production will be deteriorated (particularly, the player who has already been grasped). It's useless time for). Further, such an explanation is halfway, and for example, if the player cannot read the displayed explanation, the flow of the production will be worse and the explanation of the customization function will not be understood. There is concern that it will not contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a game system capable of fully enjoying a customization function.

Means A-1. In a gaming system including a gaming machine and a server capable of acquiring information about a game of the player via a portable communication terminal carried by the player,
The gaming machine is
An operation means that can be operated by the player,
Player specific information storage means for storing player information input by operation of the operation means by the player,
A game information storage unit capable of accumulating and storing game information, which is information related to a lottery performed during a game,
And an information output unit capable of outputting the game information accumulated and stored in the game information storage unit in a manner that can be acquired by a mobile communication terminal,
When the player information is stored in the player identification information storage means, processing according to the player information is performed, and game information regarding a game is accumulated and stored in the game information storage means. ,
The mobile communication terminal,
An information acquisition unit capable of acquiring the game information output from the information output unit;
When the game information is acquired by the information acquisition unit, a mobile-side transmitting unit that transmits the game information and mobile identification information that can identify the mobile communication terminal to the server,
A mobile-side receiving means for receiving the information transmitted from the server,
A portable output means capable of outputting the information received by the portable side receiving means,
The server is
A server-side receiving unit that receives the game information transmitted from the portable-side transmitting unit and the portable identification information;
Server-side game information storage means for storing and storing the game information in association with the mobile phone identification information,
When the game information and the mobile identification information are received by the server side receiving means, the storage information for storing and storing the game information in the server side game information storage means corresponding to the mobile identification information Control means,
And a server-side transmission unit that transmits information regarding the game information stored in the server-side game information storage unit to the mobile communication terminal,
The gaming machine is
Main control means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined trigger, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information,
While variably displaying the identification information in the variable display means, after a predetermined time, a display control means for stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the lottery,
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the variable display a plurality of times in the variable display means,
Regarding the continuous display object,
In addition to setting multiple customizable items,
There are multiple customization patterns for each customization item,
The continuous display object includes a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items are customized, and an unfinished object up to the completion object in which the customization items that are not yet customized exist.
The unfinished object is configured so that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from the already customized portion in correspondence with the customization item that is not yet customized,
A game system, wherein when the game information is output by the information output means, information about the continuous display object is also output.

According to the means A-1, by confirming the aspect of the unfinished object which is the form of the continuous display object in which the customized items which are not yet customized among the plurality of customized items exist, the part which is not customized yet (customized The existence of items) (there is room for further customization) can be understood at a glance. Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely understand how far the continuous display object can be customized, and it is possible to relatively smoothly find out how to enjoy the customized function by seeing the entire customized function. As a result, the customization function can be fully exerted, and the effect using the continuous display object can be fully enjoyed. Furthermore, by increasing interest in the customization function, it is possible to improve motivation to play the game.

In addition, the masked unfinished object can effectively and clearly recognize that there is a part that has not been customized, so it is not necessary to carefully explain the customization function separately. I'm done. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the flow of the production becomes worse due to the explanation of the customization function (especially, a player who has already grasped the game takes unnecessary time), and the game progresses relatively smoothly. You can

Further, information on the continuous display object in the gaming machine can be output to the server via the mobile communication terminal. As a result, on the server side, for example, it is possible to grasp the continuous display object that has been completed up to now, or grasp the unfinished object at the end of the previous game. Therefore, the information on the continuous display object of this game can be carried over to the next game (mobile linked game). As a result, if the continuous display object is not completed in one game with respect to the continuous display object, only the effect using the completed continuous display object can be seen. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing such a situation. Therefore, the convenience can be improved, and the production using the continuous display object can be made more diverse and deep. In addition, it is possible to enjoy and accumulate customizations over many days without overdoing it with one game.

Note that only completed objects that have been completed may be taken over, or both completed objects and unfinished objects may be taken over. In addition, the function to customize the continuous display object (or the function to select customization) is effective only when the mobile linked game is being executed, so it is desirable to participate in the mobile linked game. Can be increased.

It should be noted that "masking" is a feature (characteristic) that is not derived (added) to the unfinished part (a part corresponding to a customized item that has not been customized yet) in the unfinished object. A visual aspect) is derived so that it is possible to identify the existence of an unfinished portion and also to identify where the unfinished portion is. Then, by masking the unfinished part, it is possible to identify that the unfinished part is not the completed part. By customizing until the unfinished part disappears, the customization is completed (becomes a completed object). Can be identified. As a mode of "masking",
1) A part or all of the unfinished part, or a range including at least a part of the unfinished part,
2) A pattern that is not added in the completed part (a pattern consisting of lines, faces, spaces, etc., for example, not only a pattern like wallpaper, but also a stamp (a pattern such as a face of a character or a character) is pressed. Such as, such as a state where there is only the frame of the unfinished part and there is a void),
Colors that will not be derived in the completed part (for example, different hues (for example, sepia tone), different colors (such as monotone tone, which has few types of hues), etc.), Or
Touch of unfinished part that is not derived in the completed part (how to draw lines; thickness, fineness (number of lines), roundness of edges, etc.), or
These combinations
3) Covering, shielding, overlapping (on the front side or the back side of the unfinished portion), composition, application, and reflection.

Means A-2. The server is
A server-side continuous display object information storage unit capable of storing the information on the continuous display object in association with the mobile identification information;
When the information regarding the continuous display object is received from the portable communication terminal storing the game information of the gaming machine, the information regarding the continuous display object is stored in the server side continuous display object information storage means,
When receiving a request from the mobile communication terminal to transmit information about the game information stored in the server-side game information storage means to the mobile communication terminal, the server-side continuous display together with the information about the game information The game system according to the means A-1, wherein the information regarding the continuous display object stored in the object information storage means is also transmitted.

According to the means A-2, the information regarding the continuous display object can be handed over to the next game (mobile linked game).

Means A-3. The gaming machine is
Means for displaying the continuous display object on the variable display means based on the information on the continuous display object when information about the continuous display object is input by the operation of the operating means by the player The game system according to A-1 or A-2.

According to the means A-3, it is possible to reflect the information on the continuous display object of the game up to the previous time in the current game. The "information on the continuous display object input by the player's operation of the operation means" includes information on the game information issued by the server and accumulated and stored in the server, various setting information on the server, and the like. The password is used in the configuration in which the information about the continuous display object is included in the password. This is input information by means.

B. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting entrance means provided on the game board, a lottery is carried out as to whether or not a hit state is to be generated, and a lottery is displayed on the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-171480).

In addition, the gaming machine is configured to be able to execute customization of a plurality of items regarding a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in a plurality of variable displays on the variable display means, and prepare a plurality of patterns for customizing each item. There is something. In this way, by utilizing the continuously displayed objects whose modes are changed in various ways for production and the like, it is possible to diversify the production and the like and suppress monotonous feeling during the game.

However, when a plurality of customization items are prepared for the continuous display object, it is relatively difficult (for example, for a player who plays the game machine for the first time) to grasp or predict the final form of the continuous display object. It may be In this case, it may be difficult to understand that there is a customized item that has not been customized, that is, it may be difficult to understand how much the continuous display object can be customized. Therefore, despite the fact that the customization function has been enhanced, the player cannot convey the potential of the customization function, and the customization function hardly contributes to the motivation of the game. There is a risk that the player may stop playing the gaming machine before he/she understands and enjoys.

Further, if the customizing function is carefully explained in sentences on the variable display means or the like, the time required for such an explanation becomes long, and there is a concern that the flow of the production will be deteriorated (particularly, the player who has already been grasped). It's useless time for). Further, such an explanation is halfway, and for example, if the player cannot read the displayed explanation, the flow of the production will be worse and the explanation of the customization function will not be understood. There is concern that it will not contribute to the smooth progress of the game.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can fully enjoy a customization function.

Means B-1-a. Main control means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined trigger, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information,
In a gaming machine provided with display control means for variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means, and for a predetermined time, stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the lottery,
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the variable display a plurality of times in the variable display means,
Regarding the continuous display object,
In addition to setting multiple customizable items,
There are multiple customization patterns for each customization item,
The continuous display object includes a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items are customized, and an unfinished object up to the completed object in which the customization items that are not yet customized exist.
The unfinished object is configured such that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from the already customized portion in correspondence with the customization item that has not been customized yet. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to the means B-1-a, by confirming the mode of the unfinished object which is the form of the continuous display object in which the customization items which have not been customized yet among the plurality of customization items exist, the parts which have not been customized yet are confirmed. It is possible to grasp at a glance that (customization item) exists (there is room for further customization). Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely understand how far the continuous display object can be customized, and it is possible to relatively smoothly find out how to enjoy the customized function by seeing the entire customized function. As a result, the customization function can be fully exerted, and the effect using the continuous display object can be fully enjoyed. Furthermore, by increasing interest in the customization function, it is possible to improve motivation to play the game.

In addition, the masked unfinished object can effectively and clearly recognize that there is a part that has not been customized, so it is not necessary to carefully explain the customization function separately. I'm done. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the flow of the production becomes worse due to the explanation of the customization function (especially, a player who has already grasped the game takes unnecessary time), and the game progresses relatively smoothly. You can

Means B-1-b. Main control means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined trigger, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information,
In a gaming machine provided with display control means for variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means, and for a predetermined time, stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the lottery,
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the variable display a plurality of times in the variable display means,
Regarding the continuous display object,
In addition to setting multiple customizable items,
There are multiple customization patterns for each customization item,
The continuous display object includes a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items are customized, and an unfinished object up to the completion object in which the customization items that are not yet customized exist.
The unfinished object is configured so that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from the already customized portion in correspondence with the customization item that is not yet customized,
The game machine, wherein the display control means is configured to derive a display related to the unfinished object in a state where the unfinished object is displayed.

According to the means B-1-b, basically, the same operational effect as that of the means B-1-a is obtained. Further, according to the means B-1-b, the display related to the unfinished object can be derived while the unfinished object is displayed. Therefore, the player may be able to understand the unfinished object, or the player may visually recognize the unmasked aspect. Therefore, it is possible to make the customization more interested.

Means B-2. The game according to the means B-1, wherein the masking applied to the unfinished object corresponding to each of the customization items is configured to have a pattern different from at least the adjacent masking. Machine.

According to the means B-2, when there is a possibility that masking corresponding to a plurality of customization items is connected (consecutive) or approached, the masking corresponds to one customization item. It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which it becomes difficult to determine whether or not a plurality of customization items are supported. Therefore, it is possible to set the masking area corresponding to a plurality of customization items relatively freely, and by checking the mode of the unfinished object, there are still some parts (customization items) that have not been customized. You can grasp at a glance whether or not. Therefore, by more effectively deriving more information about the customization function, the player can make a decision about the customization function quickly and surely, and while fully advancing the game, fully enjoy the process of customization. can do.

The “different patterns” of masking include those having different colors or patterns or combinations thereof. Also, even if the masking areas are separated or a line is drawn on the boundary of the masking areas, by making the masking pattern of the adjacent masking areas different, it is possible to more easily and quickly customize items that have not been customized yet. It is possible to distinguish the numbers and types.

Means B-3. Customization progress storage means for storing information on customization of the unfinished object displayed on the variable display means,
Customization selecting means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern,
A customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the unfinished object,
When the customization item and the customization pattern are selected, the customization selection unit refers to the customization progress storage unit (avoids customization that overlaps the stored contents of the customization progress storage unit). The gaming machine according to B-1 or B-2.

According to the means B-3, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable because customization of the same content is selected in quick succession, and the customization function can be more fully enjoyed.

Means B-4. An operation means that can be operated by the player,
Customization opportunity giving means for determining whether to give a customization opportunity to the unfinished object,
Customization selecting means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern,
And a customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the unfinished object,
When it is decided by the customization opportunity giving means to give an opportunity for customization to the unfinished object, the portion of the unfinished object corresponding to the customization item selected by the customization selecting means is A configuration in which the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means is reflected,
The customization reflecting means is configured to be able to determine whether or not to reflect the customization pattern of the customization item selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object based on the input information by the operation on the operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of the means B-1 to B-3.

According to the means B-4, the customization item and the customization pattern are selected on the game machine side, but the customization pattern is not unilaterally customized on the game machine side but the customization pattern and the customization pattern are selected. It is possible for the player to decide whether to reflect the unfinished object. It is possible to reflect the player's individual preference and the like in the customization of the continuous display object (do not reflect the customization pattern that is not liked). Therefore, it is possible to prevent frustration such as customization not being as desired by the player while suppressing the customization function from becoming one pattern. As a result, the player can be more attached to the effect using the continuous display object while diversifying the customization function, and the motivation for the game can be improved.

As the "input information by operation on the operation means", information that is input in advance in the gaming machine such as a password including information about the player's individual game history and various settings, and the opportunity for customization were obtained. In this case, there is information and the like that selects whether or not to execute customization. In addition, when the opportunity for customization is given, an announcement is made to ask the player whether or not to reflect the selected customization pattern, and the input information by operating the operation means is updated one by one. It may be configured to confirm the intention of the player based on the above, or the player inputs the player's personal information to the gaming machine at the start of the game and the customization reflection means discards the personal information according to the personal information. It may be configured to make a selection. In addition, when the selected customization pattern is reflected on the continuous display object or when selecting whether or not to reflect the customization pattern, masking corresponding to the customization item to which the customization pattern belongs is usually not performed. Different modes (blinking, etc.) may be adopted.

Means B-5. An operation means that can be operated by the player,
Customization selecting means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern,
A customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the unfinished object,
The customization selection means,
A pattern random number generation means used in a pattern lottery for determining the customized pattern,
A value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means, and a corresponding pattern storage means that stores a correspondence relationship with the customized pattern,
A plurality of the corresponding pattern storage means are provided,
The customization selecting unit is configured to be able to determine the corresponding pattern storage unit to be referred to when selecting a customization pattern based on input information by an operation on the operation unit. A gaming machine according to any one of -4.

According to the means B-5, the player's individual game history, various settings (preferences), etc. can be reflected in the customization of the continuously displayed object (selection of the customization pattern by the customization selection means). Therefore, it is possible to prevent frustration such as customization not being as desired by the player while suppressing the customization function from becoming one pattern. As a result, the player can be more attached to the effect using the continuous display object while diversifying the customization function, and the motivation for the game can be improved.

Means B-6. Customization selecting means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern,
A customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the unfinished object,
The customization selection means,
A pattern random number generation means used in a pattern lottery for determining the customized pattern,
A configuration that includes a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and a corresponding pattern storage means that stores a correspondence relationship between the customized pattern and the customized pattern,
The corresponding pattern storage means is a first pattern storage means in which a specific customization pattern is not selected or is hard to be selected, and a second pattern storage means in which the specific customization pattern is easily selected as compared with the first pattern storage means. With and
When selecting a customization pattern by the customization selection means,
A first pattern selection state in which the first pattern storage means is referred to and the second pattern storage means is not referred to;
A means B characterized by comprising a customized pattern selection state switching means for changing the state to a second pattern selection state in which the second pattern storage means is referred to and the first pattern storage means is not referred to. The gaming machine according to any one of -1 to B-5.

According to the means B-6, by providing a state in which a specific customization pattern is easily provided (for example, a rare pattern highly accurate state in which a rare customization pattern is provided as a specific customization pattern with high probability), It is possible to increase interest in the game in a dimension different from the factor related to increase and decrease of, and to increase opportunities for production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling at the time of playing the game and improve the motivation for playing the game. The condition for changing the state between the first pattern selection state and the second pattern selection state can be appropriately set for each model.

Incidentally, in correspondence with the means B-3, "the customization selecting means refers to the customization progress storing means after selecting the customization item and the customization pattern, and the contents of the customization selected this time are If it is determined that the customization is the same as the content stored in the customization progress storage unit, the customization item may be reselected.” That is, in the means B-6, there is a state where a specific customization pattern is easily applied, and if the specific customization pattern is a rare customization pattern, the customization contents selected in such a rare pattern high-precision state are duplicated. However, if a specific customization pattern is changed to another customization pattern (a general customization pattern that is difficult to select or is not selected in the rare pattern high-precision state), why is the general customization pattern in the rare pattern high-precision state? There is concern that this may lead to a decline in interest and interest. On the other hand, in this example, since the duplication is avoided by changing the customization item without changing the customization pattern, such a situation can be avoided.

Means B-7. The customized pattern selection state switching unit executes a state change to the second pattern selection state based on the number of times of performing variable display of identification information on the variable display unit. Game machine.

According to the means B-7, the number of executions of fluctuation display (the number of fluctuations) serves as a trigger for the state change to the second pattern selection state, so that the player is more aware of when the trigger for the state change comes. It can be done easily. Therefore, for a player who wants to play a game in the second pattern selection state, it is possible to make it easier for the player to stand by using the number of fluctuations as a guide, or to easily explain the phenomenon corresponding to the second pattern selection state (specific customization pattern It is possible to make it easier to understand the reason why the selected item is selected, and the description of the effect in the case where the effect dedicated to the second pattern selection state is set. Further, by advancing the game, the approach is surely approached toward the trigger of the state change, so that it is possible to add value to the advancing game.

Means B-8. The pattern selection state switching means,
Means B-6 or B for executing the state change to the second pattern selection state when the pattern high-accuracy lottery to determine whether or not to change the state to the second pattern selection state is won. A gaming machine described in -7.

According to the means B-8, since winning the prize in the pattern high-accuracy lottery is the trigger for the state change to the second pattern selection state, the game is expected while always expecting the state change to the second pattern selection state. In addition to being able to perform, it is possible to perform an effect regarding the state change to the second pattern selection state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotonous feeling during the game.

Means B-9. The game according to any one of means B-6 to B-8, wherein the pattern selection state switching means executes a state change to the second pattern selection state based on the end of the special game state. Machine.

According to the means B-9, even if the special game state is over, by shifting to the second pattern selection state, the discouragement due to the end of the special game state and the significant decrease in the game motivation are alleviated. can do. In addition, as the special game state, it is possible to expect an increase in game value or to play a game while keeping the game value held by the player almost as it is, and the probability of occurrence of such a state is increased. The state etc.

Means B-10. Customization opportunity giving means for determining whether to give a customization opportunity to the unfinished object,
Customization selecting means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern,
A customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the unfinished object,
A configuration in which the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting unit is reflected on the unfinished object when it is determined by the customization opportunity giving unit that the customization opportunity is given to the unfinished object,
The customization opportunity giving means,
Customized lottery random number generation means used in a customized lottery whether or not to perform customization on the unfinished object,
As a value to be won in the customized lottery, a customized win value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the customized lottery random number generation means,
The customized winning value storage means includes a first customized winning value storage means and a second customized winning value storage means having a larger number of values to be won in the customized lottery than the first customized winning value storage means. ,
In the customization lottery by the customization opportunity giving means,
A first winning value storage selection state in which the first customized winning value storage means is referred to,
Any one of the means B-1 to B-9, characterized by further comprising a customized winning state switching means for changing the state of the second customized winning value storage means to a second winning value storage selected state referred to. The game machine described.

According to the means B-10, by providing the second winning value storage selection state (customization high-accuracy state) in which it is easy to customize the unfinished object, it is possible to enter a game at a dimension different from that related to increase/decrease in game value Can make you interested. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling at the time of playing the game and improve the motivation for playing the game. The condition for changing the state between the first winning value storage selected state and the second winning value storage selected state can be appropriately set for each model.

Means B-11. The customized win state switching means executes a state change to the second win value storage selection state based on the number of times of variable display of the identification information on the variable display means. The game machine described.

According to the means B-11, since the number of executions of the variation display (the number of variations) serves as a trigger for the state change to the second winning value storage selection state, it is easy to recognize when the trigger for the state change comes. can do. Therefore, it is possible for a player who desires a game in the second winning value storage selected state to easily start by using the number of fluctuations as a guide. Further, by advancing the game, the approach is surely approached toward the trigger of the state change, so that it is possible to add value to the advancing game.

Means B-12. The customized winning state switching means,
Customized high-probability lottery random number generation means used for the customized high-probability lottery, which determines whether or not to change the state to the second winning value storage selection state,
As a value to be won in the customized high-probability lottery, a customized high-probability win value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the customized high-probability lottery random number generation means,
The gaming machine according to the means B-10 or B-11, which executes a state change to the second winning value storage selection state based on a winning in the customized high-probability lottery.

According to the means B-12, winning in the customized high-accuracy lottery is a trigger for the state change to the second winning value storage selection state, so it is difficult to recognize when the trigger for the state change comes. can do. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while always expecting a state change to the second winning value storage selection state, and to perform an effect regarding the state change to the second winning value storage selection state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotonous feeling during the game.

It should be noted that the “customized high-accuracy lottery may be performed each time the variable display means displays the identification information in a variable manner”.

Means B-13. 13. The customized winning state switching means executes a state change to the second winning value storage selection state based on the end of the special game state, in any one of means B-10 to B-12. Game machine.

According to the means B-13, even if the special game state is over, by shifting to the second winning value memory selection state, discouragement due to the end of the special game state or a significant decrease in game motivation, etc. Can be reduced. In addition, as the special game state, it is possible to expect an increase in game value or to play a game while keeping the game value held by the player almost as it is, and the probability of occurrence of such a state is increased. The state etc.

Means B-14. The continuous display object includes a main object and a sub-object (which is a simplified form of the main object),
The main object and the sub-objects are
A base object that enables identification of the complete image of the completed object,
The customization object is set corresponding to each of the customization items, and is configured by a customization object displayed in a portion of the base object corresponding to the customization item by performing the customization,
When reflecting the customized object on the continuous display object, it is reflected on both the main object and the sub-object,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-13, wherein the masking is performed only on (the base object of the unfinished object of) the sub-object.

According to the means B-14, since the main object is not masked, for example, even if the main object in the state where all the customization items have not been customized yet (at the stage of unfinished object) is displayed, the masking is not performed. It will not be taken away. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the unfinished main object is masked, which causes a reduction in designability and a decrease in interest due to the masking. Instead, it can be fully entertained in the form of a main object.

On the other hand, the sub-objects that are to be customized in the same manner as the main object will be masked corresponding to the uncustomized parts. Therefore, even if the main object is not masked, if the sub-object is visually recognized, the progress of customization of the main object can be surely grasped.

Note that "the base object of the sub-object has a silhouette shape, and the base object of the main object has been drawn to the inner details". Furthermore, since there are a plurality of customization patterns, the "base object of the sub-object" may be in a "mode in which the completed object is simplified". For example, the drawing line or coloring is simplified, or Examples include deformed ones, reduced ones, and combinations thereof. Further, a character such as a person, an animal, or an anthropomorphized object may be adopted as the "base object", and a costume of the character, a tool used by the character, a vehicle, a background or the like may be adopted as the "customized object". .. Furthermore, as a "base object", a vehicle used by a predetermined character, a vehicle such as an airplane, a base of an object (cake, weapon, etc.) produced by the character, a background such as a living space or a zoo, is adopted, and a "customized object". As such, components such as vehicles and weapons, decorations, various objects installed in the background, and the like may be adopted.

In addition, both the main object and the sub-objects are displayed at the same time, and a configuration may be adopted in which the progress of customization is confirmed by the sub-objects while mainly enjoying the mode of the main object. It is configured so that only one of the objects is displayed, and the customization is reflected when the main object is displayed while the customization is progressing with only the sub-object being displayed. It may be possible to adopt a configuration in which the effect utilizing the main object is thoroughly enjoyed.

Means B-15. In a gaming machine capable of executing a mobile linked game in which information is exchanged with a server via a mobile communication terminal carried by a player,
An operation means that can be operated by the player,
A player specific information storage means for storing the player information input by the operation of the operation means by the player when starting the mobile linked game;
A game information storage unit capable of accumulating and storing game information, which is information related to a lottery performed during a game,
An information output unit capable of outputting the game information accumulated and stored in the game information storage unit in a manner that can be acquired or identified by the mobile communication terminal when the mobile linked game is finished,
By storing the player information in the player identifying information storage means, a process according to the player information is performed, and the game information regarding the current game is accumulated and stored in the game information storage means. There
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is output by the information output means, information about the continuous display object is also output, and means B-1 to B-14. A gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the means B-15, the information regarding the continuous display object of the current game can be carried over to the next game (mobile interlocking game). As a result, if the continuous display object is not completed in one game with respect to the continuous display object, only the effect using the completed continuous display object can be seen. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing such a situation. Therefore, the convenience can be improved, and the production using the continuous display object can be made more diverse and deep. In addition, it is possible to enjoy and accumulate customizations over many days without overdoing it with one game.

Note that only completed objects that have been completed may be taken over, or both completed objects and unfinished objects may be taken over. Further, the function of customizing the continuous display object (or the function of selecting customization) may be enabled only when the mobile linked game is being executed. In this case, it is possible to increase the motivation to participate in the mobile linked game.

For game machines that can customize character costumes, various sound effects, etc. according to the points obtained by playing mobile-linked games, various customizations are basically available on the web page of the server. Since the settings related to the above are made, the game machine cannot make various customization settings. For this reason, even if a new customization can be executed depending on the points obtained in this mobile linked game, in order to reflect such customization, this mobile linked game is ended and the mobile linked game is executed again. A series of work such as starting a game is required.

On the other hand, like the means B-4 and the means B-5, by adopting a configuration in which the player can perform various settings relating to the customization of the continuous display object in the gaming machine, the mobile interlocking game is not temporarily terminated. Even the customization can be reflected. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the convenience of customization and make the customization function more enjoyable (easy to install).

Means B-16. An unfinished customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each of the customization items of the unfinished object,
Completion customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each customization item of the completed object for which customization has been completed;
A completed object storing and storing means for storing and storing the customization contents of each of the customization items of the completed object for which customization is completed,
When all the customization items of the unfinished object are customized, the customization content of each customization item is configured to be stored in the completed customization storage unit,
At least when the stored content of the unfinished customization storage means is erased, the customization content of each customization item of the unfinished object is stored in the completed object storage storage means,
The information stored in the completed object storage storage means is not erased even if the storage content of the completed customization storage means is erased,
When the game information stored and stored in the game information storage means is output by the information output means, the information stored in the completed object storage and storage means is also output. 15. The gaming machine described in 15.

According to the means B-16, even if the completed object which is finally completed (in the first combination) by applying the trick and customization to the unfinished object is deleted in the course of the game, the completed object is completed. The information about what has been done remains in the memory (completed object storage/storage means) and is sent to the server via the mobile communication terminal carried by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the feeling of disappearance caused by the fact that the completed object that was finally completed is easily erased, and it is possible to add the enjoyment of collecting the collection.

Further, when the completed objects that are completed on the gaming machine are not being erased but are still accumulated, for example, the display mode of the completed objects becomes messy, the display processing becomes relatively difficult, or the completed objects are displayed. It may take some time to select the one to be used for production from the above, which may worsen the rhythm of the production or increase the memory capacity, but by gradually deleting it , Such concerns can be dispelled. Of course, since the memory that the completed object is completed certainly remains, it is possible to delete the completed object without hesitation.

Incidentally, an announcement display explaining the contents of the present means to the player may be displayed. For example, "You can check the completed object that you got today by accessing the homepage (server) after the (mobile linked) game. Furthermore, in the next mobile linked game, from the completed objects that you have obtained You can select the completed object to be used on the actual machine (game machine) and use it for production etc.”. Further, it is desirable that the announcement display is displayed when the completed object is deleted. In this case, it is possible to clearly recognize how the erased completed object will be handled, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to concentrate on the game.

Note that the stored contents of the completed object may be erased when an effect using the completed object is executed or when the player inputs an instruction to erase the effect.

Means B-17. Customized lottery random number generation means used in a customized lottery of whether or not to give an opportunity for customization to predetermined customization items of the unfinished object,
Of the values that can be generated by the customized random number counter, a customized winning value storage unit that stores a value that is won in the customized lottery,
An item lottery random number generation means used in an item lottery for determining a customization item to be customized from a plurality of the customization items,
A value that can be generated by the item lottery random number generation means, and a corresponding item storage means that stores a correspondence relationship between the customized item and
A pattern random number generation means used in a pattern lottery for determining the customized pattern,
A corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and the customized pattern;
A pattern that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and a non-mobile interlocking pattern table that stores a correspondence relationship between a suggestion production pattern that indicates a winning expectation level,
In the mobile interlocking game state in which the player information is stored in the player identification information storage means, when the customized lottery is won, the value of the item lottery random number generation means and the pattern random number By obtaining the value of the generating means, determining the customization item by referring to the corresponding item storing means, and determining the customization pattern by referring to the corresponding pattern storing means, the content of customization is determined,
In a state in which the player information is not stored in the player identification information storage means, in the mobile interlocking game state, the value of the pattern random number generation means is acquired when the customized lottery is won, The gaming machine according to the means B-15 or B-16, characterized in that the pattern of the suggestive effect is determined with reference to a pattern table when mobile is linked.

According to the means B-17, the customization function is exerted only in the mobile interlocking game state, so that it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the mobile interlocking game. Even in the non-mobile interlocking game state, the customized lottery is performed as in the mobile interlocked game state, and when the customized lottery is won, the suggestion effect is performed instead of the customization not performed. Further, when the pattern of the suggestive effect is determined, the value of the pattern random number generation means used also in the determination of the customized pattern is acquired, and the value is determined based on the value. Therefore, enjoyment such as suggestive effect can be given to the player who is not playing the mobile-linked game. Furthermore, by sharing the random number generation means used for control and pattern determination related to the suggestion effect with the random number generation means used for control related to the customization of mobile linked games and the determination of customized patterns. The control can be simplified and the storage area can be reduced.

Means B-18. The variable display means is configured to be able to execute a specific effect in which the completed object customized by the player is displayed in a specific mode,
There are a plurality of types of the specific effect, and the expectation of winning for the occurrence of the special game state varies depending on the combination of the type of the specific effect and the completed object displayed during the specific effect. Composed,
When the specific effect is performed, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the customization pattern of the completed vehicle displayed in the specific effect and the expectation of winning the occurrence of the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 or B-17.

According to the means B-18, by storing the player information in the player specifying information storage means and playing the mobile linked game, the continuous display object customized by the player is used as the specific object for the specific effect (appearance). It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance. Further, in the specific effect, the type of the specific effect is selected in accordance with the completed object selected by the player and the expectation of winning. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the combination of the completed object and the type of the specific effect greatly deviates from the expected winning degree.

Means B-19. A condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The main control means,
A random number generation means for use in a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the special game state,
As a value to be won in the lottery, winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the winning/random number generating means,
A holding storage area having a plurality of holding areas capable of storing the variation information used to determine the content of the variable display in the variable display means,
A discriminant value extraction process of extracting a value of the winning/discarding random number generating means based on the detection of the condition establishment detecting means,
A discriminant value storing process of storing the value of the random number generation means extracted in the discriminant value extracting process in any of the holding areas,
A first win/win determination process for determining whether or not the value of the win/win random number generation unit extracted in the discriminant value extraction process matches the value stored in the win value storage unit;
A result storing process for storing the result of the first hit/miss determination process;
(Specific production determination processing for determining whether or not to execute continuous production in variable display a plurality of times based on the result of the first hit determination processing)
Prior to the execution of the variable display on the variable display means, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning/random number generating means as the variation information corresponding to the variable display matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. A second winning/disabling determination process for determining whether to generate a special gaming state based on the information;
And a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on the result of the second hit determination process,
Customization selection means capable of selecting the customization item and the customization pattern when the first hit determination processing is performed;
The customization reflecting means for reflecting the contents of the customization selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object;
A selection customization display means capable of displaying the contents of the customization selected by the customization selection means,
The selection customization display means, in a state where the variation information is stored in the holding area of the holding storage area, the first hit/absence determination process corresponding to the variation information newly stored in the empty holding area. When suggesting information indicating the content of the customization selected by the customization selecting means is performed at a stage before the variable display corresponding to the variable information newly held in the holding area is started, 19. The means B-1 to B-18 according to any one of the means B-1 to B-18, characterized in that it is configured to be displayed in a form associated with a variation display corresponding to the variation information newly held in the holding area. Amusement machine.

According to the means B-19, since the hold storage area has a plurality of hold areas and the values of the random number generation means etc. relating to the setting of the variable display can be stored for a plurality of times, the variable display is consequently held. Will be done. Further, the present means is configured such that, when the value of the random number generating means is stored in the holding storage area, the lottery is confirmed and the customization item and the customization pattern can be selected by the customization selecting means. Therefore, when the variable display is suspended, the opportunity of customization is given and the contents of customization can be taught to the player. Therefore, for example, when the variable display is newly suspended when the variable display is already suspended, the step before the newly suspended variable display is executed, that is, rather than the variable display being suspended. It is possible to teach the content of customization given based on the newly suspended variable display while the previously suspended variable display is being performed. In this case, the player can deal with the instructed customization contents (preparation, operation, etc.) with a sufficient margin. Therefore, for example, when the player is requested to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation is not in time due to the short input period. In addition, with this configuration, it is not necessary to forcibly lengthen the variable time in order to secure an extra input period for the operation. Therefore, due to the long variable time, the progress of the game is delayed and the interest is reduced. It is possible to suppress the situation that causes

The selection customization display means may be configured by a variable display means, or may be configured by another predetermined display means. Further, in correspondence with the means B-2, "the mode of the suggestion information displayed in the selection customization display means is the unfinished object corresponding to the customization item to which the customization pattern indicated by the suggestion information belongs. Related to the masking pattern applied to (the background of the suggestion information is the same pattern)”. For example, the customization items are a to d, a is associated with blue, b is red, c is green, and d is associated with yellow, and the masking of the unfinished object is the color associated with the corresponding customization item. And at least a part of the suggestion information (for example, the shape of the customization item displayed on the front side of the background) may be configured in the color associated with the corresponding customization item. Good.

Further, in response to the above B-3, "a holding pattern for storing the customized pattern selected by the customization selecting unit in correspondence with the variation information stored in the holding area of the holding storage area. When the customization pattern is selected, the customization selection unit refers to the customization progress storage unit and the hold pattern storage unit to refer to the customization progress storage unit and the hold pattern storage unit. Selecting a customization pattern different from the stored content”. That is, according to this means B-19, since the right of customization is also held together with the variation information, if the customization pattern is selected only by looking at the pattern of the unfinished object, the held customization pattern is held. Therefore, it is necessary to refer to both the customization progress storage means and the hold pattern storage means in order to prevent the same customization pattern from being continuously selected.

Means B-20. The display control means is capable of changing the mode of the suggestion information displayed by the selective customization display means from the time the corresponding change information is stored in the holding area until the change information is executed. Is
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to means B-19, wherein the display control means determines whether or not to execute a mode change of the suggestion information, based on input information by an operation on the operation means.

According to the means B-20, the suggestion information displayed by the selective customization display means may change the mode even before being displayed in the predetermined mode, before the corresponding variable display is executed. For this reason, it is possible to diversify the effect, such as the step up of the expected degree of occurrence of the special game state suggested by the change in the mode of the suggestion information.

Further, there is a possibility that the suggestion information may change its form while being continuously displayed by the selection customization display means until the corresponding variable information is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, for a player who desires the appearance of customization of the content indicated by the suggestion information before the aspect change, the aspect change of the suggestion information may cause a decrease in interest. In this respect, the means B-20 is configured to be able to determine whether or not to change the mode of the suggestion information by an operation input by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems, and it is possible to proceed with customization while suppressing the occurrence of stress.

Note that the mode of the suggestion information may be determined by distribution based on the result of the first hit/absence determination process. In other words, by visually observing the mode of the suggestion information, it is possible to enjoy guessing how much expectation can be given to the occurrence of the special game state in the variable display at that time. The type of suggestion information and the presence/absence of a mode change are determined when the change information is suspended, and if there is a mode change, the mode change is performed when the corresponding change information reaches a predetermined timing. May be configured to (derive a pattern different from the determined pattern once and change it to the determined pattern later), or based on the variation information that is reserved afterwards, with retrofitting, The mode of the suggestion information corresponding to the already held variation information may be changed.

Means B-21. A customization opportunity giving means for deciding whether to give a customization opportunity to the unfinished object,
The customization opportunity giving means determines whether or not to give the customization opportunity according to the result of the first hit/miss determination processing,
The customization selecting means is configured to determine the type of customization in accordance with the result of the first hit determination processing,
On the basis of the latest result of the first hit/fail judgment processing performed in a state where the variation information including the result of the first hit/disallow judgment processing is stored in the hold area of the hold storage area, the customization opportunity giving means When it is determined that the customization opportunity is given, at the stage when the latest first winning/disabling judgment process is performed, in the variation information corresponding to the variation information stored in the holding area of the holding storage area, the latest The gaming machine according to means B-20, which is configured to be able to execute the customization determined by the customization selection means based on the result of the 1-win/non-win determination processing.

According to the means B-21, the variable display corresponding to the already-held variation information is performed when the execution of customization is determined in response to the variation information that has been subsequently retained in the retaining area of the retaining storage area. It is configured so that customization can be performed (with retrofitting) in. In this case, it is possible to diversify the production related to customization (for example, it is also possible to give a continuous notice of step-up production related to customization over a plurality of continuous variable displays) and improve convenience. To be more specific in terms of convenience, the execution of customization and the type of customization are determined based on the result of the first winning/disagreement determination process, in other words, according to the expected degree of occurrence of the special gaming state. It will be. Therefore, in the variable display that teaches the occurrence of the special game state, if an effect relating to customization is also derived, the time required for the effect to teach whether the special game state occurs or the change time becomes shorter. There is concern that the production balance may become unbalanced due to too long.

In this respect, in the variable display performed prior to the variable display that teaches the occurrence of the special game state, by executing the customization that is executed based on the occurrence of the special game state, It is possible to derive the production for teaching the occurrence of the special game state and the customization with a relatively large margin. Further, by associating the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state with the type of customization, when a predetermined customization is derived, the special game state occurs in the pending variable display thereafter. So, you can increase your expectations. In particular, by applying the above-mentioned configuration in a state (time shortened state) in which the time (fluctuation time) for the variable display of the identification information is set to be relatively short, such an action and effect are more remarkably exhibited. ..

Means B-22. The unfinished object is composed of a base object and a customization object that is displayed incidentally to the base object when the customization is performed,
The masking is a configuration that is performed corresponding to a portion of the base object of the sub-object where the customized object is not yet customized,
There are a plurality of types of the base object, and in response to the change of the base object, the customization object is also changed,
When the change of the base object is determined, until the change display corresponding to the suggestion information already displayed is exhausted, the change of the base object is awaited, and regarding the suggestion information, The gaming machine according to any one of means B-19 to B-21, wherein one corresponding to the changed type of the base object is derived.

According to the means B-22, in the structure in which the customization pattern (customization object) to be customized is displayed in advance, the base object is changed immediately before the desired customization pattern is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the customized object is also changed accordingly.

According to the present means, the base object is changed in advance when the customized object corresponding to the changed base object is displayed as the suggestion information before the base object is changed. You can figure it out. Using such a phenomenon, when the change of the base object and the expected degree of winning are associated with each other, or when the uncomfortable effect that the base object is supposed to be changed is not changed, the performance is improved. Can be planned.

Means B-23. (Provides various information regarding selection of customization function) Proximity detection means capable of detecting proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the variable display means as different information,
The gaming machine according to any one of means B-1 to B-22, characterized in that selection information by the player regarding the customization can be input based on the detection information of the proximity detection means.

According to the means B-23, for example, when one of the plurality of completed objects is selected, a selection operation is performed by touching any of the plurality of completed objects displayed on the variable display means. The operation can be made very easy to understand, for example. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation from being confused and timed out, and to prevent the game tempo from becoming worse by setting a relatively long time for such operation.

C. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting entrance means provided on the game board, a lottery is carried out as to whether or not a hit state is to be generated, and a lottery is displayed on the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-171480).

Also, with pachinko machines, it is known that the odds are added to the game by changing the winning probability in the lottery whether or not to generate the jackpot state, and changing the ease of entering the starting entry means. Has been.

However, there are cases where the chances of changing the winning probability or changing the ease with which the player can enter the starting entrance means may not come easily, and in that case, there is a concern that the game will become monotonous. It

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing monotonous feeling.

Means C-1. Main control means for performing a win/loss lottery of whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined trigger, and generating the special game state based on the result of the win/loss lot.
A variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information,
A gaming machine comprising: display control means for variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means, and, after a predetermined time, stopping and displaying the identification information on the basis of the result of the win/win lottery,
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the variable display a plurality of times in the variable display means,
Regarding the continuous display object,
In addition to setting multiple customizable items,
There are multiple customization patterns for each customization item,
The continuous display object includes a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items are customized, and an unfinished object up to the completed object in which the customization items that have not been customized exist. hand,
Customization selecting means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern,
A customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the unfinished object,
The customization selection means,
A pattern random number generation means used in a pattern lottery for determining the customized pattern,
A value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means, and a corresponding pattern storage means that stores a correspondence relationship with the customized pattern,
The corresponding pattern storage means,
A first pattern storage means in which a specific customization pattern is not selected or is difficult to select;
A second pattern storage means for easily selecting the specific customization pattern as compared with the first pattern storage means,
When selecting a customization pattern by the customization selection means,
A first pattern selection state in which the first pattern storage means is (or is easily referred to) and the second pattern storage means is not (or difficult to be referred to);
Customized pattern selection in which the second pattern storage means is referred to (or easily referred to) and the first pattern storage means is not referred to (or is difficult to be referred to) second pattern selection state A gaming machine having a state switching means.

According to the means C-1, by providing a state in which a specific customization pattern is easily provided (for example, a pattern high-precision state in which a rare customization pattern is highly likely to be provided as a specific customization pattern), It is possible to increase interest in games on a different dimension than the factors related to increase and decrease, and increase opportunities for production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling at the time of playing the game and improve the motivation for playing the game.

The condition for changing the state between the first pattern selection state and the second pattern selection state can be appropriately set for each model. Further, a pattern high accuracy teaching means for teaching the player of the existence of the second pattern selection state may be provided. By the pattern high-accuracy teaching means, for example, prior teaching such as what kind of state the second pattern selection state is, and what kind of conditions are satisfied to shift to the second pattern selection state. Teaching that the two patterns are being selected may be given. In this case, the existence of the second pattern selection state can be positively appealed to the player.

Means C-2. There is a first probability state in which the special game state is won with a predetermined probability in the win/loss lottery, and a second probability state in which the special game state is won in the win/win lottery with a higher probability than the first probability state. ,
The gaming machine according to means C-1, wherein the state change between the first pattern selection state and the second pattern selection state can be performed at least in the first probability state.

In general, the player does not finish the game in the second probability state in which it is easy to win the special game state, but finishes the game in the first probability state. That is, the player who wants to start the game selects the game machine to play from the game machines in the first probability state.

Therefore, according to the present means C-2, at least in the first probability state, it is configured to shift to the second pattern selection state in which the specific customization pattern is easily applied. Therefore, it is possible to give the player who is interested in customization a chance to start the game in the state where the specific customization pattern is likely to be given or may be such a state. Therefore, the motivation of the player to play the game can be improved, and the operating rate of the game machine can be improved.

Means C-3-a. The gaming machine according to means C-2, further comprising rare pattern high-accuracy state teaching means for teaching that the second pattern is selected.

According to the means C-3-a, the player can surely know whether or not the second pattern is selected by checking the rare pattern high-accuracy state teaching means, and the means C-2. The effect of is surely exhibited.

Means C-3-b. The rare pattern high-precision state teaching means is configured to be able to teach that the second pattern is selected even in a state where the variable display means is not displaying the variation of the identification information. The gaming machine according to the means C-3-a.

If the player is not playing the game, naturally, the variable display means does not perform the variable display of the identification state. That is, the player who wants to start the game selects the gaming machine to play from among the gaming machines whose identification information is not being variably displayed.

Therefore, according to the present means C-3-b, even if the variable display means is not performing the variable display of the identification information, it is in the second pattern selection state that the specific customization pattern is easily added, Is configured to be recognizable. Therefore, it is possible to more surely give the player who is interested in customization an opportunity to start the game, assuming that a specific customization pattern is easily given. Therefore, the player's willingness to play the game can be improved, and the effect of improving the operation rate of the game machine can be further achieved.

Means C-3-c. In a configuration in which a specific display (for example, a demo screen display as an energy saving mode) is derived in the variable display means when a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display of the identification information in the variable display means is stopped,
The rare pattern highly accurate state teaching means can teach that the second pattern is selected at least during the variable display of the identification information on the variable display means.
The gaming machine according to the means C-3-a, which is configured not to teach that the second pattern is selected during the specific display.

According to the means C-3-c, it is not possible to confirm whether or not the second pattern selection state is set in a state where the predetermined time has elapsed after the end of the variable display. Therefore, it is possible to increase the possibility that a player who is interested in customization will perform the variable display at least once.

Means C-4. The customization pattern selection state switching means executes a state change to the second pattern selection state based on the number of times of performing variable display of identification information on the variable display means. A gaming machine according to any one of -3.

According to the means C-4, since the number of executions of fluctuation display (the number of fluctuations) serves as a trigger for the state change to the second pattern selection state, the player is more aware of when the trigger for the state change comes. It can be done easily. Therefore, it is possible for a player who desires a game in the second pattern selection state to easily start by using the number of fluctuations as a guide, and as a result, an effect of promoting the operation of the gaming machine can be expected. In addition, it may be easier to explain the phenomenon corresponding to the second pattern selection state (for the reason why the specific customization pattern is selected, the production when the production dedicated to the second pattern selection state is set, and the like). The explanation can be made easier). Furthermore, by advancing the game, it is possible to surely approach the trigger of the state change, so that it is possible to add value to the advancing game. The number of executions of the variable display triggered by the state change to the second pattern selection state can be appropriately set for each model of the gaming machine.

The predetermined display means (variable display means may be used) may be configured to display the number of remaining variable displays until the state is changed to the second pattern selection state. Furthermore, when the upper limit of the number of fluctuations is set for the period of the second pattern selection state, the remaining number of fluctuation display until the end of the second pattern selection state may be displayed.

Means C-5. The pattern selection state switching means executes a state change to the second pattern selection state based on the end of the special game state or the end of the fake state of the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of 1 to C-4.

According to the means C-5, even if the special game state is over, by shifting to the second pattern selection state, the discouragement due to the end of the special game state and the significant decrease in the game motivation are alleviated. can do. In addition, as the special game state, it is possible to expect an increase in game value or to play a game while keeping the game value held by the player almost as it is, and the probability of occurrence of such a state is increased. It is also possible to set one or a plurality of them as a trigger for shifting to the second pattern selection state. Further, for example, "the pattern selection state switching means executes a state change to the second pattern selection state based on the end of the special game state or the end of the fake state of the special game state" Good.

Means C-6. The pattern selection state switching means,
Means C-1 to C for performing state change to the second pattern selection state when the pattern high-accuracy lottery for determining whether or not to change the state to the second pattern selection state is won. A gaming machine according to any one of -5.

According to the means C-6, since winning the prize in the pattern high-accuracy lottery is the trigger for the state change to the second pattern selection state, the game is always expected while expecting the state change to the second pattern selection state. In addition to being able to perform, it is possible to perform an effect regarding the state change to the second pattern selection state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotonous feeling during the game.

Means C-7. A customization opportunity giving means for deciding whether to give a customization opportunity to the unfinished object,
A configuration in which the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting unit is reflected on the unfinished object when it is determined by the customization opportunity giving unit that the customization opportunity is given to the unfinished object,
The customization opportunity giving means,
A customized lottery random number generation means used in a customized lottery whether or not to give an opportunity to customize the unfinished object,
As a value to be won in the customized lottery, a customized win value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the customized lottery random number generation means,
The customized winning value storage means includes a first customized winning value storage means and a second customized winning value storage means having a larger number of values to be won in the customized lottery than the first customized winning value storage means. ,
In the customization lottery by the customization opportunity giving means,
A first winning value storage selection state in which the first customized winning value storage means is referred to,
Any one of the means C-1 to C-6 characterized by further comprising a customized winning state switching means for changing the state of the second customized winning value storage means to the second winning value storage selected state referred to. The game machine described.

According to the means C-7, by providing the second winning value storage selection state (customization high-accuracy state) in which it is easy to customize the unfinished object, it is possible to enter a game in a dimension different from that related to the increase or decrease of the game value Can make you interested. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling at the time of playing the game and improve the motivation for playing the game. The condition for changing the state between the first winning value storage selected state and the second winning value storage selected state can be appropriately set for each model.

Means C-8. The customized winning state switching means executes a state change to the second winning value storage selection state based on the number of times of variable display of the identification information on the variable display means. The game machine described.

According to the means C-8, since the number of executions of variation display (number of variations) serves as a trigger for the state change to the second winning value storage selection state, it is easy to recognize when the trigger for the state change comes. can do. Therefore, it is possible for a player who desires a game in the second winning value storage selected state to easily start by using the number of fluctuations as a guide. Further, by advancing the game, the approach is surely approached toward the trigger of the state change, so that it is possible to add value to the advancing game.

Means C-9. 9. The gaming machine according to C-7 or C-8, wherein the customized winning state switching means executes a state change to the second winning value storage selection state based on the end of the special gaming state. ..

According to the means C-9, even if the special game state is over, by shifting to the second winning value memory selection state, discouragement due to the end of the special game state or a significant decrease in game motivation, etc. Can be reduced. In addition, as the special game state, it is possible to expect an increase in game value or to play a game while keeping the game value held by the player almost as it is, and the probability of occurrence of such a state is increased. The state etc.

Means C-10. The customized winning state switching means,
Customized high-probability lottery random number generation means used for the customized high-probability lottery, which determines whether or not to change the state to the second winning value storage selection state,
As a value to be won in the customized high-probability lottery, a customized high-probability win value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the customized high-probability lottery random number generation means,
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-7 to C-9, which executes a state change to the second winning value storage selection state based on a winning in the customized high-probability lottery.

According to the means C-10, since winning in the customized high-accuracy lottery is a trigger for the state change to the second winning value storage selection state, it is difficult to recognize when the trigger for the state change comes. can do. Therefore, it is possible to play a game while always expecting a state change to the second winning value storage selection state, and to perform an effect regarding the state change to the second winning value storage selection state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the monotonous feeling during the game. It should be noted that the “customized high-accuracy lottery may be performed each time the variable display means displays the identification information in a variable manner”.

Means C-11. The unfinished object is configured such that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from the already customized portion in correspondence with the customization item that has not been customized yet. The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-1 to C-10.

According to the means C-11, by confirming the mode of the unfinished object which is the form of the continuous display object in which the customization items that have not been customized yet among the plurality of customization items exist, the part that has not been customized (customization). The existence of items) (there is room for further customization) can be grasped at a glance. Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely understand how far the continuous display object can be customized, and it is possible to relatively smoothly find out how to enjoy the customized function by seeing the entire customized function. As a result, the customization function can be fully exerted, and the effect using the continuous display object can be fully enjoyed. Furthermore, by increasing interest in the customization function, it is possible to improve motivation to play the game.

In addition, the masked unfinished object can effectively and clearly recognize that there is a part that has not been customized, so it is not necessary to carefully explain the customization function separately. I'm done. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the flow of the production becomes worse due to the explanation of the customization function (especially, a player who has already grasped the game takes unnecessary time), and the game progresses relatively smoothly. You can

Means C-12. The game according to means C-11, wherein the masking applied to the unfinished object corresponding to each of the customization items is configured to have a pattern different from at least the adjacent masking. Machine.

According to the means C-12, when there is a possibility that masking corresponding to a plurality of customization items is connected (consecutive or continuous) or approached, the masking corresponds to one customization item. It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which it becomes difficult to determine whether or not a plurality of customization items are supported. Therefore, it is possible to set the masking area corresponding to a plurality of customization items relatively freely, and by checking the mode of the unfinished object, there are still some parts (customization items) that have not been customized. You can grasp at a glance whether or not. Therefore, by more effectively deriving more information about the customization function, the player can make a decision about the customization function quickly and surely, and while fully advancing the game, fully enjoy the process of customization. can do.

The “different patterns” of masking include those having different colors or patterns or combinations thereof. Also, even if the masking areas are separated or a line is drawn on the boundary of the masking areas, by making the masking pattern of the adjacent masking areas different, it is possible to more easily and quickly customize items that have not been customized yet. It is possible to distinguish the numbers and types.

Means C-13. The continuous display object includes a main object and a sub-object (which is a simplified form of the main object),
The main object and the sub-objects are
A base object that enables identification of the complete image of the completed object,
The customization object is set corresponding to each of the customization items, and is configured by a customization object displayed in a portion of the base object corresponding to the customization item by performing the customization,
When reflecting the customized object on the continuous display object, it is reflected on both the main object and the sub-object,
13. The gaming machine according to the means C-11 or C-12, wherein the masking is performed only on (the base object of) the unfinished object of the sub-object.

According to the means C-13, since the main object is not masked, for example, even if the main object in a state where all the customization items have not been customized yet (at the stage of unfinished object) is displayed, the masking is not performed. It will not be taken away. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the unfinished main object is masked, which causes a reduction in designability and a decrease in interest due to the masking. Instead, it can be fully entertained in the form of a main object.

On the other hand, the sub-objects that are to be customized in the same manner as the main object will be masked corresponding to the uncustomized parts. Therefore, even if the main object is not masked, if the sub-object is visually recognized, the progress of customization of the main object can be surely grasped.

Means C-14. Customization progress storage means for storing information on customization of the unfinished object displayed on the variable display means,
Customization selecting means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern,
A customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the unfinished object,
When the customization item and the customization pattern are selected, the customization selection unit refers to the customization progress storage unit (avoids customization that overlaps the stored contents of the customization progress storage unit). The gaming machine according to any one of means C-11 to C-13.

According to the means C-14, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable because customization of the same content is selected in quick succession, and the customization function can be more fully enjoyed.

It should be noted that “the customization selection unit refers to the customization progress storage unit after selecting the customization item and the customization pattern, and the customization content selected this time overlaps with the storage content of the customization progress storage unit. If it is determined that the customization is performed, the customization item is reselected.” That is, if the specific customization pattern of the means C-1 is a rare customization pattern, even if the contents of the customization selected in the rare pattern highly accurate state are duplicated, the specific customization pattern is different from the customization pattern. If it is changed to a pattern (a general customized pattern that is difficult to select or is not selected in the rare pattern high-accuracy state), it invites a decline in the excitement as to why a general customized pattern is selected in the rare pattern high-precision state. Is concerned. On the other hand, in this example, since the duplication is avoided by changing the customization item without changing the customization pattern, such a situation can be avoided.

Means C-15. An operation means that can be operated by the player,
Customization opportunity giving means for determining whether to give a customization opportunity to the unfinished object,
Customization selecting means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern,
A customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the unfinished object,
When it is decided by the customization opportunity giving means to give an opportunity for customization to the unfinished object, the portion of the unfinished object corresponding to the customization item selected by the customization selecting means is A configuration in which the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means is reflected,
The customization reflecting means is configured to be able to determine whether or not to reflect the customization pattern of the customization item selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object based on the input information by the operation on the operation means. The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-1 to C-14.

According to the means C-15, the customization item and the customization pattern are selected on the gaming machine side, but the customization pattern is not unilaterally customized on the gaming machine side, but the customization pattern and the customization pattern are selected. It is possible for the player to decide whether to reflect the unfinished object. It is possible to reflect the player's individual preference and the like in the customization of the continuous display object (do not reflect the customization pattern that is not liked). Therefore, it is possible to prevent frustration such as customization not being as desired by the player while suppressing the customization function from becoming one pattern. As a result, the player can be more attached to the effect using the continuous display object while diversifying the customization function, and the motivation for the game can be improved.

As the "input information by operation on the operation means", information that is input in advance in the gaming machine such as a password including information about the player's individual game history and various settings, and the opportunity for customization were obtained. In this case, there is information and the like that selects whether or not to execute customization. In addition, when the opportunity for customization is given, an announcement is made to ask the player whether or not to reflect the selected customization pattern, and the input information by operating the operation means is updated one by one. It may be configured to confirm the intention of the player based on the above, or the player inputs the player's personal information to the gaming machine at the start of the game and the customization reflection means discards the personal information according to the personal information. It may be configured to make a selection. In addition, when the selected customization pattern is reflected on the continuous display object or when selecting whether or not to reflect the customization pattern, masking corresponding to the customization item to which the customization pattern belongs is usually not performed. Different modes (blinking, etc.) may be adopted.

Means C-16. An operation means that can be operated by the player,
Customization selecting means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern,
A customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the unfinished object,
The customization selection means,
A pattern random number generation means used in a pattern lottery for determining the customized pattern,
A value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means, and a corresponding pattern storage means that stores a correspondence relationship with the customized pattern,
A plurality of the corresponding pattern storage means are provided,
The customization selecting means is configured to be able to determine the corresponding pattern storage means to be referred to when selecting a customization pattern based on input information by an operation on the operation means. A gaming machine according to any one of -15.

According to the means C-16, the player's individual game history, various settings (preferences), etc. can be reflected in the customization of the continuous display object (selection of the customization pattern by the customization selection means). Therefore, it is possible to prevent frustration such as customization not being as desired by the player while suppressing the customization function from becoming one pattern. As a result, the player can be more attached to the effect using the continuous display object while diversifying the customization function, and the motivation for the game can be improved.

Means C-17. In a gaming machine capable of executing a mobile linked game in which information is exchanged with a server via a mobile communication terminal carried by a player,
An operation means that can be operated by the player,
A player specific information storage means for storing the player information input by the operation of the operation means by the player when starting the mobile linked game;
A game information storage unit capable of accumulating and storing game information, which is information related to a lottery performed during a game,
An information output unit capable of outputting the game information accumulated and stored in the game information storage unit in a manner that can be acquired or identified by the mobile communication terminal when the mobile linked game is finished,
By storing the player information in the player identifying information storage means, a process according to the player information is performed, and the game information regarding the current game is accumulated and stored in the game information storage means. There
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is output by the information output means, information about the continuous display object is also output. Means C-1 to C-16 A gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the means C-17, the information regarding the continuous display object of the current game can be carried over to the next game (mobile interlocking game). As a result, if the continuous display object is not completed in one game with respect to the continuous display object, only the effect using the completed continuous display object can be seen. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing such a situation. Therefore, the convenience can be improved, and the production using the continuous display object can be made more diverse and deep. In addition, it is possible to enjoy and accumulate customizations over many days without overdoing it with one game.

Note that only completed objects that have been completed may be taken over, or both completed objects and unfinished objects may be taken over. Further, the function of customizing the continuous display object (or the function of selecting customization) may be enabled only when the mobile linked game is being executed. In this case, it is possible to increase the motivation to participate in the mobile linked game.

For game machines that can customize character costumes, various sound effects, etc. according to the points obtained by playing mobile-linked games, various customizations are basically available on the web page of the server. Since the settings related to the above are made, the game machine cannot make various customization settings. For this reason, even if a new customization can be executed depending on the points obtained in this mobile linked game, in order to reflect such customization, this mobile linked game is ended and the mobile linked game is executed again. A series of work such as starting a game is required.

On the other hand, like the means C-15 and the means C-16, by adopting a configuration in which the player can perform various settings relating to the customization of the continuous display object in the gaming machine, the mobile interlocking game is not temporarily terminated. Even the customization can be reflected. Therefore, it is possible to enhance the convenience of customization and make the customization function more enjoyable (easy to install).

Means C-18. An unfinished customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each of the customization items of the unfinished object,
Completion customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each customization item of the completed object for which customization has been completed;
A completed object storing and storing means for storing and storing the customization contents of each of the customization items of the completed object for which customization is completed,
When all the customization items of the unfinished object are customized, the customization content of each customization item is configured to be stored in the completed customization storage unit,
At least when the stored content of the unfinished customization storage means is erased, the customization content of each customization item of the unfinished object is stored in the completed object storage storage means,
The information stored in the completed object storage storage means is not erased even if the storage content of the completed customization storage means is erased,
When the game information stored and stored in the game information storage means is output by the information output means, the information stored in the completed object storage and storage means is also output. A game machine according to item 17.

According to the means C-18, even if the completed object which is finally completed (in the first combination) by customizing the unfinished object and the customization is deleted in the course of the game, the completed object is completed. The information about what has been done remains in the memory (completed object storage/storage means) and is sent to the server via the mobile communication terminal carried by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the feeling of disappearance caused by the fact that the completed object that was finally completed is easily erased, and it is possible to add the enjoyment of collecting the collection.

Further, when the completed objects that are completed on the gaming machine are not being erased but are still accumulated, for example, the display mode of the completed objects becomes messy, the display processing becomes relatively difficult, or the completed objects are displayed. It may take some time to select the one to be used for production from the above, which may worsen the rhythm of the production or increase the memory capacity, but by gradually deleting it , Such concerns can be dispelled. Of course, since the memory that the completed object is completed certainly remains, it is possible to delete the completed object without hesitation.

Incidentally, an announcement display explaining the contents of the present means to the player may be displayed. For example, "You can check the completed object that you got today by accessing the homepage (server) after the (mobile linked) game. Furthermore, in the next mobile linked game, from the completed objects that you have obtained You can select the completed object to be used on the actual machine (game machine) and use it for production etc.”. Further, it is desirable that the announcement display is displayed when the completed object is deleted. In this case, it is possible to clearly recognize how the erased completed object will be handled, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to concentrate on the game.

Note that the stored contents of the completed object may be erased when an effect using the completed object is executed or when the player inputs an instruction to erase the effect.

Means C-19. Customized lottery random number generation means used in a customized lottery of whether or not to give an opportunity for customization to predetermined customization items of the unfinished object,
Of the values that can be generated by the customized random number counter, a customized winning value storage unit that stores a value that is won in the customized lottery,
An item lottery random number generation means used in an item lottery for determining a customization item to be customized from a plurality of the customization items,
A value that can be generated by the item lottery random number generation means, and a corresponding item storage means that stores a correspondence relationship between the customized item and
A pattern random number generation means used in a pattern lottery for determining the customized pattern,
A corresponding pattern storage means for storing a correspondence relationship between a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and the customized pattern;
A pattern that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and a non-mobile interlocking pattern table that stores a correspondence relationship between a suggestion production pattern that indicates a winning expectation level,
In the mobile interlocking game state in which the player information is stored in the player identification information storage means, when the customized lottery is won, the value of the item lottery random number generation means and the pattern random number By obtaining the value of the generating means, determining the customization item by referring to the corresponding item storing means, and determining the customization pattern by referring to the corresponding pattern storing means, the content of customization is determined,
In a state in which the player information is not stored in the player identification information storage means, in the mobile interlocking game state, the value of the pattern random number generation means is acquired when the customized lottery is won, The gaming machine according to the means C-17 or C-18, characterized in that the pattern of the suggestive effect is determined with reference to a pattern table when mobile is linked.

According to the means C-19, the customization function is exerted only in the mobile interlocking game state, so that it is possible to improve the willingness to participate in the mobile interlocking game. Even in the non-mobile interlocking game state, the customized lottery is performed as in the mobile interlocked game state, and when the customized lottery is won, the suggestion effect is performed instead of the customization not performed. Further, when the pattern of the suggestive effect is determined, the value of the pattern random number generation means used also in the determination of the customized pattern is acquired, and the value is determined based on the value. Therefore, enjoyment such as suggestive effect can be given to the player who is not playing the mobile-linked game. Furthermore, by sharing the random number generation means used for control and pattern determination related to the suggestion effect with the random number generation means used for control related to the customization of mobile linked games and the determination of customized patterns. The control can be simplified and the storage area can be reduced.

Means C-20. The variable display means is configured to be able to execute a specific effect in which the completed object customized by the player is displayed in a specific mode,
There are a plurality of types of the specific effect, and the expectation of winning for the occurrence of the special game state varies depending on the combination of the type of the specific effect and the completed object displayed during the specific effect. Composed,
When the specific effect is performed, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the customization pattern of the completed vehicle displayed in the specific effect and the expectation of winning the occurrence of the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-1 or C-19.

According to the means C-20, by storing the player information in the player specifying information storage means and playing the mobile interlocking game, the continuous display object customized by the player is used as the specific object for the specific effect (appearance). It can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance. Further, in the specific effect, the type of the specific effect is selected in accordance with the completed object selected by the player and the expectation of winning. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the combination of the completed object and the type of the specific effect greatly deviates from the expected winning degree.

Means C-21. A condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The main control means,
A random number generation means for use in a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the special game state,
As a value to be won in the lottery, winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the winning/random number generating means,
A holding storage area having a plurality of holding areas capable of storing the variation information used to determine the content of the variable display in the variable display means,
A discriminant value extraction process of extracting a value of the winning/discarding random number generating means based on the detection of the condition establishment detecting means,
A discriminant value storing process of storing the value of the random number generation means extracted in the discriminant value extracting process in any of the holding areas,
A first win/win determination process for determining whether or not the value of the win/win random number generation unit extracted in the discriminant value extraction process matches the value stored in the win value storage unit;
A result storing process for storing the result of the first hit/miss determination process;
(Specific production determination processing for determining whether or not to execute continuous production in variable display a plurality of times based on the result of the first hit determination processing)
Prior to execution of the variable display on the variable display means, whether or not the value of the winning/random number generating means as the variation information corresponding to the variable display matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. A second winning/disabling determination process for determining whether to generate a special gaming state based on the information;
And a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on the result of the second hit determination process,
Customization selection means capable of selecting the customization item and the customization pattern when the first hit determination processing is performed;
The customization reflecting means for reflecting the contents of the customization selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object;
A selection customization display means capable of displaying the contents of the customization selected by the customization selection means,
The selection customization display means, in a state where the variation information is stored in the holding area of the holding storage area, the first hit/absence determination process corresponding to the variation information newly stored in the empty holding area. When suggesting information indicating the content of the customization selected by the customization selecting means is performed at a stage before the variable display corresponding to the variable information newly held in the holding area is started, 21. The means C-1 to C-20 according to any one of the means C-1 to C-20, characterized in that it can be displayed in a form associated with a variable display corresponding to the variable information newly held in the holding area. Amusement machine.

According to the means C-21, since the hold storage area has a plurality of hold areas and the values of the random number generation means etc. relating to the setting of the variable display can be stored a plurality of times, the variable display is consequently held. Will be done. Further, the present means is configured such that, when the value of the random number generating means is stored in the holding storage area, the lottery is confirmed and the customization item and the customization pattern can be selected by the customization selecting means. Therefore, when the variable display is suspended, an opportunity for customization is given and the contents of customization can be taught to the player. Therefore, for example, when the variable display is newly suspended when the variable display is already suspended, the step before the newly suspended variable display is executed, that is, rather than the variable display being suspended. It is possible to teach the content of customization given based on the newly suspended variable display while the previously suspended variable display is being performed. In this case, the player can deal with the instructed customization contents (preparation, operation, etc.) with a sufficient margin. Therefore, for example, when the player is requested to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation is not in time due to the short input period. In addition, with this configuration, it is not necessary to forcibly lengthen the variable time in order to secure an extra input period for the operation. Therefore, due to the long variable time, the progress of the game is delayed and the interest is reduced. It is possible to suppress the situation that causes

The selection customization display means may be configured by a variable display means, or may be configured by another predetermined display means. Further, in correspondence with the means B-2, "the mode of the suggestion information displayed in the selection customization display means is the unfinished object corresponding to the customization item to which the customization pattern indicated by the suggestion information belongs. Related to the masking pattern applied to (the background of the suggestion information is the same pattern)”. For example, the customization items are a to d, a is associated with blue, b is red, c is green, and d is associated with yellow, and the masking of the unfinished object is the color associated with the corresponding customization item. And at least a part of the suggestion information (for example, the shape of the customization item displayed on the front side of the background) may be configured in the color associated with the corresponding customization item. Good.

Further, as to the above C-14, "a holding pattern for storing the customization pattern selected by the customization selecting unit in correspondence with the variation information stored in the holding area of the holding storage area" When the customization pattern is selected, the customization selection unit refers to the customization progress storage unit and the hold pattern storage unit to refer to the customization progress storage unit and the hold pattern storage unit. Selecting a customization pattern different from the stored content”. That is, according to the means C-21, the right of customization is suspended along with the variation information. Therefore, if the customization pattern is selected only by looking at the pattern of the unfinished object, the suspended customization pattern. Therefore, it is necessary to refer to both the customization progress storage means and the hold pattern storage means in order to prevent the same customization pattern from being continuously selected.

Means C-22. The display control means is capable of changing the mode of the suggestion information displayed by the selective customization display means from the time the corresponding change information is stored in the holding area until the change information is executed. Is
Equipped with operation means that can be operated by the player,
The game machine according to means C-21, wherein the display control means determines whether or not to change the mode of the suggestion information, based on input information by an operation on the operation means.

According to the means C-22, the suggestion information displayed by the selective customization display means may change the mode even before being displayed in the predetermined mode, before the corresponding variable display is executed. For this reason, it is possible to diversify the effect, such as the step up of the expected degree of occurrence of the special game state suggested by the change in the mode of the suggestion information.

Further, there is a possibility that the suggestion information may change its form while being continuously displayed by the selection customization display means until the variable display of the corresponding variation information is executed. Therefore, for a player who desires the appearance of customization of the content indicated by the suggestion information before the aspect change, the aspect change of the suggestion information may cause a decrease in interest. In this respect, the means C-22 is configured to be able to determine whether or not to change the mode of the suggestion information, by an operation input by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems, and it is possible to proceed with customization while suppressing the occurrence of stress.

Note that the mode of the suggestion information may be determined by distribution based on the result of the first hit/absence determination process. In other words, by visually observing the mode of the suggestion information, it is possible to enjoy guessing how much expectation can be given to the occurrence of the special game state in the variable display at that time. The type of suggestion information and the presence/absence of a mode change are determined when the change information is suspended, and if there is a mode change, the mode change is performed when the corresponding change information reaches a predetermined timing. May be configured to (derive a pattern different from the determined pattern once and change it to the determined pattern later), or based on the variation information that is reserved afterwards, with retrofitting, The mode of the suggestion information corresponding to the already held variation information may be changed.

Means C-23. A customization opportunity giving means for deciding whether to give a customization opportunity to the unfinished object,
The customization opportunity giving means determines whether or not to give the customization opportunity according to the result of the first hit/miss determination processing,
The customization selecting means is configured to determine the type of customization in accordance with the result of the first hit determination processing,
On the basis of the latest result of the first hit/fail judgment processing performed in a state where the variation information including the result of the first hit/disallow judgment processing is stored in the hold area of the hold storage area, the customization opportunity giving means When it is determined that the customization opportunity is given, at the stage when the latest first winning/disabling judgment process is performed, in the variation information corresponding to the variation information stored in the holding area of the holding storage area, the latest The gaming machine according to means C-22, which is configured to be able to execute the customization determined by the customization selection means based on the result of the 1 hit/miss determination processing.

According to the means C-23, in the holding area of the holding storage area, when it is decided to execute customization in correspondence with the fluctuation information that has been held later, the fluctuation display corresponding to the fluctuation information that has already been held. It is configured so that customization can be performed (with retrofitting) in. In this case, it is possible to diversify the production related to customization (for example, it is also possible to give a continuous notice of step-up production related to customization over a plurality of continuous variable displays) and improve convenience. To be more specific in terms of convenience, the execution of customization and the type of customization are determined based on the result of the first winning/disagreement determination process, in other words, according to the expected degree of occurrence of the special gaming state. It will be. Therefore, in the variable display that teaches the occurrence of the special game state, if an effect relating to customization is also derived, the time required for the effect to teach whether the special game state occurs or the change time becomes shorter. There is concern that the production balance may become unbalanced due to too long.

In this respect, in the variable display performed prior to the variable display that teaches the occurrence of the special game state, by executing the customization that is executed based on the occurrence of the special game state, It is possible to derive the production for teaching the occurrence of the special game state and the customization with a relatively large margin. Further, by associating the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state with the type of customization, when a predetermined customization is derived, the special game state occurs in the pending variable display thereafter. So, you can increase your expectations. In particular, by applying the above-mentioned configuration in a state (time shortened state) in which the time (fluctuation time) for the variable display of the identification information is set to be relatively short, such an action and effect are more remarkably exhibited. ..

Means C-24. The unfinished object is composed of a base object and a customization object that is displayed incidentally to the base object when the customization is performed,
The masking is a configuration that is performed corresponding to a portion of the base object of the sub-object where the customized object is not yet customized,
There are a plurality of types of the base object, and in response to the change of the base object, the customization object is also changed,
When the change of the base object is determined, until the change display corresponding to the suggestion information already displayed is exhausted, the change of the base object is awaited, and regarding the suggestion information, The gaming machine according to any one of the means C-21 to C-23, wherein one corresponding to the changed type of the base object is derived.

According to the means C-24, in the configuration in which the customization pattern (customization object) to be customized is displayed in advance, the base object is changed immediately before the desired customization pattern is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the situation in which the customized object is also changed accordingly.

According to the present means, the base object is changed in advance when the customized object corresponding to the changed base object is displayed as the suggestion information before the base object is changed. You can figure it out. Using such a phenomenon, when the change of the base object and the expected degree of winning are associated with each other, or when the uncomfortable effect that the base object is supposed to be changed is not changed, the performance is improved. Can be planned.

Means C-25. (Provides various information regarding selection of customization function) Proximity detection means capable of detecting proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the variable display means as different information,
The gaming machine according to any one of means C-1 to C-24, characterized in that selection information by the player regarding the customization can be input based on the detection information of the proximity detection means.

According to the means C-25, for example, when any one of the plurality of completed objects is selected, the selection operation is performed by touching one of the plurality of completed objects displayed on the variable display means. The operation can be made very easy to understand, for example. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation from being confused and timed out, and to prevent the game tempo from becoming worse by setting a relatively long time for such operation.

D. There is a pachinko machine as a type of gaming machine. In the pachinko machine, when the game ball launched by the launching means enters the starting entrance means provided on the game board, a lottery is carried out as to whether or not a hit state is to be generated, and a lottery is displayed on the variable display means. A variable display is provided to teach the result (see, for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2006-171480).

Further, for example, in order to diversify the effect and suppress the monotonous feeling at the time of playing the game, regarding the continuous display object such as a character that can be continuously displayed in a plurality of variable displays on the variable display means, the game progresses. Depending on the item, some costumes can be changed.

By the way, since the contents of change of the continuous display object are determined by the gaming machine side, the continuous display object does not become the player's favorite, or conversely, the continuous display object becomes more and more distant from the player's favorite. There is a concern that it will be

Further, in recent years, by exchanging data between a gaming machine and a server operated by a gaming machine manufacturer or the like via a portable communication terminal carried by a player, it is not possible to enjoy simply playing the gaming machine. A game system (mobile interlocking game) capable of providing enjoyment is known, and by performing the mobile interlocking game, the player performs settings such as selecting (customizing) the change content of the continuous display object. Some are configured to allow.

However, such a setting is configured to be executable on the web page of the server, and when changing the setting, it was necessary to stop the game and access the server.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-mentioned problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that can fully enjoy a customization function.

Means D-1. Main control means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined trigger, and for generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information,
In a gaming machine provided with display control means for variably displaying the identification information on the variable display means, and for a predetermined time, stopping and displaying the identification information based on the result of the lottery,
The display control means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the variable display a plurality of times in the variable display means,
Regarding the continuous display object,
In addition to setting multiple customizable items,
There are multiple customization patterns for each customization item,
The continuous display object includes a completed object in which all of the plurality of customization items are customized, and an unfinished object up to the completed object in which the customization items that are not yet customized exist.
An operation means that can be operated by the player,
Customization opportunity giving means for determining whether to give a customization opportunity to the unfinished object,
Customization selecting means for selecting the customization item and the customization pattern,
A customization reflection means for reflecting the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means on the unfinished object,
When it is decided by the customization opportunity giving means to give an opportunity for customization to the unfinished object, the portion of the unfinished object corresponding to the customization item selected by the customization selecting means is A configuration in which the customization pattern selected by the customization selection means is reflected,
The customization reflecting means is configured to be able to determine whether or not to reflect the customization pattern of the customization item selected by the customization selecting means on the unfinished object based on the input information by the operation on the operation means. A gaming machine characterized by being.

According to the means D-1, although the customization item and the customization pattern are selected on the game machine side, the customization pattern is not unilaterally customized on the game machine side, but the customization pattern and the customization pattern are selected. It is possible for the player to decide whether to reflect the unfinished object. It is possible to reflect the player's individual preference and the like in the customization of the continuous display object (do not reflect the customization pattern that is not liked). Therefore, it is possible to prevent frustration such as customization not being as desired by the player while suppressing the customization function from becoming one pattern. As a result, the player can be more attached to the effect using the continuous display object while diversifying the customization function, and the motivation for the game can be improved.

Further, the customization is configured to be sequentially performed during the game. Therefore, for example, in order to reflect the customization in the unfinished object (to update the continuous display object), the game is more convenient than the configuration in which the game is temporarily ended and access to the server is required. It is possible to enhance the user-friendliness and enjoy the customization function more easily (make it easier to install).

As the "input information by operation on the operation means", information that is input in advance in the gaming machine such as a password including information about the player's individual game history and various settings, and the opportunity for customization were obtained. In this case, there is information and the like that selects whether or not to execute customization. In addition, when the opportunity for customization is given, an announcement is made to ask the player whether or not to reflect the selected customization pattern, and the input information by operating the operation means is updated one by one. It may be configured to confirm the intention of the player based on the above, or the player inputs the player's personal information to the gaming machine at the start of the game and the customization reflection means discards the personal information according to the personal information. It may be configured to make a selection.

Means D-2. The customization selection means,
A pattern random number generation means used in a pattern lottery for determining the customized pattern,
A value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means, and a corresponding pattern storage means that stores a correspondence relationship with the customized pattern,
A plurality of the corresponding pattern storage means are provided,
The means D-1 is characterized in that the customization selecting means is configured to be able to determine the corresponding pattern storage means to be referred to when selecting a customization pattern based on input information by an operation on the operation means. Game machine.

According to the means D-2, the player's individual game history, various settings (preferences), etc. can be reflected in the customization of the continuous display object (selection of the customization pattern by the customization selection means). Therefore, it is possible to prevent frustration such as customization not being as desired by the player while suppressing the customization function from becoming one pattern. As a result, the player can be more attached to the effect using the continuous display object while diversifying the customization function, and the motivation for the game can be improved.

Means D-3. The means D-1 or the means D-2, further comprising operable state teaching means for teaching that the operating means is in a customized operation input state in which an operation input relating to selection of a customization function is possible. Game machine.

According to the means D-3, the player can be more surely made aware that the customization operation input state is entered.

Means D-4. In a configuration in which the customizing operation input state occurs while the identification information is being variably displayed on the variable display means,
When the transition condition to the customizing operation input state is satisfied, it is determined whether or not a particular effect that can be derived while variable display of the identification information is being performed in the variable display means,
When it is determined that the specific effect is not being performed, the state shifts to the customizing operation input state, teaching by the operable state teaching means,
When it is determined that the specific performance is being performed, the transition to the customization operation input state is restricted, or the transition to the customization operation input state is not performed, but the teaching by the operable state teaching means is not performed. A gaming machine according to means D-3.

According to the means D-4, it is possible to prevent the specific effect from being obstructed by the teaching by the operable state teaching means. Therefore, when the specific effect is, for example, that the degree of expectation of occurrence of the special game state is high, teaching by the operable state teaching means is performed at the same time as the specific effect. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the decrease of In particular, as will be described later in detail, the variable display is stored on hold, and the setting operation related to customization performed in response to the variable display in the stored state can be performed (at the stage of being held). In the case of being configured, since the possibility that the customization operation input state and the derivation period of the specific effect are overlapped with each other is increased, the action and effect are more remarkably exhibited. Incidentally, in the case of a configuration in which the effect using the operation of the operation means is performed in the specific effect, it is desirable to restrict the shift to the customized operation input state when it is determined that the specific effect is being performed.

Means D-5. A condition satisfaction detecting means for detecting that a predetermined condition is satisfied,
The main control means,
A random number generation means for use in a lottery to determine whether or not to generate the special game state,
As a value to be won in the lottery, winning value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the winning/random number generating means,
A holding storage area having a plurality of holding areas capable of storing the variation information used to determine the content of the variable display in the variable display means,
A discriminant value extraction process of extracting a value of the winning/discarding random number generating means based on the detection of the condition establishment detecting means,
A discriminant value storing process of storing the value of the random number generation means extracted in the discriminant value extracting process in any of the holding areas,
A first win/win determination process for determining whether or not the value of the win/win random number generation unit extracted in the discriminant value extraction process matches the value stored in the win value storage unit;
A result storing process for storing the result of the first hit/miss determination process;
(Specific production determination processing for determining whether or not to execute continuous production in variable display a plurality of times based on the result of the first hit determination processing)
Prior to execution of the variable display on the variable display means, whether or not the value of the winning/random number generating means as the variation information corresponding to the variable display matches the value stored in the winning value storage means. A second winning/disabling determination process for determining whether to generate a special gaming state based on the information;
And a variable display setting process for setting a variable display based on the result of the second hit determination process,
And a selection customization display unit capable of displaying the content of the customization selected by the customization selection unit when the first hit determination processing is performed,
The selection customization display means, in a state where the variation information is stored in the holding area of the holding storage area, the first hit/absence determination process corresponding to the variation information newly stored in the empty holding area. When suggesting information indicating the content of the customization selected by the customization selecting means is performed at a stage before the variable display corresponding to the variable information newly held in the holding area is started, 5. The means D-1 to D-4 according to any one of the means D-1 to D-4, characterized in that it can be displayed in a form associated with a variable display corresponding to the variable information newly held in the holding area. Amusement machine.

According to the means D-5, since the hold storage area has a plurality of hold areas and the values of the random number generation means etc. relating to the setting of the variable display can be stored for a plurality of times, the variable display is consequently held. Will be done. Further, the present means is configured such that, when the value of the random number generating means is stored in the holding storage area, the lottery is confirmed and the customization item and the customization pattern can be selected by the customization selecting means. Therefore, when the variable display is suspended, the opportunity of customization is given and the contents of customization can be taught to the player. Therefore, for example, when the variable display is newly suspended when the variable display is already suspended, the step before the newly suspended variable display is executed, that is, rather than the variable display being suspended. It is possible to teach the content of customization given based on the newly suspended variable display while the previously suspended variable display is being performed. In this case, the player can deal with the instructed customization contents (preparation, operation, etc.) with a sufficient margin.

That is, for example, “When the variable display that allows the desired customization is put on hold, when an opportunity for customization corresponding to the variable display comes, an operation to reflect the customization on the unfinished object is performed. Or, "I have just customized the A pattern for the first customization item of the unfinished object, but in response to the two pending variable displays, the first and third customization items B Since it has been found that the pattern can be customized, the A pattern system should be stopped and the B pattern system should be aligned." Therefore, for example, when the player is requested to perform a predetermined operation, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the operation is not in time due to the short input period. In addition, with this configuration, it is not necessary to forcibly lengthen the variable time in order to secure an extra input period for the operation. Therefore, due to the long variable time, the progress of the game is delayed and the interest is reduced. It is possible to suppress the situation that causes The selection customization display means may be configured by a variable display means, or may be configured by another predetermined display means.

Means D-6. The display control means is configured to be able to change the mode of the suggestion information displayed by the selective customization display means from the time when the corresponding change information is stored in the holding area until the change information is executed. ,
The gaming machine according to means D-5, wherein the display control means determines whether or not to execute a mode change of the suggestion information, based on input information by an operation on the operation means.

According to the means D-6, the suggestion information displayed by the selective customization display means may change the mode before the corresponding variable display is executed even after being displayed once in the predetermined mode. For this reason, it is possible to diversify the effect, such as the step up of the expected degree of occurrence of the special game state suggested by the change in the mode of the suggestion information.

Further, there is a possibility that the suggestion information may change its form while being continuously displayed by the selection customization display means until the corresponding variable information is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, for a player who desires the appearance of customization of the content indicated by the suggestion information before the aspect change, the aspect change of the suggestion information may cause a decrease in interest. In this respect, the present means is configured to be able to determine whether or not to change the mode of the suggestion information, by an operation input by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems, and it is possible to proceed with customization while suppressing the occurrence of stress.

Note that the mode of the suggestion information may be determined by distribution based on the result of the first hit/absence determination process. In other words, by visually observing the mode of the suggestion information, it is possible to enjoy guessing how much expectation can be given to the occurrence of the special game state in the variable display at that time. The type of suggestion information and the presence/absence of a mode change are determined when the change information is suspended, and if there is a mode change, the mode change is performed when the corresponding change information reaches a predetermined timing. May be configured to (derive a pattern different from the determined pattern once and change it to the determined pattern later), or based on the variation information that is reserved afterwards, with retrofitting, The mode of the suggestion information corresponding to the already held variation information may be changed.

Means D-7. The customization opportunity giving means determines whether or not to give the customization opportunity according to the result of the first hit/miss determination processing,
The customization selecting means is configured to determine the type of customization in accordance with the result of the first hit determination processing,
On the basis of the latest result of the first hit/fail judgment processing performed in a state where the variation information including the result of the first hit/disallow judgment processing is stored in the hold area of the hold storage area, the customization opportunity giving means When it is determined that the customization opportunity is given, at the stage when the latest first winning/disabling judgment process is performed, in the variation information corresponding to the variation information stored in the holding area of the holding storage area, the latest The gaming machine according to means D-6, which is configured to be able to execute the customization determined by the customization selecting means based on the result of the 1 hit/miss determination processing.

According to the means D-7, in the holding area of the holding storage area, when the execution of customization is determined in correspondence with the fluctuation information that is held later, the fluctuation display corresponding to the already held fluctuation information is displayed. It is configured so that customization can be performed (with retrofitting) in. In this case, it is possible to diversify the production related to customization (for example, it is also possible to give a continuous notice of step-up production related to customization over a plurality of continuous variable displays) and improve convenience. To be more specific in terms of convenience, the execution of customization and the type of customization are determined based on the result of the first winning/disagreement determination process, in other words, according to the expected degree of occurrence of the special gaming state. It will be. Therefore, in the variable display that teaches the occurrence of the special game state, if an effect relating to customization is also derived, the time required for the effect to teach whether the special game state occurs or the change time becomes shorter. There is concern that the production balance may become unbalanced due to too long.

In this respect, in the variable display performed prior to the variable display that teaches the occurrence of the special game state, by executing the customization that is executed based on the occurrence of the special game state, It is possible to derive the production for teaching the occurrence of the special game state and the customization with a relatively large margin. Further, by associating the degree of expectation for the occurrence of the special game state with the type of customization, when a predetermined customization is derived, the special game state occurs in the pending variable display thereafter. So, you can increase your expectations. In particular, by applying the above-mentioned configuration in a state (time shortened state) in which the time (fluctuation time) for the variable display of the identification information is set to be relatively short, such an action and effect are more remarkably exhibited. ..

Means D-8. Providing proximity detection means capable of detecting proximity or contact of an object to a plurality of locations of the variable display means on which various information regarding selection of a customization function is displayed as different information,
The gaming machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-7, wherein the player can input selection information regarding the customization based on the detection information of the proximity detection means.

According to the means D-8, for example, when any one of the plurality of completed objects is selected, the selection operation is performed by touching any of the plurality of completed objects displayed on the variable display means. The operation can be made very easy to understand, for example. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operation from being confused and timed out, and to prevent the game tempo from becoming worse by setting a relatively long time for such operation.

Means D-9. The unfinished object is configured such that a part of the completed object is masked in a manner different from the already customized portion in correspondence with the customization item that has not been customized yet. The gaming machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-8.

According to the means D-9, by confirming the mode of the unfinished object which is the form of the continuous display object in which the customized items which are not yet customized among the plurality of customized items exist, the part which is not customized yet (customized The existence of items) (there is room for further customization) can be grasped at a glance. Therefore, it is possible to easily and surely understand how far the continuous display object can be customized, and it is possible to relatively smoothly find out how to enjoy the customized function by seeing the entire customized function. As a result, the customization function can be fully exerted, and the effect using the continuous display object can be fully enjoyed. Furthermore, by increasing interest in the customization function, it is possible to improve motivation to play the game.

In addition, the masked unfinished object can effectively and clearly recognize that there is a part that has not been customized, so it is not necessary to carefully explain the customization function separately. I'm done. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the flow of the production becomes worse due to the explanation of the customization function (especially, a player who has already grasped the game takes unnecessary time), and the game progresses relatively smoothly. You can

Means D-10. The game according to means D-9, wherein the masking applied to the unfinished object corresponding to each of the customization items is configured to have a pattern different from at least the adjacent masking. Machine.

According to the means D-10, when there is a possibility that masking corresponding to a plurality of customization items is connected (consecutive or continuous) or approached, the masking corresponds to one customization item. It is possible to more reliably avoid a situation in which it becomes difficult to determine whether or not a plurality of customization items are supported. Therefore, it is possible to set the masking area corresponding to a plurality of customization items relatively freely, and by checking the mode of the unfinished object, there are still some parts (customization items) that have not been customized. You can grasp at a glance whether or not. Therefore, by more effectively deriving more information about the customization function, the player can make a decision about the customization function quickly and surely, and while fully advancing the game, fully enjoy the process of customization. can do.

The “different patterns” of masking include those having different colors or patterns or combinations thereof. Also, even if the masking areas are separated or a line is drawn on the boundary of the masking areas, by making the masking pattern of the adjacent masking areas different, it is possible to more easily and quickly customize items that have not been customized yet. It is possible to distinguish the numbers and types.

Incidentally, corresponding to the means D-5, “the masking pattern of the unfinished object is associated with the corresponding customization item, and the suggestion information is a part object indicating the customization item and the customization pattern. , And the background pattern of the suggestion information is associated with the masking pattern of the part of the unfinished object corresponding to the part object of the suggestion information”. Furthermore, “the unfinished object is configured as a mode in which the boundaries of the parts corresponding to the respective customization items can be identified, and when an opportunity for customization is given to the unfinished object, The part corresponding to the customization item of the customization may be changed to a mode different from the other parts." When these configurations are adopted, when the player judges whether or not to reflect the customization, it is possible to relatively smoothly confirm which part corresponds to the customization.

Means D-11. A customization progress storage means for storing information on customization of the unfinished object displayed on the variable display means,
When the customization item and the customization pattern are selected, the customization selection unit refers to the customization progress storage unit (avoids customization that overlaps the stored contents of the customization progress storage unit). The gaming machine according to D-9 or D-10.

According to the means D-11, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the player feels uncomfortable because customization of the same content is selected in quick succession, and the customization function can be more fully enjoyed.

Means D-12. The continuous display object includes a main object and a sub-object (which is a simplified form of the main object),
The main object and the sub-objects are
A base object that enables identification of the complete image of the completed object,
The customization object is set corresponding to each of the customization items, and is configured by a customization object displayed in a portion of the base object corresponding to the customization item by performing the customization,
When reflecting the customized object on the continuous display object, it is reflected on both the main object and the sub-object,
The masking is configured to be applied only to (the base object of) the unfinished object of the sub-object,
The main object is configured to change its mode based on an operation on the operation means,
12. The game according to any one of means D-9 to D-11, characterized in that a selection input operation method for reflecting the customized object on the continuous display object and an input operation method for changing the mode of the main object are different. Machine.

According to the means D-12, since the main object is not masked, for example, even if the main object in a state where all the customization items have not been customized yet (at the stage of unfinished object) is displayed, the masking is not done. It will not be taken away. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation where the unfinished main object is masked, which causes a reduction in designability and a decrease in interest due to the masking. Instead, it can be fully entertained in the form of a main object.

On the other hand, the sub-objects that are to be customized in the same manner as the main object will be masked corresponding to the uncustomized parts. Therefore, even if the main object is not masked, if the sub-object is visually recognized, the progress of customization of the main object can be surely grasped.

Further, since the mode of the main object can be changed based on the operation of the operation means, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling during the game. Further, when the player is operating the operation means to change the mode of the main object, when the state shifts to a state where selection input relating to customization is made, unintentional selection input is performed unintentionally. Is concerned. In this respect, such a problem can be avoided by making the operation method relating to the change of the mode of the main object different from the operation method relating to the selection input of customization as in the present means.

Note that "the base object of the sub-object has a silhouette shape, and the base object of the main object has been drawn to the inner details". Furthermore, since there are a plurality of customization patterns, the "base object of the sub-object" may be in a "mode in which the completed object is simplified". For example, the drawing line or coloring is simplified, or Examples include deformed ones, reduced ones, and combinations thereof. Further, a character such as a person, an animal, or an anthropomorphized object may be adopted as the "base object", and a costume of the character, a tool used by the character, a vehicle, a background or the like may be adopted as the "customized object". .. Furthermore, as a "base object", a vehicle used by a predetermined character, a vehicle such as an airplane, a base of an object (cake, weapon, etc.) produced by the character, a background such as a living space or a zoo, is adopted, and a "customized object". As such, components such as vehicles and weapons, decorations, various objects installed in the background, and the like may be adopted.

In addition, both the main object and the sub-objects are displayed at the same time, and a configuration may be adopted in which the progress of customization is confirmed by the sub-objects while mainly enjoying the mode of the main object. It is configured so that only one of the objects is displayed, and the customization is reflected when the main object is displayed while the customization is progressing with only the sub-object being displayed. It may be possible to adopt a configuration in which the effect utilizing the main object is thoroughly enjoyed.

Means D-13. The customization selection means,
A pattern random number generation means used in a pattern lottery for determining the customized pattern,
A configuration that includes a value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means and a corresponding pattern storage means that stores a correspondence relationship between the customized pattern and the customized pattern,
The corresponding pattern storage means is a first pattern storage means in which a specific customization pattern is not selected or is hard to be selected, and a second pattern storage means in which the specific customization pattern is easily selected as compared with the first pattern storage means. With and
When selecting a customization pattern by the customization selection means,
A first pattern selection state in which the first pattern storage means is referred to and the second pattern storage means is not referred to;
Means D characterized by comprising a customized pattern selection state switching means for changing the state to the second pattern selection state in which the second pattern storage means is referred to and the first pattern storage means is not referred to. The gaming machine according to any one of -1 to D-12.

According to the means D-13, a game value is provided by providing a state in which a specific customization pattern is easily provided (for example, a rare pattern highly accurate state in which a rare customization pattern is provided as a specific customization pattern with a high probability). It is possible to increase interest in the game in a dimension different from the factor related to increase and decrease of, and to increase opportunities for production. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the monotonous feeling at the time of playing the game and improve the motivation for playing the game. The condition for changing the state between the first pattern selection state and the second pattern selection state can be appropriately set for each model.

Incidentally, in correspondence with the means D-11, "the customization selecting means refers to the customization progress storing means after selecting the customization item and the customization pattern, and the contents of the customization selected this time are If it is determined that the customization is the same as the content stored in the customization progress storage unit, the customization item may be reselected.” That is, in the means D-13, there is a state in which a specific customization pattern is easily applied, and if the specific customization pattern is a rare customization pattern, the customization details selected in such a rare pattern high-precision state will overlap. However, if a specific customization pattern is changed to another customization pattern (a general customization pattern that is difficult to select or is not selected in the rare pattern high-precision state), why is the general customization pattern in the rare pattern high-precision state? There is concern that this may lead to a decline in interest and interest. On the other hand, in this example, since the duplication is avoided by changing the customization item without changing the customization pattern, such a situation can be avoided.

Means D-14. In a gaming machine capable of executing a mobile linked game in which information is exchanged with a server via a mobile communication terminal carried by a player,
An operation means that can be operated by the player,
A player specific information storage means for storing the player information input by the operation of the operation means by the player when starting the mobile linked game;
A game information storage unit capable of accumulating and storing game information, which is information related to a lottery performed during a game,
An information output unit capable of outputting the game information accumulated and stored in the game information storage unit in a manner that can be acquired or identified by the mobile communication terminal when the mobile linked game is finished,
By storing the player information in the player identifying information storage means, a process according to the player information is performed, and the game information regarding the current game is accumulated and stored in the game information storage means. There
When the game information stored in the game information storage means is output by the information output means, the information regarding the continuous display object is also output, and means D-1 to D-13. A gaming machine according to any one of 1.

According to the means D-14, the information on the continuous display object of the current game can be carried over to the next game (mobile linked game). As a result, if the continuous display object is not completed in one game with respect to the continuous display object, only the effect using the completed continuous display object can be seen. It is possible to increase the enjoyment of the next game while suppressing such a situation. Therefore, the convenience can be improved, and the production using the continuous display object can be made more diverse and deep. In addition, it is possible to enjoy and accumulate customizations over many days without overdoing it with one game.

Note that only completed objects that have been completed may be taken over, or both completed objects and unfinished objects may be taken over. Further, the function of customizing the continuous display object (or the function of selecting customization) may be enabled only when the mobile linked game is being executed. In this case, it is possible to increase the motivation to participate in the mobile linked game.

Means D-15. An unfinished customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each of the customization items of the unfinished object,
Completion customization storage means for storing the contents of customization of each customization item of the completed object for which customization has been completed;
A completed object storing and storing means for storing and storing the customization contents of each of the customization items of the completed object for which customization is completed,
When all the customization items of the unfinished object are customized, the customization content of each customization item is configured to be stored in the completed customization storage unit,
At least when the stored content of the unfinished customization storage means is erased, the customization content of each customization item of the unfinished object is stored in the completed object storage storage means,
The information stored in the completed object storage storage means is not erased even if the storage content of the completed customization storage means is erased,
When the game information stored and stored in the game information storage means is output by the information output means, the information stored in the completed object storage and storage means is also output. 14. A gaming machine described in 14.

According to the means D-15, even if the completed object which is finally completed (in the first combination) by customizing the unfinished object and the customization is deleted in the course of the game, the completed object is completed. The information about what has been done remains in the memory (completed object storage/storage means) and is sent to the server via the mobile communication terminal carried by the player. Therefore, it is possible to avoid the feeling of disappearance caused by the fact that the completed object that was finally completed is easily erased, and it is possible to add the enjoyment of collecting the collection.

Further, when the completed objects that are completed on the gaming machine are not being erased but are still accumulated, for example, the display mode of the completed objects becomes messy, the display processing becomes relatively difficult, or the completed objects are displayed. It may take some time to select the one to be used for production from the above, which may worsen the rhythm of the production or increase the memory capacity, but by gradually deleting it , Such concerns can be dispelled. Of course, since the memory that the completed object is completed certainly remains, it is possible to delete the completed object without hesitation.

Incidentally, an announcement display explaining the contents of the present means to the player may be displayed. For example, "You can check the completed object that you got today by accessing the homepage (server) after the (mobile linked) game. Furthermore, in the next mobile linked game, from the completed objects that you have obtained You can select the completed object to be used on the actual machine (game machine) and use it for production etc.”. Further, it is desirable that the announcement display is displayed when the completed object is deleted. In this case, it is possible to clearly recognize how the erased completed object will be handled, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which it is difficult to concentrate on the game.

Note that the stored contents of the completed object may be erased when an effect using the completed object is executed or when the player inputs an instruction to erase the effect.

Means D-16. The variable display means is configured to be able to execute a specific effect in which the completed object customized by the player is displayed in a specific mode,
There are a plurality of types of the specific effect, and the expectation of winning for the occurrence of the special game state varies depending on the combination of the type of the specific effect and the completed object displayed during the specific effect. Composed,
When the specific effect is performed, the type of the specific effect is determined based on the customization pattern of the completed vehicle displayed in the specific effect and the expectation of winning the occurrence of the special game state. The configuration is
While determining whether to execute the specific effect when starting the variable display of the identification information,
When determining whether or not to execute the specific effect, if it is determined that an opportunity for customization is given in the variable display, execution of the specific effect is avoided, or means D-1 or The gaming machine according to any one of D-15.

According to the means D-16, by storing the player information in the player specifying information storage means and performing the mobile interlocking game, the continuous display object customized by the player is used as the specific object for the specific effect (appearance). ) Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to improve the performance. Further, in the specific effect, the type of the specific effect is selected in accordance with the completed object selected by the player and the expectation of winning. For this reason, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the combination of the completed object and the type of the specific effect greatly deviates from the expected winning degree.

In addition, the type of the specific effect is determined because the expected degree of winning for the occurrence of the special game state is different depending on the combination of the type of the specific effect and the pattern of the completed object displayed in the specific effect. Later, if the pattern of the completed car is changed, there is a concern that the reliability of the winning expectation will be reduced. In this regard, with this means, it is possible to maintain the reliability of the expected winning degree by avoiding the situation in which the pattern of the completed car is changed after determining the type of the specific effect, and the customization is reflected to the player. It is possible to make it so that even if the selection is made or not, the degree of expectation is not affected.

Means D-17. The customization selection means,
An item lottery random number generation means used in an item lottery for determining a customization item to be customized from a plurality of the customization items,
A value that can be generated by the item lottery random number generation means, and a corresponding item storage means that stores a correspondence relationship between the customized item and
A pattern random number generation means used in a pattern lottery for determining the customized pattern,
A value that can be generated by the pattern random number generation means, and a corresponding pattern storage means that stores a correspondence relationship with the customized pattern,
When it is determined that the customization opportunity is given by the customization opportunity giving means, the value of the item lottery random number generating means and the value of the pattern random number generating means are determined based on the operation input by the operation means. Is acquired, based on the value of the acquired item lottery random number generation means, and the value of the pattern random number generation means, the corresponding item storage means, and the corresponding pattern storage means is referred to, 17. A game machine according to any one of means D-1 to D-16, wherein a customization item and the customization pattern are determined.

According to the means D-17, the contents of customization (customization items and customization patterns) are determined (lottery is carried out) by the operation of the player, so that the player can be familiar with the customization.

Means D-18. The customization opportunity giving means,
Customized lottery random number generation means used in a customized lottery whether or not to perform customization on the unfinished object,
As a value to be won in the customized lottery, a customized win value storage means for storing a predetermined value among the values that can be generated by the customized lottery random number generation means,
When the predetermined condition is satisfied, the value of the customized lottery random number generation means is acquired based on the operation input by the operation means, and based on the value of the acquired customized lottery random number generation means, the customized winning value The gaming machine according to any one of the means D-1 to D-17, wherein the storage means is referenced to determine whether or not to give the customization opportunity.

According to the means D-18, whether or not the opportunity for customization is given is determined by the operation of the player (a lottery is performed), so that the player can be interested in the customization.

The basic configuration of various game machines to which the above means are applied is shown below.

a. The game machine in each of the above means is a ball game machine. As a more detailed example, "operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by the player, launching means (launching motor, etc.) for playing and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the launching There is a "ball game machine" provided with a game area in which the game balls are guided, and each ball means (general winning hole, variable winning device, actuating hole, etc.) arranged in the game area.

b. The game machine in each of the above means is a ball-and-ball game machine having a game area extending substantially vertically. As a more detailed example, "operation means (game ball launching handle) operated by the player, launching means (launching motor, etc.) for playing and launching the game ball based on the operation of the operating means, and the launching A predetermined game area (for example, the game area is configured by a game board surface or the like) that is guided along the game ball and extends substantially in the vertical direction, and each ball entering means (general winning opening, Variable winning device, actuating port, etc.), and the behavior of a game ball flowing down in the game area can be visually recognized.

c. The gaming machine or the ball game machine in each of the above means is a pachinko machine or a gaming machine similar to a pachinko machine.

d. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a spinning-roller gaming machine such as a slot machine. As a more detailed example, "variable display of an identification information sequence (design sequence; specifically, a reel with a design, a rotating body such as a belt) including a plurality of identification information (designs) (specifically, a reel) The variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) for stopping and displaying the identification information sequence after the rotation) is provided, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The variation of the identification information (symbol) is started, the variation of the identification information (symbol) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification is aligned on the effective line at the time of the suspension. A spinning-roller type gaming machine configured to give a game value on condition that the information is specific identification information”.

e. The gaming machine in each of the above means is a gaming machine of a type in which a slot machine and a pachinko machine are integrated (in particular, a gaming machine with a slot machine specification that uses a game ball as a game medium). As a more detailed example, "variable display of an identification information sequence (design sequence; specifically, a reel with a design, a rotating body such as a belt) including a plurality of identification information (designs) (specifically, a reel) The variable display means (specifically, a rotating body unit such as a reel unit) for stopping and displaying the identification information sequence after the rotation) is provided, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (specifically, the start lever). The variation of the identification information (symbol) is started, the variation of the identification information (symbol) is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (specifically, the stop button), and the identification is aligned on the effective line at the time of the suspension. A game value is provided on condition that the information is specific identification information, and a ball saucer (upper plate, etc.) is further provided to take in game balls from the ball saucer, and to the ball saucer. A gaming machine having a payout means for paying out a game ball, and the game start condition being satisfied by the game ball being taken in by the taking-in means".

10... Pachinko machine, 32a... 1st variable winning device, 32b... 2nd variable winning device, 33a... 1st starting winning device, 33b... 2nd starting winning device, 34... Through gate, 42... Decorative symbol display device, 43L ... 1st special display device, 43R... 2nd special display device, 261,... Main control device, 262... Sub control device.

Claims (2)

First control means for performing a lottery on whether or not to generate a special game state advantageous to the player based on a predetermined trigger and for generating the special game state based on the result of the lottery,
A result display unit that variably displays the identification information based on the predetermined trigger, and stops and displays the identification information based on the result of the win/no win lottery,
An effect display means capable of deriving an effect display that starts with the start of the change of the identification information and ends with the stop display of the identification information,
A second control means for controlling the effect display means based on information from the first control means,
The effect display means is configured to be capable of deriving a continuous display object that can be continuously displayed in the plurality of variable displays in the result display means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is a pachinko machine or a spinning drum type gaming machine.

Images